Punjab Rural Water Supply & Sanitation Programme

(World Bank Assisted)

Technical Manual

Department of Water Supply & Sanitation

Govt. of Punjab

October, 2006
 Index
Page No.
1-3
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Objective

1.2 Objective of the technical manual

1.3 Scope of the Technical manual

1.4.1 Methodology to adopted for preparation of estimate
1.4 who can use the manual
1.5 Limitations for manual
CHAPTER 2 WATER SUPPLY 4-22
2.1 Basic Design criteria
2.1.1 Per capita supply
2.12 Source of supply
2.1.2.1 Water Quality
2.1.3 Storage
2.1.2 Source of supply
2.1.2.1 Water Quality
2.1.3. Storage
2.1.4 Treatment
2.1.5 Distribution System
2.1.5.1 Water Supply Duration and Peak Factor
2.1.5.2 Selection of Minimum size of Distribution Pipe
2.1.5.3 Design of velocity
2.1.5.4 Material of Pipes
2.1.6 Depth and width of Trench required to by the Pipe
2.1.7 Pumps
2.1.8 Ground Water Recharge measures
21.9 Water quality standards and significance-Norms for acceptance
2.2 Attributes of Drinking Water
2.2.1 Definitions
2.2.2 Water and health of community
2.2.3 Natural water
2.2.4 Environmental significance of water quality
2.2.4.1 Physical Parameters
2.2.4.2 Chemical Parameters
2.2.4.3 Trace elements
2.2.4.4 Biological Contaminants
2.2.5 Sanitary Survey
2.2.6 Water Quality Report
2.2.7 Review of source water quality
2.2.8 Scientific selection
2.2.9 Geophysical exploration
2.3 Geomegnetic
2.3.1 Acoustic and Seismic
2.3.2 Electrical Resistivity
2.4 Assesment of yield
2.5 Water Quality monitoring
2.5.1 Water Quality Surveillance
2.5.1.1 Water Quality Surveillance Programme
2.5.1.2 Present status of rural water quality surveillance and lab
 infrastructure proposed
CHAPTER 3 POPULATION FORECAST 23-24
3.1 Population Forcast
3.1.1 Demographic Melliod
3.1.2 Arithmetical Progression
3.1.3 Geometrical Progression Method
3.1.4 Logistic Method
3.1.5 Lucremental increase Method
3.1.6 Graphical Comparision Method
3.1.7 Population forecast for Peri- Urban areas
3.2 Final Prediction
CHAPTER 4 TYPES OF SOURCES FOR WATER SUPPLY 25-63
4.1 Hydrological cycle
4.2 Ground Waters
4.2.1 Driven Well (Hand Pumps)
4.2.2 Tube Wells
4.2.3 Springs
4.2.4 Percolation Wells
4.3 Methods of Drilling
4.3.1 Pereussion Drilling
4.3.2 Direct circulation Drilling
4.3.3 Reverse circulation Drilling
4.4.4 Down the Hole (DTH) Hammer Drilling
4.3.5 Hand Boring
4.3.6 Slection of Drilling Rigs
4.3.7 Classification
4.3.8 Selection
4.4 Well casing
4.4.1 Coating of Tubes
4.4.2 Types
4.4.3 Material
4.5 Design features
4.5.1 Length of screen
4.5.2 Diameter of screen
4.5.3 Slot size
4.6 Guidelines for selection of slot size
4.6.1 Determination of slot size
4.7 Gravel packing
4.7.1 Need for Gravel packing
4.7.2 Criterion for Gravel packing
4.7.2.1 Choice of Strainer
4.7.2.2 Particle Size Distribution
4.7.3 Pack Aquifer Ratio
4.7.4 Thickness
4.8 Methods of Development
4.8.1 Over Pumping
4.8.2 Comparessed Air
4.8.3 Calculation of Discharge
4.9 Verticality and Alignment
4.9.1 The condition that cause wells to be out of plumb are
4.9.2 The measurement made are of the plumbness and straightness of
the cased bore
4.9.3 In case of grevel
4.9.4 The Verticality of tubewell
4.10 Maintenance of Tubewell
4.10.1 Factors affecting well performance
4.11 Preventive Design features
4.12 Maintenance Planning
4.12 Interpretation of observed or measured changes in well
Performance or condition
4.13 Well Rehabilitation and Abandonment well Rehabilitation
4.14 Surface waters

CHAPTER 5 PRELIMINARY SCHEME REPORT 64-66

5.1 Reconneissance
5 (b) Annexure 5 b
CHAPTER 6 DETILED ENGINEERING FOR A RURAL WATER SUPPLY 67-89
SCHEME
6.1 Surveys
6.1.1 Total station survey system (TSSS)
6.2 Selection of source
6.3 Ground water based schemes
6.3.1 Tube Wells
6.4 Water works structure
6.4.1 Pump chamber
6.4.2 Staff Quarter
6.4.3 Storage Tank
6.4.4 Pumping Machinery
6.4.4.1 Criteria for Pump Selection
6.4.4.2 Limitation on Suction Head
6.4.4.3 Pump efficiencies
6.4.4.4 Pump Installation
6.4.4.5 Accessories
6.4.4.7 Electrical connection
6.4.4.8.1 Safety Procedures
6.4.4.9 Pump operation
6.4.4.10 Trouble Shooting and Remedial measures
6.4.5 Disinfection plant
6.5 Transmission
6.5.1 Hazen williams formula
6.5.2 Co. efficients of roughness
6.5.3 Resistance due to specials and appurtenances
6.5.4 Pipe materials
6.5.5 Depth of cover
6.5.6 Hydraulic testing of the Pipeline
6.6 Appurtenances
6.6.1 Sluice valves
6.6.2 Scour valve
6.6.3 Air valves
6.6.4 Reflux valves
6.6.5 Anchor Blocks
6.6.6 Water Hammer
6.6.7 Economical size of Pumping main
CHAPTER 7 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 90-100
7.1 Planning and Design over head services Reserviors
7.1.1 Capacity and location
7.1.2 Staging
7.1.3 Shape
7.1.4 Standardized capacity and sizes of Pipes
7.1.5 Pipe connection for inlet, outlet, Scour, over flow etc.
7.1.6 Accessories
7.1.7 Design Principles
7.2 Distribution System
7.2.1 Hydraulic Network Analysis
7.2.2 Input data
7.3 Types of valves & their location
Scour valves
Reflux valves
Pressure Reducing valves
Air valves
7.3.1 Location of the Air valves
7.4 House service connection
7.5 Distribution of water
7.6 Design Approach for Water Supply Schemes in Severe Power Shortage
areas
CHAPTER 8 WATER TRTEATMENT 101-108
8.1 Water treatment processes
8.2 Intake structures for surface water
8.2.1 Intake works
8.2.2 Inlet channel
8.3 Storage and sedimentation of surface water
8.3.1 Suction and Scour wells
8.3.2 Pumping units
8.3.3 High level Tank
8.4 Filters
8.4.1 Filtering media
8.4.1 Pressure Filters
8.5 Clear water Reservior
8.5.1 Over head service Reservior (O.H.S.R.)
8.5.2 Disinfections
8.6 Priority levels for Techincal options for water quality
CHAPTER 9 ASSESMENT OF EXISTING SYSTEM 109-110
9.00 Assessment of Existing System
CHAPTER 10 SMALL BORE SIZED SEWERAGE SYSTEM 111-115
10.1 Present scenario of wastewater disposal
10.2 What is small bore sewerage system
10.3 Treatment Technologies
103.1 Stablization Ponds
10.3.2 Duckweed Pond Technology
10.3.3 Treatment by Tree Plantation /Forestry (Karnal Technology)
10.3.4 Root Zone Technology /Wet Land System(RZ)
10.3.5 Aerated Lagoons (AL)
10.4 Cost of the Small Bore sewerage system
CHAPTER 11 RURAL SANITATION 116-128
11 Rural Sanitation
11.1 Use of locally available material for household toilets and drains
11.2 Twin pit pur flush latrine (TPPFL)
11.2.1 TPPFL pits in water logged, flood prone and high sub soil water
areas and rocky strata
Pits in water logged flood prone and high sub- soil water areas
Pits in Rockey Strata
Pits in Soil with Low infiltration capacity
Pits where space is a constraint
what are the pollution Safeguards
11.2.2 Operation and maintenance of TPPF Latrine
How to operate and maintain a TPPF latrine
Diversion of flow from one pit to another
Removal and Disposal of pit sludge
Do's and Do not's
Don'ts
Observations to be made during construction
Materials
11.3 Institutional and group Toilets
11.4 Soak Pit
Calculation of Percolation Rate
11.5 Pucca drains
Layout of drains
Surveying and data collection
CHAPTER 12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF WATER SUPPLY 129-142
SCHEMES
12.1 Maintenance of source
12.2 Maintenance of Pumps
12.3 Maintenance of treatment units
a) Maintenance of slow Sand filter
b) Maintenance of Setting tank
c) Operation & Maintenance of disinfection systems
c1 Differential pressure chlorinator
12.4 Maintenance of pumping main
12.5 Maintenance of O.H.S.R./U.G.S.R
i Cleaning operation
ii Safety precautions
12.6 Maintenance of Distribution system
12.7 Maintenance of structure, Lawns & clean Environment
12.8 Duties of Pump operators & Maintenance of records
i Log Book
ii Complaint Register
iii Movement Register
iv Meeting register with Panchayats
v Chlorination Register
12.9 Annexure of Model O& M calculation for a village water supply
scheme
12.10 O& M cost estimate
General
I Salient Details of Scheme
a) Requirement of water
b) Source
c) Storage
d) Distribution system
II Cost of Scheme
III O&M cost per year for schemes maintained by DWSS
IV Annual Maintenance and repair
CHAPTER 13 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT 143-159
13.1 Sequence of construction
a) Source
b) Civil works
c) Testing of Materials
d) Construction Management
e) Payment Schedule to Contractor
f) Commissioning & Trail Run
13.2 Technical Specifications
13.3 Check list for construction Quality Management at Site
13.4 Formats for test report
CHAPTER 14 SPECIFIC WATER TREATMENT PROCESSES 160-165
14.1 Deflouridation of water
14.1.1 Flouride exchangers
14.1.2 Anion exchangers
14.1.3 Magnesium salts
14.1.4 Aluminium slats
14.1.5 Simple method of Deflouridation
14.2 Reverse osmosis
14.2.1 Consultancy support for ro plants
14.3 Pressure filters
CHAPTER 15 COMPLETION PLAN AND REPORTS 166-168
15.1 As built drawings/completion drawing
15.2 Completion reports
ANNEXURES A TO O 169-278
 CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION
Water is called the life stream of a community. The supply of safe water to the community
in adequate quantity and quality is one of the important responsibilities of a civic body.
1.1 Objective:
The overall project development objective is to assist Government of Punjab in
improving the quality of rural water supply and sanitation service delivery to
achieve sustainability of investments. Specifically the objectives would be to
institutionalize on a significant scale, decentralization of Rural Water Supply and
Sanitation (RWSS) service delivery to Gram Panchayats and user group and build
the States capacity to scale up the new decentralized services delivery model
statewide.
The RWSS Project , aims at improving the quality of life in rural area by RWSS
service standards. The project will adopt a demand response approach and use of
participatory process and change the role of Government at all levels from direct
service provider to that of a facilitator.
In the Punjab Rural Water Supply and Sanitation (RWSS) sector, present
key issues are:
1) Poor operational performance of existing RWSS facilities due to lack of
funds coupled with declining ground water sources and deteriorating/poor
water quality.
2) Poor sanitation coverage and poor management of existing facilities.
Some of the above issue can be traced to inadequate planning and designing
of the existing Rural Water Supply and Sanitation facilities.
1.2 Objectives of the technical manual:
The main objective of this technical manual is to develop guidelines to plan,
design, construction, operation and maintenance of water supply and
sanitation facilities to be developed/strengthened under the project. The
technical manual is produced in a user friendly manner with simple text,
sketches / drawings, type designs, rate analysis, estimates etc.
1.3 Scope of the Technical Manual:
 The technical manual contains: The significance of water quality, population
forecast, design criteria for all technology options for Rural Water Supply
and Sanitation schemes, requirements, procedures and guidelines for
selection of sources for water supply, methods of field survey and
investigations along with guidelines for planning ground water recharge
facilities.
Requirements, contents and formats for preparation of Preliminary Scheme
Report (PSR), Detailed Scheme Report (DSR), Standard designs, drawings,
cost estimates and specifications for typical work & installations proposed
under the project such as water supply, sanitation (latrines), lane
improvements, drains and other works
1.4.1 Methodology to be adopted for preparation of estimates:
Common schedules of rates used by the Water Supply department along
with latest ceiling premium shall be used to obtain rates of items covered in
the common schedule of rates. However market rates items/goods not
covered in CSR shall be obtained by committee of officers from the current
price list issued by by reputed manufacturers will be basis for preparation of
cost estimates. Adequate margin shall also be provided in the estimate to
cover any cost escalation as there will be some lag time between actual
execution of project and preparation of estimate to avoid cost over runs
which may delay the project .Analysis of market rates for goods and works
required for the projects, procurement methods, market enquiry and
obtaining quotations for ensuring transparency, economy and quality of
goods and works. Water supply project shall be carried by single
responsibility contract system. No centralized purchase of machinery pipes
etc shall be carried out . No rate contract shall be carried out with
manufacturers or suppliers of materials to be used in the water supply and
sanitation project
Inspection /Testing to be done by the engineers to ensure the goods and
works are in conformity with the specification.
Chief Engineer water supply will supply list of approved laboratories
(nearest to each project district) where facilities for conducting tests for

2
 assessing quality of water sources, materials and works are available at the
time of start of execution of project .
1.4 Who can use the Manual?
This manual is meant for the following categories of users:
Gram Panchayat functionaries and VWSC members involved in planning
and implementing the project.
Govt. agencies and consultants involved in planning and implementing the
project.
Agencies / persons involved in technical administration approval of the
project.
Non-government Organization and Support Agencies involved in planning
and implementing the project.
Besides this, manual can also be used as a guide for conducting training
programs for the above functionaries.
1.5 Limitations for Manual:
The use of the manual is limited to the Project Management unit, World Bank
Assisted Punjab Rural Water Supply and Sanitation Project with the project philosophy,
design criteria and site-specific conditions of the project villages. This manual is a first
attempt to start the project activities and learning from the project implementation, the
guidelines contained in this manual will be modified, if necessary, as the project
implementation proceeds.

3
 CHAPTER-2
WATER SUPPLY

This chapter contains the basic design criteria for rural water supply systems,
significance of water quality, quality standards, scientific selection of sources and assessment
of yield of water from sources.
2.1 BASIC DESIGN CRITERIA

The basic minimum design criteria to be followed in this project are discussed below.
(See Annexure -B)

2.1.1 Per Capita Supply :

The design per capita supply shall be of @70 Lpcd (40 ltrs for domestic use and 30
ltr. for cattle use) for all types villages. However if any habitation / village wants to design
water supply scheme at higher per capita water supply rate they shall be allowed to do so
with the condition that it bear all the incremental cost required in addition to basic 10%
share . Water demand shall be calculated for the projected population for the design period
of the project which is 30 years for rising main and distribution lines and 15 years for water
works structures and machinery.
In a community water supply system, the O & M cost is to be borne by the users. In the
current schemes, normally for stand posts/street taps users are not required to pay any
charges . However, under this project as per norms the user has to pay some minimum
charge. To make the scheme self sustainable, the community shall be encouraged to have
house connections so that maximum revenue is realized from the users. Hence, the
department will aim to provide as many house connections as possible and avoid stand posts.
The stand posts /public taps where demanded by the community shall be provided at the rate
of one for every 150 persons.
In fluoride affected areas or in water scarcity areas, the minimum per capita supply
can be modified after discussion with the community. In some areas, if fluoride free water is
to be transmitted over long distances, it may be expensive to operate and maintain and the
community may not be able to afford the high user charges. In such cases, the feasibility of
dual policy with reduced per capita supply of fluoride free water for cooking and drinking

4
only (about 10 Ipcd) and supply of fluoride water for all other uses as mentioned above with
appropriate per capita supply can also be considered.
2.1.2 Source of Supply

The sources for water supply are Deep tube wells or irrigation canal water where potable
water is not available from deep tube wells . In Kandi area of Punjab springs /infiltration
galleries may also be used as source of drinking water .. In Punjab a rural water
supply schemes have been traditionally designed based on Tube wells. However, where the
quantity of ground water is insufficient or quality of ground water is not of required
standards, surface sources are chosen depending upon the availability. The rural water supply
schemes with bore wells and open wells are economically viable and easy to operate and
maintain, whereas schemes designed with surface water as source are not economically
viable are often difficult to operate and maintain by the Rural Communities. Hence, in order
to make the surface source schemes viable, which required skilled operation and
maintenance, it is preferable to design schemes with surface sources for a group of 3 to 4
villages. In cases wherein the surface water is to be transmitted from a long distance and
wherever limited quantity of ground water is available dual supplies for such villages shall
also be examined thereby satisfying both quality and quantity requirements.

2.1.2.1 Water Quality :

The drinking water required to the community shall conform to the relevant clauses so as
minimize health hazards to the community. The quality of water supplied shall satisfy the
criteria contained the CPHEEO manual, which are reproduced in this chapter at Annexure- J..

2.1.3 Storage:

Capacity of OHSR shall be calculated by Mass curve (Refer annexure- N)method

keeping in view the realistic availability of Electricity and water supply hours . Two number
typical mass curves are enclosed as sample for different types of conditions of availability of
electricity . Normally in Rural areas of Punjab Electricity is available in shifts on rotation
basis . PSEB supplies electricity in Morning shift, Evening shift and Night Shift . Pumping
hours will vary as per availability of electricity . Hence before fixing the capacity of OHSR
mass curve should be plotted for all the three shifts pumping of water and supply hours .
OHSR capacity should be worked out for worst case scenario. The tank shall be located
such that the minimum residual pressure at the remotest point in the village is at least 12 mts.
5
If elevated lands are available at a reasonable distance, ground level reservoirs can be
proposed for storage of water. If such location is not available, an elevated service reservoir
can be proposed with staging such that it gives a minimum residual pressure of 12 mts after
counting for loss of head during peak hours due to simultaneous opening of the all the taps
on the distribution system

2.1.4 Treatment :

Ground waters, which are free from odour and colour and turbidity problems, can
be supplied after plain disinfection by chlorinating. Surface waters may require conventional
treatment consisting of sedimentation, filtration and disinfection.
The treatment proposed for water shall be such that it is easy to maintain and operate by the
village community. Presence of fluorides requires treatment to remove fluorides, which is not
easy for the community to operate and maintain the treatment scheme. Nitrates and TDS
cannot be removed in conventional Treatment System. Iron presence, though amenable, its
removal becomes difficult and the plant is uneconomical to the community to maintain.
Disinfection of water supply shall be carried out with Bleaching powder/ Sodium
Hypocholorite using diaphragm based dosing pumps .Silver ionization where ever it is
viable can also be used to carry out disinfection of water supply.
2.1.5 Distribution system

The project proposes to have piped water supply schemes in all the villages covered
in the project. It is expected that there will be substantial demand for individual house
connection. Hence, pipe network in the form of dead/loop system (which is mostly suitable
for rural areas) shall be planned. For the benefits of community not opting for house
connection stand post shall be provided at appropriate places @ one per 150 persons in the
villages How ever as explained above use of stand posts shall be discouraged as it results in
avoidable wastage . Normally in rural water supply schemes, the pumping hours does not
exceed 5-8 hours due to constraints of requisite power supply. The storage capacity of
service reservoir shall be taken on the basis of mass curve plotted as per actual availability
of electricity and the actual water supply hours ..
2.1.5.1 Water Supply Duration and Peak Factor :

Usually water supply is made twice/thrice a day to the village community at the rate
of 3 hrs each time which is equal to 6 hrs. Alternatively due to non- availability of power in
6
 the day time, the distribution hours may be restricted to 4 hrs a day. It may be further kept in
mind that demand of water is more in the morning shift which may be 1.25 2 times of the
average daily demand . Hence peak factor for designing the distribution system shall be
worked out as below:
Calculation of peak flow rate for designing the peak flow rate
Case =I Supply time =6 hours
Average daily demand = Q LPD
Total water supply duration =6 HRS
Average supply rate =24/6xQ=4Q
Morning peak rate =2
So design peak rate =2x4Q=8Q

Case =II Supply time =4 hours

Average daily demand = Q LPD
Total water supply duration =4 HRS
Average supply rate =24/4xQ=6Q
Morning peak rate =1.5* of average flow rate
So deign peak rate =1.5x6Q=9Q

Based on above following peak factors are recommended.

Case Water Supply Hours Peak Factors

Case I 6 Hours 8
Case II 4 Hours 9

2.1.5.2 Selection of size of Distribution Pipe:

The size of distribution pipe shall be calculated on the basis of discharge to be
carried by the pipe line , pressure requirement and number of connections to be drawn form
the pipe by using following formula :
Number of Connections =[ D^2/d^2]
Where D is diameter of main pipe and d is the diameter of branch pipe
e.g. if diameter of main pipe is 150 mm and branch pipe is 90 mm then number of branch
pipe connections= 3.58 say 3
- Size of branch pipe shall also be checked for number household private connections
and stand posts to be proposed on the branch line using the following formula :
Number of Connections =[ D^2/d^2]
Where D is diameter of main pipe and d is the diameter of service pipe
e.g. if diameter of main pipe is 90 mm and branch pipe is 15 mm then number of branch pipe
connections= 36
In case of Rural Water Supply Schemes for multi villages the transmission main
from the water works running along Phirni(village ring road ) shall not be used as
distribution main . The delivery main and distribution system in village should be so
proposed that supply to Ist village and any intermediary village /villages is given from only
one point on the delivery main and that the delivery main should not be made a part of the
distribution system of the Ist or intermediary village /villages . This will ensure equitable
water supply to all the villages as supply to individual village can be regulated at one point
using the sluice valve . No private connection or stand post should be allowed on the

7
transmission main . (Refer CE Rural Water Supply circular no 34028-34PH/W dated
6.7.78)
2.1.5.3 Design Velocity :
The design velocity in the distribution system shall be not less than0.6 m per second to
prevent silting in the pipes.

2.1.5.4 Material of Pipes :

PVC pipes shall be used for distribution system with appropriate pressure class of 6 to 10
Kg/sq.cm
2.1.6 Depth and Width of Trench required to lay the pipe:
The pipes shall be laid with a minimum earth cushion of 1.0 m. How ever in narrow
streets1mt-1.5 mt feet wide where no vehicular traffic is expected and digging deep may
cause danger to the stability of adjoining structures cushion may be reduced to 60 cm .The
width of trench required to lay PVC pipes shall be outer diameter+30 cm and wider trench
shall only be excavated near the coupler joint . Practice of measuring the uniform width of
trench shall be discouraged as for laying PVC pipe a wider trench is only required at joints.
It will reduce the damage to the brick paving laid in the village and reduce the cost of
excavation and repairing .
For high level and low level areas if difference in elevation is more than 4 meters
separate feeders shall be provided . Pressure reducing valves shall also be provided to stop
excessive water supply to low lying areas where separate feeders have not been provided .

2.1.7 Pumps :

Submersible pumps shall be provided for all borewells and centrifugal pumps/submersible
pumps for canal based water supply schemes . While calculating the capacity of pump, the
resulting suction head, delivery head and frictional losses shall be considered appropriately.
Only commercially available pump capacities shall be adopted in the project.

Normally Standby pumps are not proposed in rural water supply systems based on borewells
and for other sources. Standby pumps shall be provided only in exceptional circumstances. In
such cases if the number of pumps installed are more than one, then one standby pump is
suggested. For economical selection of the pump, the actual pump capacity required shall be
worked out using the family curves furnished by pump manufacturer. However, in arriving at
economic size of rising main only overall efficiency of pumps can be taken as 60 % for
submersible pumps and 65 % for centrifugal pumps.
Note :
All the above referred design parameters are mentioned in Annexure B Titled as
Design Standards both for Tube well based schemes and canal based schemes

2.1.8. Ground Water Recharge Measures :

Due to continuous and over extraction of water from ground, there will be a possibility of
drying up of source well in the summer months. Hence, proposals are to be included in the
water supply scheme for recharging of ground water through artificial recharge measures
depending upon the geological conditions of the area. Possibilities of using Rain water

8
 harvesting as a source and roof water harvesting shall also be explored in the project areas.
Rain water harvesting shall be used to recharge shallow aquifers as deep aquifers cannot be
recharged as deep aquifers are artesian aquifers . By recharging shall aquifers static water
table level shall be increased which will cause saving in electricity as head required to pump
water shall decrease which will reduce electricity consumption . Various ground water
recharge measures based recommendations of central ground water board has been explained
in chapter :10 of this manual .

2.1.9 Water quality standards and significance-Norms for Acceptance

The quality of drinking water affects health of the consumers because certain diseases and
toxic chemical compounds may be transmitted by water. Experience has shown that
community health and supplied water qualities are directly related to each other and that an
improvement of water qualities of drinking water supply is followed by an improvement in
the communitys health. Hence, the water supply systems shall provide water that is safe and
available in adequate quantity. A water supply engineer is expected to know what diseases
are waterborne, what are toxic chemicals and how they get in to water supplies.

2.2. Attributes of Drinking Water :

The communitys drinking water shall be

- Free from disease producing organisms

- Colourless and clear
- Palatable, i.e. free from odours,
- Preferably cool
- Reasonably soft (not hard)
- Not causing scales or corrosion.
- Free from objectionable substances such as hydrogen sulphide, iron, and
Manganese;
- Unpolluted by substances in quantities that are toxic or have adverse
physiological effects and available in adequate quantities.

2.2.1 Definitions :

While describing water quality, certain terms are frequently used which are to be
clearly understood and correctly used. Some of the definitions that are commonly used are
given below.

i) Water Pollution : It is the introduction into water, substances in sufficient quantity

that affects the original acceptable quality of water, making it objectionable to sight, taste
and smell and hence making it less useful.

ii) Water Contamination :It is the introduction of toxic materials, bacteria, or other deleterious
agents into water that make the water hazardous and therefore making it unfit for human use.
iii) Safe water : It is the water that can be consumed without menace to the health of the
consumer. Sometimes the word pure water is used which is incorrect, in the sense that there
exists no pure water.

9
iv) Potable water and wholesome water : Potable water is the water that is satisfactory for
drinking purposes from the standpoint of its chemical, physical and biological characteristics
and is also known as wholesome.
v) Palatable water : It is the water that is appealing to the senses of taste, sight and smell.
Palatable water need not always be potable.
vi) Water-Natural State : Water in nature is never hundred percent Hydrogen and Oxygen, it
always contains mineral matter in solution or suspension or dissolved gasses.
vii) Parts per million (ppm) or milligrams per litre (mg/lt): These terms are used to express
the concentrations of dissolved and suspended matter in water. The Parts per million (ppm) is
a weight to weight relationship. Except in highly mineralized water this quantity would be
same as mg/lt. This is preferable since it indicates how it is determined in the laboratory.
viii) pH of water : It is an indication of the hydrogen ion concentration the water. Alkaline water
will have pH of above 7; while acidic water will have pH of below 7; whereas water with pH
7 is neutral.

ix) Toxic : It is a harmful, destructive, or deadly poisonous chemical.

x) Physiological Effects : These are the effects which change the normal functions of the body.

xi) Pathogens : These are the disease-producing bacteria present in water.

xii) Bacteria : These are groups of universally distributed, essentially Unicellular micro
organisms, lacking chlorophyll.

xiii) Coliform bacteria : These are groups of bacteria predominantly inhabiting the intestines of
human beings and animals but also occasionally found elsewhere. Their presence indicates
pollution of water by sewage.

xiv) Enteric : Having its normal habitat in the intestinal tract of human beings or animals.

xv) Virus : The smallest form of bacteria capable of producing disease in human beings.

xvi) Chlorine residual : Chlorine remaining in the water at the end of a specified period.

xvii) Chlorine demand : The differences between the amount of chlorine added to water and
amount of residual chlorine remaining in the water at the end of a specified period i.e. after
total disinfection.

2.2.2 Water and health of community :

Communitys health is affected by drinking water quality because

(i) Certain disease causing bacteria are enteric and survive long enough in water to infect the
water users.
(ii) The excreta of human beings and warm-blooded animals contain bacteria harmful to human
beings, and these bacteria can find their way into drinking water sources.
(iii) Chemical substances affecting the health of people can also enter drinking water sources.

2.2.3 Natural water :

10
 Water free from both bacteria and dissolved chemicals is seldom found in nature.
Water falling as rain, snow or hail washes impurities out of atmosphere; some of these may
be present as solids or some may be dissolved. The first water that falls tends to be higher in
material removed from atmosphere than that falling later. Even prolonged rainfall may not
completely clear the air. Rain water and snow may have dissolved solids as high as 150 mg/lt
and total hardness up to 40mg/lt. In industrial areas due to air pollution carbon dioxide
dissolves into rain water. This phenomenon is known as Acid rain. Normally, the pH value of
rainwater is 6.7 to 6.9. Rainwater is also saturated with dissolved oxygen from the
atmosphere.

2.2.4 Environmental significance of water quality :

Water that is clear and colorless gives an impression that is safe for human consumption.
This may not be correct, since both disease causing bacteria and objectionable matter may be
present but invisible to naked eye. Water quality parameters are classified as physical,
chemical and biological nature. The environmental significance of some common parameters
of water quality is given below:

2.2.4.1 Physical Parameters:

Turbidity :

Any turbidity in water is associated with pollution and associated with health hazards arising
out of it. Increased turbidity makes treatment difficult and costly due to increase in chemical
coagulation costs and increased frequency of cleaning the filters. In turbid waters the
pathogenic organisms may be trapped in the turbid particles and hence protected from the
disinfectant. Ground water is less likely to contain turbidity. Turbidity of surface water may
settle down by plain sedimentation.

Colour :

Natural colour may be acquired by water from decay in swamps and forests; but the colour
may not be harmful. The fact is that if the potable water is having colour and hence
aesthetically not acceptable, the consumers tend to seek water from other sources which may
not be safe. Ground water is less likely to contain colour and surface water may contain
colour due to industrial activity. However colour is not removed in conventional treatment
adopted in Rural Water Supply Schemes.

Taste and Odour :

Both should not be noticeable to consumers. Taste is not measurable but should not be
objectionable. For odour, Thresh hold odour numbers (TON) are given to indicate the
dilutions required for the odour to disappear. It should be preferably one and not greater than
three. However, odour is not removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water
Supply Schemes.

2.2.4.2 Chemical Parameters

11
Carbon dioxide And Mineral Acidity :

Water that contains mineral acidity is unpalatable. Acidity causes corrosion and affects the
consumption of chemicals in water softening.

Alkalinity :

Measures the content of bicarbonates, carbonates and causticity of waters. Waters that
contain high alkalinity are unpalatable. Chemically treated water sometimes may have high
alkalinity. Alkalinity is important in coagulation and corrosion control. However alkalinity is
not removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water Supply Schemes.

Hardness :

Calcium and Magnesium compounds cause hardness-soap consuming property. Hardness is

derived by water largely from contact with soil and rock formations. In general hard waters
originate in areas where top soil is thick and limestone formations are present. Soft waters
originate where topsoil is thin and limestone formations are absent. However Hardness is not
removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water Supply Schemes.

Total Dissolved Solids (TDS) :

Waters with TDS of less than 500 mg/lt are suitable for domestic use. Waters with higher
TDS have a laxative effect upon people who are not accustomed to it. Conventional
treatment methods dont address the removal of TDS. This can be removed only through
distillation and reverse osmosis membrane filtration, However TDS is not removed in
conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water Supply Schemes as this is not economically
viable and cannot be maintained by the rural communities.

Chlorides :

Chlorides impart salty taste if present beyond 250 mg/lt. Unusual presence of Chlorides in
water indicates contamination of ground water with wastewater. However Chlorides are not
normally removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water Supply Schemes.

Nitrogen salts :

They may be reported in the form of free ammonia and Nitrates (nitrates in terms of
Nitrogen). When present beyond trace amounts, indicate pollution by human wastes. Water
containing organic and ammonia nitrogen indicate recent pollution ; water-containing
nitrogen in the form of nitrates indicate pollution; water-containing nitrogen in the form of
nitrates indicate pollution that has occurred a long time back. Waters with appreciable
amounts of nitrites are of questionable character. The amount of ammonia nitrogen
determines the efficacy of chlorinating. Nitrates in water may be due to agricultural run off
water source, due to fertilizer use, leaches from septic tanks, sewerage and erosion of natural
deposits. Excessive amounts of nitrates in drinking water causes blue baby syndrome
disease (methaeamoglobineamia) in infants under six months which is a threat to life if
immediate medial attention is not available. The infant looks blue and has shortness of

12
 breath. However Nitrates are not removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water
Supply Schemes.
Dissolved Oxygen :

Dissolved Oxygen (DO) is of significance in corrosion of iron and steel particularly in

distribution systems. However DO is not removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural
Water Supply Schemes.

Fluorides :

Minimum of 1 mg/lt may be required to prevent dental carries; but beyond 1.5 mg/lt may
cause staining of teeth/dental fluorosis and also skeletal fluorosis. Treatment units set up in
India for removal of excessive fluorides in Rural water supply schemes are so far not
functioning satisfactorily.

Iron :

Iron may be present in water as a dissolved impurity from the earths crust or enter the water
supplies from corroded pumps and pipes. Excess iron may cause staining of clothes during
washing, stains on plumbing fixtures and encrustation and deposits on the interior surfaces of
the pipe. Treatment units set up in India for removal of excessive Iron in Rural water supply
schemes are so far not satisfactory.

Manganese :

Manganese at lower concentrations causes troublesome deposits in mains. However

Manganese is not removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water Supply
Schemes.

2.2.4.3 Trace elements

Barium : Even at 1 mg/1 it causes muscular and cardiovascular disorders and Kidney
damage.

Cadmium : At low levels and exposure for prolonged periods it causes high blood pressure,
sterility among males, kidney damage and flu like disorders.

Chromium : Beyond 0.05 mg/lt it is carcinogenic.

Copper :Beyond 0.05 mg/lt it is found to be toxic to fish.

Lead : Beyond 0.05 mg/1 it causes brain and kidney damage. In youngsters it may cause
mental retardation.

Mercury :At very low concentration it forms methylated mercury compounds Which are
toxic to human beings and fish.

Silver : Has no adverse effect but silver salts are good disinfectants.

13
 Arsenic, Selenium & Cyanide : They are toxic and carcinogenic, However none of the
trace elements are removed in conventional treatment adopted in Rural Water Supply
Schemes.

2.2.4.4 Biological Contaminants :

Bacteria : Diseases caused by waterborne bacteria are always intestinal and include typhoid,
dysentery, cholera and gastro-enteritis.

Viral : Infectious hepatitis may be waterborne.

Slow and filtration may remove bacteria and viral contaminants. However, disinfection with
bleaching powder alone makes the water wholesome.

2.2.5 Sanitary Survey :

Water safety and quality are maintained through water treatment, disinfection and prevention
of pollution and contamination. Rural water supplies are normally disinfected using
bleaching powder, which makes the water wholesome. However, it will be necessary to
search for sources of contamination and prevent such contamination of drinking water
supplies.

Identifying sources of contamination :

Surface run off comes into contact with wastes containing pathogenic bacteria or the storage
reservoirs may get inflows of domestic sewage and or industrial effluents. Contamination
from domestic waste can enter the raw water sources such as borewells or open wells. Casing
pipes for sufficient depth can prevent such entry of wastes into borewells. Watertight seining
has to be proposed for sufficient depth to prevent entry of such wastes into the open wells.
Harmful wastes can also enter the water distribution systems through cross connections or
back-siphonage conditions. A systematic sanitary survey can be undertaken to identify the
sources of contamination and preventive measures taken where necessary.

2.2.6. Water Quality Reports:

The following are the observations to be incorporated in the tabular form while preparing the
reports
1) Review of existing Water Quality status in project villages.
2) Details of all existing water supply schemes / sources (Number of BW/OW/Traditional
Tanks, etc., working/defunct) with clear markings (painted with blue colour for potable
sources and red colour for non potable sources) of the sources in the village (using
geographical/global positioning systems).
3) Latest water supply analysis (physical, chemical and biological tests)/water quantity yield
results of all working sources should be incorporated in the report enclosed as Annexure I.

14
4) Compare the latest water quality results with old available data (secondary data from Water
Supply and sanitation department ) and find out the difference.
5) Justify the proposed source details from the quality angle. Also mention the distance of this
source from the existing potable/non-potable sources.

2.2.7 Review of source water quality :

After the water quality report is received the parameters may be compared with the
standards and if the water satisfies the standards the same source can be accepted with
disinfection only. If fluorides and TDS are present in excess of permissible limits, dilution if
possible can be one of the options. Conveying potable water from distant source either
surface or ground water can also be other option. If nitrates and iron are higher, it is
necessary to search for the source of contamination and take remedial measures.. However,
treatment of such water for removal of iron and nitrates is not a viable option in villages. If
the contamination is not traceable and if the presence of iron and nitrates is due to natural
acquisition, then another source is to be selected. Use of PVC casing pipe avoids corrosion,
also extending the casting pipe up to 12 m will enable prevention of ingress of nitrates.
Treatment for removal of fluorides and Iron shall be the last option since the rural
community cannot operate and maintain such treatment plants.

2.2.8 Scientific selection of water sources is more important for the project area since the ground
water table has been depleting very fast. Hence, the locations selected for water sources shall
be amenable for encouraging ground water into the acquifers. The presence of underground
fractures in the geological formations will encourage the seepage of the water into the
aquifers. The deeper the fractures, better will be yield. Hence, while doing the geophysical
survey for selection of source, particular attention is required to this aspect. The technology
has progressed and now there are more reliable methods for conducting geological and
geophysical investigations with instruments working on very low frequency (VLF).

The exploration methods that can be adopted to locate the ground water are :

1) Geological methods : Demarcating the boundary between lithologic units, faults, fractures,
fissures, formation characteristics, lineaments, and dykes, intrusive and shear zones.

15
2) Remote sensing techniques: Interpretation of satellite images to locate lineaments and other
structural discontinuities, mapping of various hydrogeomorphic unit, vegetation, soil, and
land use and land cover categories.
3) Geophysical methods : Surface geophysical surveys using electrical resisvity,
electromagnetic, seismic and magnetic methods to delineate the weak and water-saturated
zone.

2.2.9 Geophysical exploration:

Geo Physical methods comprise measurement and interpretation of signals from

natural or induced physical phenomenon generated as a result of a sub-terranean formation
.These signals measured repetitively at several points of space and time are approximately
interpreted, considering the available geological information , in terms of such sub-surface
structures /features as may themselves have good ground water potential or are indicative of
good aquifers .Knowledge of the geology of ground water areas is essential to establish the
water bearing formulations. Surface geology, exposed due to quarrying, mixing etc. provide
useful information. Well logs of existing wells (records that give the nature and depth of
various strata that were encountered during sinking of the wells) also contribute as a
supplementary information in assessing the nature of the sources being explored.

2.3. Geomagnetic :

Measurements of variations of gravity and of the earths magnetic field are made with the aid
of the torsion balance and the magnetometer. These instruments donot determine the
presence of water itself. They suggest the location of geological structures that may be
favourable water carriers.
2.3.1 Acoustic and Seismic :

Acoustic and Seismic methods measure the speed of travel and sound and shock waves
through the underground formations. Dependence of wave velocity upon the density of the
materials through which it passes makes it possible for a geophysical analysis of the test area.
This also indicates the presence of water in the test area being explored for water.
Measurements are made as wave reflection for deep strata exploration and on wave retraction
when water bearing formation is near the surface of the earth.
16
2.3.2 Electrical Resistivity :
The resistance of the ground is determined by impressing a current on electrodes inserted in
the ground. A drop in resistance shows the presence of water within the water bearing
stratum, the depth of penetration of the current being approximately equal to the electrode
spacing.

It is essential to take the assistance of the departments/agencies experienced and engaged in

such investigation to assess the water potential for selection of a suitable ground water source
for the community water supply.

Resistivity data for rock formations in Punjab

Rock Type Resistivity

Ohm-m
Highly weathered and saturated Gneiss/Granite <40
Weathered and saturated Gneiss/Granite 40-80
Weathered but less saturated 80-170
Unweathered Granite/Gneiss with water filled joints 170-400
Massive rock >400
Vesicular basalts saturated with water 100-150
Highly weathered basalt saturated with water 5-10
Gravelly sands with fresh water 100
Shale and clay 1
2.4 Assessment of yield :
An accurate assessment of the yield of the source is essential to decide which source can be
dependable.

The yield of borewells is to be assessed preferably in the lowest seasonal water level
conditions. In Punjab, the preferable season for conducting yield test is from April to June,
when the summer is at its peak and rainfall has not yet set in. Yield test units are available
17
which can be used to pump out the water from the borewell for a maximum period of six
hours at a time. Care should be taken that the water pumped out is led away from the source
and does not re-enter the source. The draw down and discharge are measured and the results
tabulated from which the safe yield is calculated. The assessed yield is multiplied by a
coefficient to arrive at the safe yield from the source to account for the seasonal variations
and also to prevent over exploitation from the borewell, which may lead to collapsing of the
borewell. In case the yield test is conducted during non-summer months, a suitable
coefficient for assessing the safe yield has to be used. While drilling the bore wells, it is
essential that a correct record of the strata of the borewell and the depths of water column
are noted in a dated long book and this record must be made available at the GP. Maximum
permissible size of pump to be installed in the Tube Well should be clearly mentioned at the
wall of the Pump chamber to prevent over pumping from the Tube well

For assessing the yield from infiltration wells sunk in the riverbeds the same methods as
described above is used for determining the safe yield from the source. In the case of canals,
the levels at which water can be made available and the quantum of water and the period for
which the canal is flowing are used to assess the sizes of various components of the water
supply scheme.

2.5 Water Quality Monitoring

Supply of safe drinking water in adequate quantity to the public is a prime

responsibility of a civic body. This task could be achieved if and only if the water supply
agency is adequately equipped with necessary infrastructure for routine water quality
monitoring and control. Presently, there is no agency with a well defined mandate for routine
water quality monitoring and control of rural water supply in the State. The EE in charge
checks the potability of any newly established tube wells / surface source by conducting all
the tests on the water samples collected. If the quality parameters are within the prescribed
limits, the source is developed and allowed to be used by the community. If the water does
not satisfy the required quality parameters, new bore wells are drilled after conducting
detailed geophysical surveys. In areas where ground water is not potable canal based
schemes are designed. Raw water is collected from canals and after treatment supplied to the
community . It is very important that a suitable mechanism should be adopted to have

18
regular quality surveillance . During rainy season water quality surveillance should be more
stringent .
2.5.1 Water Quality Surveillance :
2.5.1 A Disinfection :
Each water supply scheme shall be equipped with adequate equipment like Dosing
Pumps / Silver ionization plant to disinfect water supply at source . If water supply is to be
chlorinated then Bleaching Powder / Sodium Hypochlorite shall be used for chlorination .
Normally dosage of chlorine at source is @ 0.5 to 1.0 mg/lt . Dosage of chlorine should be
kept at a level so as to ensure that residual chlorine at tail end is 0.1-0.2 mg/lt . Quantity of
Bleaching powder/ Sodium hypocholorite shall be calculated as per annexure A
Tube Well Operator / Water Works attendant shall regularly maintain record of disinfection
at water works site and he shall check residual chlorine available at various points in the
distribution points . He shall visit peoples houses at regular intervals and check the residual
chlorine available in their house . He shall maintain record of checking as per below sample
performa .
Date Name and Location of Residual Residual Name and
designation of Sampling Chlorine chlorine address of the
sampling Point present in the present in the person who
officer/official sample sample was resent at
drawn at the time of
water works sampling and
his signatures

2.5.1.1 Water Quality Surveillance Programme

a. Objective :
i. To ascertain the quality of water in various rural water supply schemes
(Tubewells or canal based) as well as in the distribution network.
ii. To examine physico-chemical and bacteriological quality to establish whether the
drinking water is fit for human consumption and meets the standards as laid down
in IS - 10500 : 1991.

b. Location for sampling :

Selection of location for sampling should indicate true representative samples.
i. Public Stand Posts
19
 ii. Selected consumer locations at random
iii. In addition to above, raw water source and treated water should also be analyzed
in case of canal based water supply schemes.

c. Type of sampling :
Generally, for drinking water quality monitoring, grab samples should be preferred.

d. Frequency of sampling :
Mainly depends on population served, size, source and type of the scheme.
Source Minimum frequency of sampling and analysis Remarks
Bacteriological Physical/Chemical

Tubewell Once initially, thereafter Once initially, then 2 Situation requiring testing : change in
based as situation demands. times yearly environmental conditions, outbreak
of water borne disease or increase in
incidence of waterborne diseases.

Canal based Once monthly - Once initially then Increase frequency of bacteriological
2 times yearly. test if situation demands.
- Residual chlorine
test daily

e. Precautions to be taken during collection, preservation and storage of samples

I. Properly labeled sampling bottles to avoid any error.

II. No significant change in samples between time of collection and conducting water
analysis and samples should be dispatched to lab under iced conditions as soon as
practicable.
III. Samples should be examined maximum within 24 hours after collection.
IV. De-chlorination is prerequisite for sampling for bacteriological examination.
V. No contamination should take place while collecting the sample prior to
examination especially for bacteriological tests. For taking sample of water from a
tap on distribution system, allow the water to run for 4 to 5 minutes to allow
cleaning of service pipe.
VI. The water sample shall be collected and its data sheet as per Annexure I should be
filled up along with sample for onward submission to Water quality testing lab .
f. Quantity of sample
i. For physical and chemical examination, two liters of samples in colourless or
pale green bottles.

20
 ii. For bacteriological examination 250 ml sterilized glass bottles provided with
ground glass stopper.

g. Quality of drinking water desired

Quality of drinking water should meet with the standards as prescribed in IS-
10500:1991/ CEEPHEO manual . Refer table placed at Annexure M

2.5.1.2 Present status of rural water quality surveillance and lab infrastructure proposed

Adequately equipped analytical laboratory with competent analysits is an important

and an integral part of any water quality monitoring and surveillance programme. The
analytical determinations of different physical, chemical, biological and bacteriological
parameters must be carried out most efficiently and accurately. However, the laboratory
infrastructure needed shall necessarily depend upon the level of analysis desired, location and
other support facilities available.

Realizing the need to institutionalize water quality monitoring and surveillance

system, Government of India in Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission has
formulated a implementation plan based on three tier structure or catchment area approach
where existing resources available with grass root level education and technical institutions
would be utilized. In case of need be, these institutions would further be strengthened by
providing additional financial sources. DWSS is also planning to set-up three tier structure of
lab facilities, so as to make the system foolproof and also to ensure the public participation.

Village level : No system of water quality surveillance (WQS) exists at the village level.
However, water quality monitoring as yet is not the felt need of the people as in rural
areas they perceive water supply as demand. To make the WQS programme more
effective, DWSS is planning to form community based organization i.e. Village Water &
Sanitation Committee (VWSC), which would mainly the representative of various
segment of community living in the village itself. Further, these VWSCs would act as an
extension of district/village administration. Under WQS programme, field kits for both
chemical and bacteriological analysis would be provided to 10+2 schools having science
stream or in the primary rural Health Centres. These field kits would mainly indicate the
presence of turbidity, pH, hardness, chloride, fluoride, iron, residual chlorine and
bacteriological quality. The field kit will be basically meant for qualitative assessment of
water and would help to identify unsafe drinking water supply system immediately. In

21
 case, water is unfit for drinking, samples would be sent for detailed investigations to the
district labs.
District level : 3 district level labs are already functional, whereas, 9 district level labs
will be made functional subject to the availability of funds. For balance 5 districts
Government of India is being approached. Small portable kit capable of measuring
temperature, conductivity, pH and dissolved oxygen is being provided so to as to carry on
the spot tests, besides district labs should also have lab equipments, chemicals and
glassware as indicated in Annexure-C. Floor space required for setting up of lab ranges
between 80 to 120 sqm.
State level : One State level water quality testing laboratory is functioning in Public
Health Department Head Office Patiala since 1962. Whereas, DWSS has approved
Punjab Pollution Control Board lab at the State level for any arbitration or reconfirmation
of the results.
Further for facilitating effective water surveillance programme, a mobile water testing
laboratory is also being proposed under the control of DWSS as this would help in
identification of source of contamination as well as for identifying new potential water
sources, besides it would also impart training to village and district level laboratory staff.
The mobile laboratory would be fully equipped to carry out on the spot analysis of water
and would be equipped with small fridge, hot air oven, water bath and incubator.

22
 CHAPTER-3-
POPULATION FORECAST

In this chapter, various methods of population forecast and assessment of the demand
for designing water supply scheme are discussed.

3.1 Population Forecast

Present population for 2001 will be available from figure of census for 2001.
Forecast of population shall be calculated based on arithmetic progression, geometric
progression, incremental increase and national average. However, village specific assessment
of growth potential shall be taken into consideration while arriving at the final population
forecast. Population forecast shall be done considering the following factors:
Trend of population growth in the previous decade (from 1991-2001 Census Figure)
Possibilities of village growth due to factors such as industrial projects and
other projects which influence the growth of population.

Any special factors causing sudden influx or migration of population like

proximity to a city/ town.

The population growth in any region can be assessed either through graphical
methods or arithmetical methods as discussed below :-
(Sample calculations for Population forecast are enclosed at Annexure K)

3.1.1 Demographic Method :

Population change can occur only in three ways (1) by births (population gain), (2)
by deaths (population loss) or (3) by migration (population loss or gain due to movement
out or movement in occurs in excess)

Population forecasts are made by assessing separately the births, the deaths and
migration and then summing them up to get the net effect for the considered projection
period.

Diseases, Epidemics, Catastrophic natural calamities and other technological changes

are the possible causes of error in forecasting the population correctly in this method.

3.1.2 Arithmetical Progression

This method is based on the assumption that population increase at constant rate. A
Constant increment growth is added periodically, based on the past records. This method
generally gives a low rate of population growth and can be used for villages where the
growths are not conspicuous and practically controlled.

3.1.3 Geometrical Progression Method

In this method, percentage increase or percentage growth rate per decade is assumed
to be constant, and the increase in compounded over the existing population every decade.

23
This method normally gives larger values of population and is used for areas with unlimited
scope for expansion and where a constant growth rate is expected.

3.1.4. Logistic Method

When the various factors affecting the population growth do not change abnormal,
the groups of population follow a S curve, called a logistic curve.
This method is suitable for areas where the rate of increase or decrease of population
with time is likely to reach a saturation limit ultimately because of specially local factors.
The growth rate of which follows a logistic curve will plot as a straight line on the arithmetic
paper, with time intervals plotted against population in percentage of saturation.

3.1.5. Incremental Increase Method

In this method, the average in incremental increase is calculated from the available
data. To the present population, the average incremental increase per decade is added and the
population of next decade is obtained. Like this, the process is repeated till the population in
the desired decade is determined.

3.1.6. Graphical Comparison Method

This method involves the extension of the population- time curve into the future
based on a comparison of a similar curve for comparable areas and modified to the extent
depending on the factors governing such predictions. The method has a logical background,
and if statistics of similar villages are available, quite precise and reliable forecast can be
made. However, it is very difficult to get identical villages with respect to population growth.

3.1.7 Population forecast for Peri- Urban Areas :

It has been observed that growth of population in rural areas near main cities grows at
rate higher than the rate of growth for other villages . These areas falls under the Peri Urban
area category . It is proposed that in all Rural areas falling under a radial distance of 5 Km
from Class A and B cities population growth rate shall be calculated by Graphical
comparison method . In case no such comparison is available then Population growth rate of
such areas shall be determined by using Geometrical progression method

3.2 Final Prediction

The design of rural water supply and sanitation schemes shall be based on actual
existing population with realistic projection for the project using the methods described
above. However, the per year growth rate must be taken @1.228 % based on census 2001.
Software packages are available for estimation (using the methods described earlier)
of population growth and the same shall be used in the project.

24
 CHAPTER 4

TYPES OF SOURCES FOR WATER SUPPLY

This chapter provides information on various types of sources that can be used for
providing water supply to rural communities.

4.1 Hydrological Cycle :

Hydrological Cycle is a process by which nature circulates water from the oceans and
other water bodies through the atmosphere and returns if back to land. This water
finds its way into underground and to the sea through various paths. Radiation from
the sun also evaporates the water from the surface sources (including oceans) into the
atmosphere. The water vapors rise into the atmosphere and form clouds. Under
certain conditions the clouds condense and water falls back to the earth as rain. Some
of the rainfall runs over the surface to the streams and some portion of the water
percolates into the ground by infiltration. The rate of infiltration depends upon the
terrain, soil and geological characteristics, climate etc in the area. Usually, if intensity
and duration of rainfall rate is much higher than the infiltration rate, water starts
flowing on the surface and will collect in depressions forming lakes, ponds etc. and
further excess water flows into streams and rivers and reaches the sea. This is known
as surface run off.
Hence the source for water supply shall be either from ground water or surface
source.

4.2 Ground Waters:

Ground water has been traditionally the main sources of drinking water in Punjab.
With the advent of drilling rigs and consequent indiscriminate extraction of ground
water from deeper Aquifers, mainly for agricultural purposes, the yield from the
Tubewell sources is depleting at a fast rate. Apart from depleting ground water table,
there had been an increase in concentration of Total Dissolved solids that seriously
affect the quality of drinking water. Hence, there is a need to select the Tubewell sites
on a scientific basis, which will have

25
 sustenance as sources of water and amenable for recharge. The sustainability of the
tube wells as drinking water sources can therefore be ensured by applying the
provisions of legislation strictly and appropriate ground water recharge measures.

4.2.1 Tubewells

Tubewells collect the ground water infiltrated to deeper layers in the soil strata
compared to dug wells and hence the quality of water will be good and can be
supplied after disinfections (using bleaching powder.) Tubewells have been
successfully used in rural water supply in Punjab. This is an acceptable technology
option for rural communities since the irrigation tubewells are being operated and
maintained by the communities. The market facilities are available in the project
districts to supply the pumps/spares and also to provide skilled personnel for repairs
and servicing. With the advent of modern drilling rigs it is possible to drill as much as
300, m below ground level even penetrating hard rock formations. Submersible
pumps fitted to a small diameter pipe are installed in these Tubewells. Depending
upon the entry of water into the well, the tube wells are classified into cavity tube
wells and screen type tubewells.
Driven Wells (Hand Pumps) :

Hand Pumps are installed by drilling small diameters pipes up to about-100 M depth
as per India Mark-II /III design. The driving end is fitted with a pointed drive point
strainer. The pipe is connected to a pump or hand pump. These are suited in soft
soils, if ground water is available at shallow depths. In Fig.-1 typical details of India
Mark II Hand Pump are illustrated.

4.2.2 Springs :
The springs are also a technology option for rural water supply but are found in hilly
areas of Gurdaspur district only. Springs occur due to the emergence of base flow as ground
water to the surface. Springs may be either perennial or intermittent. The discharge of a
spring depends on the nature and size of catchment, recharge and leakage through the sub
surface. Their usefulness as source of water supply depends on the discharge and its

26
variability during the year. To select the spring as source of water supply , it is necessary to
ensure its dependability by measurement of flow, local enquiry and study of catchment area,
rainfall in the area. Suitable intake and collection structures are to be planned to meet the
requirement of the scheme. Normally, the springs occur at elevated locations and hence the
supply to the community can be by gravity avoiding pumps.
4.2.4 Percolation Wells : It is large diameter dug up well adopted generally in Kandi Area
nearer rivers of Perinial source. Where static water level is not so deep ie in the range 10 to
15 metere and there are no chances of contamination . It is dug up manually and its diameter
is in thre range of 5- 8 meter depending upon the requirement water

4.3 METHODS OF DRILLING

There are numerous methods of drilling wells and each method has advantages related to
ease of construction, cost factors, character of formations to be penetrated; well diameter and
depth, sanitary protection and intended use of the well itself. The basic principles of some of
the methods are described here

4.3.1 Percussion Drilling

The percussion method, often referred to as cable tool method, is one of the oldest, most
versatile and simplest drilling methods. A string of tools suspended on a cable is given up
and down spudding motion either manually of by power. The string of tools, in ascending
order, consists of a bit, a drill stem, drilling jars and a swivel socket which is attached to the
cable. The bit strikes the bottom of the hole, crushing, breaking and mixing the cuttings.
Above the water table or in otherwise dry formations, water is added to dissolve the cuttings
which are lifted out by means of a bailer. This method is most suitable for drilling in stratum
where large boulders are encountered in abundance at different depths.

4.3.2 Direct Circulation Drilling :

The rotary rig drills by mechanical rotation of a drill bit at the bottom of a string of drill pipe.
The typical string consists of a bit which scrapes, grinds, fractures or otherwise breaks the
formation drilled; a drill collar of heavy walled pipe to maintain a straight hole; and a drill
pipe which extends to the surface and imparts rotation to the bit. As the bit is turned drilling
fluid (usually bentonite mixed with other suitable material) is circulated under - pressure

27
which" lubricates and cools the bit, carries the cuttings in suspension to the surface, and plas-
ters the wall of the hole to prevent caving in.

4.3.3 Reverse circulation drilling :

The reverse circulation rotary rig operates essentially in the same way as a direct rotary rig
except that water is pumped up through the drill pipe rather than down through it. A string of
drill pipes with a drill bit at the bottom is rotated by mechanical means. Plain water or a
drilling fluid, depending on the strata conditions, is allowed to flow into the borehole; the
drill cuttings along with water are sucked through the drill pipes by a centrifugal pump and
thrown into a settling pit.

4.3.4 Down-the-Hole (DTH) Hammer Drilling :

It is accomplished by a tool called the down-the hole hammer which is essentially a
pneumatic hammer operated at the lower end of the drill pipe and combining the percussion
and the rotary actions. The method utilizes compressed air for the rapid impacting action
given by the hammer to the bit, thus crushing the formation into small chips which are
flushed out through the annular space between the bore and the drill pipes by the up coming
compressed air.

4.3.5 Hand Boring :

This method is employed in soft stratum. In this method or power driven auger is used for the
emaciation purpose. By means of rope the bailer is manually lifted and then allowed to
drop, the soil is filled in the hollow portion of the auger, which is removed from time to time.
In this method of boring the correct position of aquifer is also noted. The depth and length of
water bearing stratum and hard stratum etc are correctly recorded in a chart showing various
layers met in.

4.3.6 SELECTION OF DRILLING RIGS :

The recommendations for selection of drilling rigs include the suitability aspects of different
types of drilling rigs for their proper selection for drilling water wells and bore holes in
different geological formations.

28
4.3.7 Classification :
Based on diameter of hole, depth of hole and the size of drill rod used, the drilling rigs shall
be classified into light medium and heavy duty as specified in Table 1.
The tool weight at the surface for percussion (cable tool) type of drilling rig of light,
medium and heavy classes shall be 1135 kg, 1735 kg and 2 315 kg respectively.
4.3.8 Selection :
Based on the formation to be encountered during drilling, the diameter and depth of the
boreholel well, the recommended class of drilling equipment and the size of drill rod to be
selected for drilling is given in
SP (QAWSM) 56 1994
1. Classification of Drilling
Table
Rigs
(Clause 5.1)
Classification Depth of
Dia of bore Size of
Type of Drilling Bore
Hole Drill Rods
Hole
Mm m mm
(2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Percussion Light 200 up to 50
(Cable Tool) Medium 200 up to 170
Heavy 200 above 170
Rotary-Direct Light 200 up to 250 73
Circulation Medium 200 up to 450 89
89. 101,
Heavy 200 above 450
114
Rotary-Reverse Medium 500 up to 170 150
Circulation Heavy 675 above 170 150
Down-the-Hole Light 114 up to 50 76
(DTH) Hammer Medi um 150 up to 170 114
Heavy 150 above 170 114
Heavy 200 above 170 114
Combination Medium
29
(Rotary cum- Rotary 200 up to 450 89
Percussion) Percussion 300 up to 170 -
Heavy
Rotary 200 above 450 89
Percussion 300 above 170 -
DTH cum-Rotary Medium
DTH 150 up to 170 114
Rotary 250 up to 50 114
Heavy
DTH 150 above 170 114
Rotary 250 up to 100 114

30
 Consolida
i) Formations 114 Up to 50 DTH Light 76
-ted
iike hard sandstone,
150 up to 170 DTH Medi um 114
lime-
stone, Trap,
150 above 170 DTH Heavy 114
Basalt,
Quartzite, Granite, etc. 200 above 170 DTH Heavy 114
Semi-
ii)
consolidated
formations:
Sandstone, Clay, Rotary - Circulatio
a) 200 up to 250 Light 73
Shale Direct n
Rotary- Circulatio
200 up to 450 Medium 89
Direct n
Rotary- Circulalio 89,101,11
200 up to 450 Heavy
Direct n 4
Percussion (Cable
b) Bouidery 200 up to 170 Medium
tool)
Percussion (Cable
200 above 170 Heavy
tool)
Semi- Rotary -cum -
iii) And 150 up to 300 Heavy 89
consolidated Percussion
Boulde
Formation
ry
Unconsolidat Rotary - Direct-
iv) 200 up to 250 Light 73
ed Circula tion
Rotary Direct-Ci
formation up to 450 Medium 89
rculation
Rotary - Direct-
above 450 Heavy 89
Circula lion
Soft alluvial, Rotary -Reverse-
I v) 500 up to 170 Light 150
clay, Circulation

31
 Rotary - Reverse -
gravel small (upto 125 675 above 170 Medium 150
Circulation
mm size) cobbles
formation

4.4 WELL CASING

Well casing is a pipe and is used to prevent caving in of surrounding soil into the well or
bore-hole. The upper portion of the casing, used for housing the pumping equipment, is
called housing pipe. The casing may be temporary and removed on completion of the well
(drive pipe) or it may be a permanent part of the structure. The length and diameter of the
casing pipe is selected on the basis of static water level, drawdown, discharge expected from
the pump and the size of pump to be installed.
Steel tubes most suitable for varied type of water well drilling operations - either casing or
drive - are those made to IS 4270 : 2001. The tubes ;are seamless, automatic fusion welded or
electric resistance welded or high frequency induction welded. They are designated Fe 410 or
Fe 450 grades based on the minimum tensile strength. The dimensions and masses of various
types of tubes are as given in Tables mentioned below . Unless otherwise agreed to between
the supplier and the purchaser, the pipes shall be supplied in random lengths of 4 to 7 metres.

Tolerances
a) Outside diameter - Permissible tolerance on outside diameter of pipe and socket shall
be :1% percent but not greater than 3 mm in the case of socket.
b) Thickness - The permissible tolerances on tubes thickness shall be as follows:

Seamless tube + 20 percent

Welded tube - 12.5 percent
Up to and including + 15 percent
406.4 mm outside - 12.5 percent
diameter
Over 406.4 outside + 15 percent
Diameter - 10 percent

32
 c) Mass - No single tube shall deviate from the mass specified in tables mentioned
below with a tolerance of +10 .5 percent.

Table : Dimensions and Masses of Screwed and Socketed casing pipes

Nomi
nal OutSide Thickness Mass of Socket Overall
Dia
Bore Diameter or Pipe Plain Tube Outside Length
or
or Pipe Diameter Of Socket, Min
Pipe
(mm) (mm) (mm) kg/m (mm) (mm)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
100 114.3 5.4 14.5 130.0 114.3

125 141.3 5.4 18.1 157.0 120.6

7.1 23.5
150 168.3 5.4 21.6 184.0 127.0
7.1 28.2

175 193.7 6.4 29.6 211.6 152.4

8.0 36.6
200 219.1 6.4 33.6 237.0 152.4

8.0 41.6

225 244.5 7.1 41.6 262.5 165.1

9.0 52.3 .
250 273.1 8.0. 52.3 291.0 177.8
10.0 64.9
.
300 323.9 8.0 62.3 346.0 177.8
.

33
 10.0 77.4

4.4.1Coating of Tubes :
Unless otherwise specified by the purchaser, the tubes shall be externally coated with
bituminous solution or any other protective anticorrosion coating. The bituminous solution
shall be of a quality such as to produce a coating which, when dry, shall be smooth, tough
and tenacious and sufficiently hard not to flow on exposure to a temperature of 63C and
shall not be brittle at OC. It shall not be such as will impart a taste to the water.

Well screens serve as intake section of a well that allows water to flow freely into the well,
prevents sand from entering with water .and acts as a structural retainer to support the
borehole in unconsolidated material. To accomplish fully its intended purposes, the well
screen must be of efficient design i.e. it should let ample quantity of sand-free water to flow
into the well with minimum loss of head. The screens may range from pipes perforated in
place to carefully fabricated cage-type wirewound screens with accurately sized slot open-
ings.

4.4.2 TYPES
The following are the various. types of well screens and slotted pipes:
Plain Slotted Pipes - These are pipes with slots cut by milling.
Bridge Slotted Pipes - The slots here are not cut but pressed out.
Mesh Wrapped Screens - These are made by wrapping copper mesh over perforated steel
pipe using spacers about 3 mm thick in between the copper mesh and the perforated pipe.
Cage Type Wire-wound Screens - These are special type of screens wherein a continuous
trapezodial or circular wire is spirally wound around a fabricated cage. The screen
consists of wedge profile wire of various dimensions, resistance welded to a cylindrical
body made of various members and cross sections of longitudinally arranged metal rods,
which are in turn welded into cylindrical ring couplings at either end.
4.4.3 Material :
The well screens and slotted pipes shall be made of either corrosion resistant material or steel
pipes having sufficient thickness to guard against the effect of corrosion and to ensure
34
reasonable life of tubewell. The following are the recommended materials for various type of
well screens and slotted pipes:
Low carbon steel or mild steel;
Stainless steel
Normally Stainless steel strainer is to be used and Low carbon strainer is to be adopted in
case steel strainer is not commercially available. How ever for rural areas the required
diameter of strainer is in the range of 150 mm to 250 mm and for these sizes stainless
steel strainer is easily available in the market .
4.5 DESIGN FEATURES :
4.5.1 Length of Screen :

The length of screen shall be governed by the thickness of acquifer and shall be sufficient to
obtain the specified yield from tubewell. However, the minimum total length shall be such
that the entrance velocity is less than the permissible entrance velocity of 0.03 m/s to ensure
longer life of the well. The lengths of individual pipes shall be such as to afford easy
handling for transport and to account for possibility of inaccuracy in logging, screen shall not
be placed in at least 0.3 metre on both sides of the stratum.

4.5.2 Diameter of the Screen :

The screen diameter shall be so selected that the percentage of slot area to screen surface area
is generally between 20 to 25 percent. For gravel packed Tube wells and 8-10% for natural
packed Tube Wells .

Screen diameters for various discharges to be pumped from the well, are given in Table 1 for
general guidance

Table 1 Screen Diameter

(Clause 4.2.1)
Discharge Screen Dia (mm)
LPM Minimum Recommended
Up to 475 100 100
475 1125 150 150
1300 3000 200 250
3000 5250 250 300

35
5200 9500 300 350
9500 13300 350 400
13300 19000 400 450
19000 26500 450 500
26500 34000 500 550

4.5.3 Slot Size :

The shape and size of the slots shall be such that the gravel or acquifer material is not
allowed to block the open spaces. Based on the sieve analysis of the acquifer material, the
size of the slot openings shall be determined in such a way that finer fractions remain outside
the slots. the slots shall not be too wide to cause entry of the gravel and resulting in plugging.
Sharp edges on the periphery of the pipe may offer resistance to flow and hence it is
preferable to have smooth rounded edges.
The slot size for gravel pack shall be so selected as to retain at least 90 percent of the
pack material. However, in case the well is not provided with gravel pack, slot size shall be
such that it allows 40 to 60 percent of the aquifer material to pass through. The normal slot
sizes shall be 1.0, 1.6 and 3.2 mm.

Percentage Openings
The percentage slot openings shall be such that the screen length provides sufficient inlet
area to limit the entrance velocity to 0.03 m/s.

SPECIFIC DESIGN FEATURES of STRAINERS :

Plain Slotted Pipes
Low Carbon or Mild Steel Slotted Pipes
The slots shall' be cut by milling or by slitting. saw. The recommended thicknesses for
different diameters for various depths of tubewell under normal conditions are given in
below mentioned Table .
Table : Thickness of Pipes to be used as slotted pipes :
( Clause 5.1.1 )
Depth of
Thickness for Pipe Size (OD) in mm
Well
m 166.6 219.1 273.00 323.80 355.00

36
 to
168.3
50 4.85 7.04 7.09 8.38 9.52
100 5.4 7.04 7.09 8.38 9.52
125 5.4 7.04 7.8 8.38 9.52
150 5.4 7.04 7.8 8.38 9.52
175 5.4 7.04 7.8 8.38 9.52
200 5.4 7.04 7.8 8.38 9.52
250 7.11 8.18 9.27 9.52 9.52
275 7.11 8.18 9.27 9.52 9.52
300 7.11 8.18 9.27 9.52 9.52

Cage Type Wire-wound Screens

The wrapping wire having a wedge profile with flat surface on the outside and producing
expanding slots on the inside should be-used. This shape facilitates setting and back washing
operation and also avoids the screens being clogged by fine particles.
For obtaining a minimum of 15 percent open area, the screen aperture shall not be
less than 0.375 mm. The number and cross-section of the vertical support rods and the profile
of the wrapping wire shall be such as to give sufficient axial and collapse -strength (see Fig.

37
4).

38
4.6 GUIDELINES FOR SELECTION OF SLOT SIZE
4.6.1 Determination of Slot Size:
The size of slot openings suitable for different formations shall be based on sieve
analysis of the aquifer material. Following procedure- and design criterion is laid down for
general guidance:
A weighed quantity of the thoroughly mixed sample is passed through a set of
Indian Standard sieves from No. 75 onwards. The sieves are arranged such
that the coarsest sieve is placed at the top and the finest at the bottom. After
proper shaking, the sieve set is opened and material retained on each sieve is
correctly weighed. The cumulative weight passing through each sieve is
plotted on semilogarithmic graph paper having percentage weight as ordinate
on arithmatic scale and size of the sieve opening as abscissa on logarithmic
scale. A smooth graph is then drawn through the points based on which
selection of slot size shall be done.

39
4.7GRAVEL PACKING

4.7.1NEED FOR GRAVEL PACKING :

a. The four common reasons for gravel packing are:

b. to increase the specific capacity of the well,
c. to minimize sand flow through the screen in fine formations,
d. to aid in the construction of well, and
e. to minimize the rate of incrustation by using a larger screen slot opening where the
formation is relatively thin but very permeable and the chemical characteristics of the
groundwater indicate potential for significant incrustation.
4.7.2 CRITERION FOR GRAVEL PACKING
The desirability of gravel packing decreases as the water bearing formation becomes coarser.
Generally, formation with an effective grain size, D1O that is that size, than which only 10
percent of the formation is finer, or more than 0.30 mm and a uniformity co-efficient of 5 or
more can be safely developed without gravel packing.
4.7.2.1 : Choice of Strainer :
It is recommended that for natural packed/ Gravel Tube wells Stainless steel Strainer shall be
adopted

Gravel Sizes
The gravel sizes shall be as given in Table. 1.
Table 1 Gravel Sizes

Sl. Practical IS Sieves

Grad
No Pack Size Range
e (see IS 460 (part 2) :
. (mm)
1985)
Over 2.0 to
1. A Fine gravel 2.0, 3.35
3.35
Fin Over 3.35 to
2. B gravel 3.35, 4.75
e 4.75
Medium Over 4.75 to
3. C 4.75, 6.3
gravel 6.3
4. D Medium Over 6.3 to 6.3, 8.0

40
 gravel 8.0
Coarse Over 8.0 to
5. E 8.0. 12.5
gravel 12.5
To avoid trouble in placing and inspective of gradation, packs should not contain particles
greater than 13 mm.
4.7.2Particle Size Distribution :
The particle size distribution of gravel shall be determined by screening through standard
sieves in accordance with IS 460 (Part 2): 1985. The percentage distribution of the sizes shall
be determined from a graph in which the percentage of material passing through each sieve is
plotted against the standard aperture of that sieve. Any size, say D20 will thus indicate that
the cumulative weight of all the grains smaller than this size is 20 percent of the total weight
of the test sample.
The uniformity coefficient of the gravel, that is, the ratio of its D60 to D10 sizes shall
not exceed 2. A material with uniformity coefficient less than 2 shall be classified as
uniform and if greater than 2 it shall be taken as non-uniform.
4.7.3Pack Aquifer Ratio :
The pack aquifer ratio (PIA ratio) is defined as the ratio of 50 percent size D 50 of the gravel
pack to the 50 percent size of the aquifer. The size of gravel when used as pack in tubewells
shall be decided in accordance with the size of the aquifer material proposed to be tapped.
The gravel size, based on minimum head loss through gravel pack and minimum sand
movement, shall be limited as below:
a. Uniform aquifer with uniform gravel pack:
b. Pack aquifer ratio shall be 9 to 12.5
c. Non-uniform aquifer with uniform gravel pack:
d. Pack aquifer ratio shall be 11 to 15.5
4.7.4 Thickness :
The thickness of gravel pack shall be limited to 13 to 18 cm. The size of the screen
slot opening is governed, among other factors, by the size of the gravel or aquifer material
which it has to retain. The slot size for gravel packed wells should be such that it retains
about 90 percent of the gravel.

The development of a well is its treatment for the purpose of establishing the maximum rate
of usable water by cleaning the produced water of turbidity, sand, sediment or other

41
impurities introduced during drilling.
4.8 METHODS OF DEVELOPMENT
There are numerous methods of development.
and an important factor in all these is that the development work be started slowly and
gently and increased in vigour as the well is developed. The development should be
started as far as possible from the bottom of the screen because with this compaction
takes place as the work progresses upward and the overlying material can move down-
wards. The known methods of development are described below.
4.8.1 Over pumping:
Over pumping means pumping the well at a higher rate than it will be pumped when it is put
in service. It may be simpler to over pump in small wells or poor aquifers by employing the
pumping equipment intended for regular use in the well.
4.8.2 Compressed Air :
Another popular way of development is by using compressed air but it requires considerable
equipment and skill on the part of the operator. The capacity of compressor should be at least
9.35 cum per minute (330 cfm) at 250 PSI pressure for depth up to 200 meter . In case depth
of bore well is more than 200 mt a proportionately higher capacity compressor shall be used
4.8.3 Calculation of Discharge : Discharge of Tube well shall be determined by using V-
notch . Tables indicating discharge for various V-notch readings has been placed at
Annexure P.
4.9 VERTICALITY AND ALIGNMENT
If a turbine well pump is to be installed in a well, the well should be true to line from its top
to a point just below the maximum depth at which it is proposed to set the pump. A tubewell
out of alignment and containing kinks and bends or cork-screws should be rejected because
such deviations cause severe wear on the pump shaft bearings and discharge casing and in a
severe case, might make it impossible to get a pump in or out. If an air-lift or a suction pump
is used for pumping. Alignment is not so important and the same is applicable to the
submersible type of pump.
4.9.1 The conditions that cause wells to be out of plumb are :
a) the character of the sub-surface material penetrated during drilling,
b) the trueness of the pipe used as well casing, and
c) The pull-down force on the drill pipe during rotary drilling.
While drilling, gravity tends to make the drilling bit cut a vertical drill hole. Varying

42
hardness of the materials being penetrated. however. deflects the bit from a truly vertical
course;
d) Improper leveling of the Rig before the drilling is started
4.9.2 The measurements made are of the plumbness and straightness of the cased bore. Thus.
an oversized hole may be out of plumb but the casing may fall within specified limits. The
casing should not be permitted to excessively encroached the annulus and hinder placement
of grout or gravel pack
4.9.3 In case of gravel-shrouded tubewells, if the pipe assembly is found inclined in a slant
position before completing the gravel pack, the assembly should be pulled in a desired
direction by suitable methods with a view to rectify slantness and bringing the pipe assembly
within the 'permissible limits of verticality. The gravel pack should be completed
immediately after the verticality has been tested and rectified.
4.9.4 The verticality of the tubewell shall be tested by using plumb or plunger E (see Fig. ) 6
mm smaller in diameter within the inside diameter of the well casing. The plumb may be
made from a piece of sheet steel or a short piece of pipe. Which-.ever is used, it shall be
heavy enough to keep the plumb line taut. The hub of the ring shall not be solid, as the water
shall pass through it as it is lowered in the well. The bore F from which the plumb line A
passes shall be in the exact centre of the ring. Knots or marks shall be made every 3 m on the
plumb line to indicate the depth to which the ring has been lowered in the well. The plumb
shall be suspended from the guide pulley where it shall be at least 3 m above the top of the
well. The guide pulley is fixed on a tripod or frame. B as shown in the figure. The vertical
centre of the pulley shall be so located that the plumb line A comes off its outer edge exactly
over the centre D of the well casing. The results shall be recorded in Form A.
4.1.5 For tubewells encased with pipes up to 350 mm diameter, the verticality of the tubewell
shall be measured in terms of clear cylindrical space available within the housing pipe after
the construction of the tubewell.
4.1.5.1 Vertica1ity of .the tubewell may have a deviation so as to provide clear cylindrical
space not less than the clear cylindrical space available in a hypothetical tubewell of the same
size but having deviation of 10 cm per 30 m in one direction and in one plane only.
4.1.5.2 The verticality of tube well is to be tested as given in 4.1.4 After the necessary
computation is made, cross sections of housing pipes at different depths are drawn on a graph
and clear cylindrical space is ,determined. The cylindrical space of the actual~ constructed
tubewell shall be referred to as 'G' in the following paragraphs.

43
 Fig. METHOD OF PLUMBING A WELL

Cross sections of hypothetical tubewell identical in dimensions to the actual tubewell but
having deviation of 10 cm per 30 m in one direction and in one plane are drawn on the graph
sheet and the minimum allowable cylindrical space 'H' is determined.
4.1.5.4 If cylindrical space 'G' of the actually constructed tubewell is equal or more than the
cylindrical space 'H' of the hypothetical tubewell (having deviation 10 cm in 30 m in one
direction and one plane), the tubewell actually constructed shall be considered within the
permissible limits of verticality.
4.1.5.5 As an example, cross sections of two tubewells Gl and G2 having 300 mm
diameter of housing pipe have been drawn after computation of verticality results in Fig.
G1 and Fig. G2 while Fig. G3 shows the cylindrical space H of hypothetical

44
Fig.G1

Fig. G2

45
 Fig. H
A Normal Test
SL Rated Depression Specific Total Sand in Static Pumping
No. Discharge at Rated Yield Hours ppm at End Water Water
(m/s) Discharge Run Of Test Level Level
(m) (h) (m) (m)
__________________________________________________________________
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

B. Discharge at 1.2 times normal Yield or 1.5 times normal depression

Specific Yield Total Hours Sand in ppm Static water Pumping

Run at End of Level Water
(h) (m) (m)
_________________________________________________________________
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

46
47
4.10 Maintenance of Tube Wells :
Wells, like all other engineering structures, need regular, routine maintenance in the interest
of a continuous high level of performance and a maximum useful life. The maintenance of
wells and pumps is often neglected, since the greater portion of both the well and the pump
are located beneath the ground surface. The nature of deterioration which occurs in a well
may not be readily discernible during operation and may not be recognized until the well
fails. The deterioration usually develops slowly to a critical point and then accelerates rapidly
to failure. Therefore, any neglect of well maintenance often results in the complete loss of the
well.
4.10.1 FACTORS AFFECTING WELL PERFORMANCE
Several factors initiate well losses in inefficient wells. Care should be taken to
differentiate between those factors associated with the normal wearing of pump parts and
those directly associated with changing conditions in and around well. A well may show a
reduced yield because of reduction in the capacity of the pump due to excessively worn parts.
On the other hand, the excessive wearing of pump parts may be due to the pumping of. sand
entering the well through a corroded screen. It is also possible for corrosion to affect only the
pump, reducing its capacity but to have little or no effect on a properly designed well.
The common reasons of decrease in yield of a well include: (a) losses caused by
reduction in permeability from mud invasion or by compaction and shearing of the formation
face during drilling, and (b) losses from the turbulent flow of water adjacent to the well
through the screen or well face and inside the casing to the pump intake.
4.11 PREVENTIVE DESIGN FEATURES
High well losses are unnecessary since they can be minimized by a good well design
and construction. Therefore water well maintenance procedures begin with the techniques
implemented during the drilling of the original well and continue with the type of materials
used and with the extent of care, or the lack of it, that the well is given over the months and
years of operation.
Critical well design feature is the entrance velocity through the screen. An ideal
entrance velocity is 1.5 to 3.8 cm/s depending upon the average permeability. Maintaining
low entrance velocity results in high efficiency, minimizing sand pumping and reducing the
rate of corrosion and incrustation in well. The distribution and shape of slot openings is as
important as the entrance velocity in influencing well efficiency
3.3 A comprehensive design of the well system includes certain features in the discharge

48
and distribution facilities to permit proper monitoring. and maintenance of the well and
pump. The more important of these features are:
a) provision of an outlet in the discharge system to permit diversion from the system during
future test pumping and water sample collection,
b) a permanent throttling valve on the discharge,
c) a permanent airline with valve and gauge for water level reading,

d) access into the pump chamber casing which can also be used to measure water
levels to permit back up water level reading by tape or electric probe, and
e) ready access to the well to pull the pump and maintain the well.
4.12 MAINTENANCE PLANNING
The planning of well maintenance procedures should be based on a system of good
record keeping. The problems that result in reduced well yield occur at and around the well
screen and are very much out of sight. The analysis of good records must, therefore, be relied
upon for detection of problems in the well.
Among the records kept should be pumping rates, draw-down, total hours of
operation, power consumption and water quality analysis. Pumping rates and drawdown are
particularly useful in determining the specific yield which is the best indicator of existing
problems in a well. The specific yields of wells should be checked periodically and compared
with previous values to determine if any significant reduction has taken place. Such a re-
duction is often due to clogging of well screen and formation around it by incrustation.
Power consumption records also provide valuable evidence of existence of problems
in wells. An increase in power consumption, not accompanied by a corresponding increase in
the quantity of water pumped, indicates problem in either the pump or the well. If an
investigation shows no problems in the pump nor appreciable increase in the dynamic head
against which the pump is operating, then it is most likely that a problem exists in the well
and the problem is causing an increased draw down. A check on draw down should then be
undertaken and the well checked for incrustation
Regular chemical analyses of water will indicate the type of incrustation that might
occur and the expected rate of deposition in the well and its vicinity. The quality of water in
some wells changes slowly with time and only a regular analysis would detect such changes

49
 In wells, the waters of which have a high incrustation potential, the frequency of
observations of all types should be as high as possible and consistent with the use to which
water is being put. Observations should be much more frequent in wells serving a community
4.12 INTERPRETATION OF- OBSERVED OR MEASURED CHANGES IN WELL
PERFORMANCE OR CONDITIONS :
A decrease in specific yield without a proportional decline in the static water level may indi-
cate blockage of the screen by accumulated sediment in the bottom of the well, blockage of
the screen or gravel pack by incrustation, or collapse of casing or screen
Should the specific yield during a test for yield and draw-down show a decline of 10 percent
or more from the original test at a given discharge, the well should be surveyed to determine
the location and extent of possible contributing conditions. If collapse appears to be the
problem, the well should be surveyed to determine the location and nature of the collapse. If
Collapse is not the problem, the inside of the well should be scraped and the pertinent that
was subsequently bailed from the bottom should be examined to determine the chemical
composition, nature and extent of the encrusting material as a basis for a plan of
rehabilitation
An increase in the sand content of the discharge, particularly if it is associated with a
measurable accumulation of sand in the bottom of the well, may indicate enlargement of slot
sizes by corrosion; settlement of gravel pack beneath a bridge leaving an unpacked zone
opposite a screened section; a break in the casing or screen, usually at a joint; or failure of a
packer seal. Mechanical and mineralogical examination of a sample bailed from the bottom
of the hole and comparison with the original description of the aquifer and gravel pack
materials made during construction of the well may give some indication of the nature of the
difficulty. If the material is noticeably smaller in grain size than the grain size of any aquifer
screened in the well, or if the material contains the full range of sizes of the gravel pack,
there is probably a break' in the casing or screen. If all the material is smaller than the screen
slot sizes, it is probably a bridge. If the above interpretations of grain size and distribution are
not applicable, the problem may be due to enlargement of a slot size by corrosion. If the
problem is apparently due to bridging, it can frequently be corrected by redevelopment while
pouring water down the gravel refill trernies and the addition of gravel pack material. The
other problems usually require a photographic survey to be made of the well to more clearly
assess the problem. Decisions can then be made concerning the practicability of
rehabilitation and the procedures to be followed.

50
 Settlement of the land surface around a well, the development on the ground surface
of small drainage channels towards the well, and cracking and settlement of pump pads and
foundations are all indicative of settlement of the well structure. In some areas, the problem
may be associated with land subsidence due to excessive pumping of the aquifers. Usually,
however, the problem is related to poor well design, construction, or development, and
results from excessive pumping of sand. In many instances, the sand pumping is complicated
by collapse of casing or screen, bridging of gravel packs, and similar deterioration. When
such conditions are encountered, the well should be taken out of service, sounded for depth,
and surveyed photographically to determine whether any structural damage has occurred. If
the well cannot be shut down because of the need for water, the casing should be temporarily
supported by welding heavy I-beams to it.
Decline in pump discharge and head may be due to deterioration of pump or
simultaneous deterioration of both the well and the pump. A common occurrence is a
decrease in shut-in head and significant decrease in discharge without a corresponding
decline in static water level and specific yield. Such an occurrence is usually due to one of
the following conditions: (1) improper adjustment of the impeller due to wear or other
causes, (2) a hole in the column pipe, or (3) erosion of the impeller or bowls.
A condition which is usually associated with considerable vibration when the pump is
running. If the condition cannot be corrected by adjusting the impellers, the pump should be
pulled and repaired or replaced. The cause of the problem should be thoroughly investigated
and made a part of the permanent well and pump record
Excessive vibration of the pump may result from imbalance of the impeller or from
the pump being installed in a crooked well. A pump which makes a crackling noise similar to
gravel being thrown on a tin roof is probably experiencing cavitations at the impellers. This
is particularly true if the discharge is surging and irregular and contains considerable air. The
condition usually results from a decline in the static water level or reduced well capacity
because of incrustation or accumulation of sand in the screen. Either of these conditions
results in excessive draw down for pump and a decline below that required in the available
net positive suction head. If the condition is due to a decline in the static water level, it can
usually be corrected by lowering the bowl assembly . In severe cases, it may be necessary to
add additional stages and a larger motor in addition to lowering the bowls. The well should
also be checked for possible incrustation of the screen or other causes of reduced efficiency.

51
Excessive heating of the motor is occasionally encountered and is usually associated with an
overload condition and the consumption of excessive electrical energy. Such heating may be
caused by a poorly adjusted impeller which is dragging on the bowls, too tight a packing
gland, improper or unbalanced voltage, poor electrical connections, or improper sizing of
motor.
Occasionally, an inadequate discharge will be associated with trash that has lodged in the
bowls or blockage of the impellers or bowl channels by products of corrosion and
incrustation. Correction entails pulling the pump for repair. These conditions may also be
reflected in overheating of the motor. Where overheating is encountered, the installation
should be first checked by an electrician to determine whether the trouble is in the power
system or in the pump, rather than in the well.
Occasionally, a noticeable increase in oil consumption is encountered in oil-
lubricated pumps. The excessive consumption may be due to a hole in the wall of the oil
tubing or excessive wear on a packing gland in the tubing. These conditions can result in a
decrease in differential pressure in the oil tubing and loss of oil into the well. The first
condition can result in inflow of water into the tubing and formation of an emulsion of water
and oil. The emulsion lacks adequate qualities and can result in excessive wear or burning
out of the bearings. The escape of oil into the well can result in the accumulation of oil
floating on the water surface in the casing. With adequate pump submergence, this latter
condition may not cause serious trouble but if draw-down increases due to a decline in water
table or deterioration of the well, oil may be drawn into the pump. causing impairment of
water quality. In addition, the presence of oil may contaminate the groundwater and preclude
accurate measurement of static water and pumping water levels.
Small capacity wells usually have discharges of less than 500 Lt/min. casing and
screen used for such wells commonly are 15 cm in diameter or smaller, and materials used in
their construction are relatively light in weight. While the observations and measurements
outlined above are equally applicable for large capacity pumps and wells they are usually
difficult to justify economically.
Maximum Safe yield and specific yield
Maximum safe yield of the well is the quantity that can be drawn without continuous
lowering of the water table and without sand blowing indicated by soil particles appearing
in pumped water. The specific capacity of a well is the discharge per meter of draw down at
the well. Design yield of Tube Well shall be taken after incorporating the decline in the yield

52
of the well during its design life of 15 years . It is observed that over a period of time yield
of Tube well decreases . Safe yield of Tube Well should be t 30% more than the required
design discharge to cover the decreases in yield over a period of time for Natural Packed
Tube wells and 50% more for Gravel packed Tube Wells. Sample calculation to determine
yield of Tube well are placed at annexure L

4.13 WELL REHABILITATION AND A.BANDONMENT

WELL REHABILITATION

The rehabilitation of well means repair of wells which have failed because of collapse, bro-
ken casing and screen or other similar damage, and the treatment of wells which have begun
to pump sand, have experienced a change of water quality or have shown a marked decrease
in discharge and efficiency because of incrustation, or other factors which tend to reduce the
intake area of the screen and permeability of the adjacent aquifer. It shall be undertaken
when the specific yield falls to about 80 percent of the initial value.
The cause and extent of well sickness must be diagnosed before the rehabilitation
programme is undertaken.
If the decrease in yield is due to the lowering of water table in the aquifer as a
result of over pumping or interference from other wells, then nothing can be done.
However the failures due to incrustation, corrosion, improper design, gravel
placement and faulty construction may be remedied by a suitable rehabilitation
programme.
The major problem in rehabilitation is estimating the exact nature of the deterioration
since the screen and other components most likely to deteriorate are not open to usual
inspection or testing. This may be overcome to an extent by adequate investigation
and planning prior to undertaking the work as given below.
Information to be given by user
The following information shall be made available by the owner:
a) Initial and present well yield, depression, and water level as observed
periodically during the well's service life;
b) Sand content in ppm, if any;
c) Grain size distribution of the strata tapped as a result of sieve analysis:
d) Location of screen, its opening size, percentage of screen surface area to

53
 the total open area, screen material, length and diameter of screen and well
pipes, etc, and data of acceptance of the well;
e) Size and quantity of pea-gravel used initially and during its service life;
f) Method used and details of development with results;
g) Method of drilling adopted, name of drilling agency, original pump and well test
results and results of subsequent tests, if available;
h) Results of the initial and present chemical analysis of the well water;
i) Details of any chemical treatment, if ever given to the well and results achieved
therefrom;
j) Sounding of the well observed every year
k) Details of repairs to the pumping equipment carried out every year; and
l) Number of electricity units consumed per kilowatt ratings every year during service
life of the well.
Investigations to be carried out by the contractor
The following data shall be determined for reference when starting rehabilitation of any well:
a) Date of acceptance of well;
b) Name of contractor;
c) Method of drilling;
d) Method of formation sampling;
e) Formation log;
f) Mechanical analyses of aquifer samples;
g) Mechanical analyses of pack material;
h) Screen materials, slot sizes, diameter and depth of setting;
i) Present open area of screen, design inflow velocity;
j) Depth, diameter and material of pump chamber;
k) Method and completeness of development;
l) Original pump and well test results and result of subsequent tests with dates;
1) Static water level
2) Measured depth of bottom of hole
3) Discharge
4) Draw down
5) Specific yield
6) Step tests

54
 7) Production tests
m) Ground water hydro graphs of the area;
n) Quality of water analyses of well with dates; and
o) Resume of maintenance, rehabilitation and performance.
The following investigations shall be carried out and data determined before starting
rehabilitation on any well :
a) Chemical and bacteriological analysis of the well water shall be carried out and compared
with the original one, with regard to its original and the present apparent incrustation po-
tential. If it is high or has increased with time, treatment may be required;
b) If the well is yielding sand, the discharged sand sample shall be collected and compared
with the original formation log so as to locate precisely the position of the possible rupture or
loose connection, etc;
c) If equipment is available, an underwater photographic survey shall be carried out and
location of any evidence of incrustation, organic growth or accumulation on the casing and
screen recorded. Also, any filamentous algae, iron bacteria or. Similar organisms floating in
the water shall be noted. Any evidence of mechanical damage to the casing and screen shall
be carefully inspected with the
camera and recorded with regard to ' its description and depth;
d) The present specific yield at design discharge rate and draw down, low enough to permit
continuous pumping for 4 hours, without breaking suction, shall be determined. This will
give a qualitative measure of the degree of deterioration and by comparison with the later
tests, the success of rehabilitation programme
e) The pump shall be pulled out and various parts examined immediately as they are removed
from the well. The column pipe, drive shaft, bearing spiders and bowl shall be inspected for
evidence of excessive accumulations or deposits of ferric or ferrous hydroxides. If the
deposits are present, sufficient samples shall be collected to fully fill a bottle capable of being
sealed airtight. This shall be done as rapidly as possible and the samples sent to the
laboratory immediately, so as to avoid generation of heat in the sample. The samples shall be
sent to the chemical and biological laboratories for identification of chemical compounds
present and identification, if possible, of organism involved; ,
f) The pump parts shall be examined for evidence of pitting, tuberculations, graphitization,
cavitation and wear. Pump bowls and impellers shall be inspected for evidence for graphi-
tization in areas where sulphate-bacteria are known or suspected to be present; and

55
g) The static\ water level and depth of the bottom of the well assembly shall be
checked when the pump is taken out of the well.
Acid treatment using hydrochloric (muriatic) or sulfamic (H2NS02H) acid is
commonly employed for rehabilitation. It efficiently eliminates incrustation due to calcium,
magnesium and iron carbonates', or iron hydroxides which can be detected by examining the
scrapings from the inside of the screen for chemical composition.
The strongest grade of muriatic acid, designated the '27.92 percent hydrochloric acid, is used
in full strength for acidizing. The amount of acid added for a single treatment is 1.5 to 2
times the volume of water in the casing, screen and gravel pack between the bottom of the
well and 3 m above the topmost screen slot. It is poured through a black iron or plastic pipe
38 to 50 mm in diameter and long enough to reach the bottom of the well. Acid to fill 1.5 to 3
m of screen is poured first; the conductor pipe raised about 1.5 to 3 m to pour more acid and
the process is continued till all the acid has been added to the well. The acid, being heavier
than water, displaces it as it is poured.

Iron and manganese hydroxides and oxides, although soluble in hydrochloric' acid,
precipitate out if pH is above 3. To keep iron in solution, regardless of pH so that it can be
pumped from the well with spent acid, a chelating agent like Rochelle salt, citric acid, tartaric
acid, phosphoric acid or glycolic acid may be added to the acid. About 900 g of chelating
agent may be used for 45 1 of hydrochloric acid.
To curb the tendency of the acid to attack metallic casing and screen, either inhibited acid or
an inhibitor such as knox gelatine should be used. 2.3 to 2.7 kg gelatine dissolved in warm
water and added to 450 Lt of acid serves the purpose. The acid is left in the welI for about 4
to 6 hours. At the end of about 3 min, sufficient water is added to displace the acid from 3 m
above the topmost slot to the bottom of the well. While the acid is in the well, it is surged by
air or with surge block for 15-20 minutes each hour. The acid is bailed out at the end of about
6 hours.
Hydrochloric acid is dangerous to use unless handled by experienced personnel and suitable
equipment. It gives off poisonous fumes and its reaction with carbonates is some times
violent spraying around the well. The transport of liquid hydrochloric acid to the field is also
not easy.
Hydrochloric acid of adequate strength is readily available at a relatively low price. It has
been used observing safety precautions and no injuries or casualties have resulted. Under the
circumstances, if appears that hydrochloric acid, despite the danger and difficulties
56
associated with its use, will continue to be used. However, if trained and experienced crew
are not available to carry on the acidizing work, consideration shall be given to employing
the less dangerous sulfamic acid.

It is for these reasons that sulfamic acid is being' increasingly used for well rehabilitation. it
is more expensive than hydrochloric acid but less aggressive and safer to use and easily
shipped and stored as dry crystal or powder. Its corrosive effect on well screens and pumping
equipment is markedly less. It, however, requires about twice as long to treat a well as does
hydrochloric acid.
When using sulfamic acid in a well, the same estimates are made regarding the column of
water in the well to be displaced and 1.5 to 2 times that volume is poured into the well
through a black iron or plastic pipe as described earlier. It is, available in granular form and
may be poured into the well from the top.

Because sulfamic acid is a milder and less aggressive acid, it is mixed in a black iron or
wooden tank at the surface. A tank about 1.2 x 15 x 3 m is usually adequate and holds about
5360 lt. The tank shall have a bottom valve through which the acid solution is drawn into the
well. 41 kg sulfamic acid, 450 g of phuonic F68 and 2.7 kg chelating agent such as Rochelle
salt, citric acid, tartaric acid, etc, are added and dissolved in each 450 l of
water to be poured into the well. If well is screened with metal, an inhibitor' such as knox
gelatine shall be used at th'~ rate of 1.8 to 2.3 kg per 450 litre of solution. The acid shall
remain in the well for at least 12 hours during which it shall be surged by air or surge block
about 15 to 20 minutes every hour. Then it is bailed or pumped to waste.
The spent acid is bailed or pumped out of the well using a corrosion-resistant pump for the
purpose. In many wells, pumping with a centrifugal pump is possible. Close observation of
the bailing or pumping discharge and the drawdowns during removal of the acid shall give an
indication of the success of the treatment.
During acid treatment of a well the crew shall wear protective clothing and respirators. One
or two 250 lt drums of concentrated sodium bicrabonate shall be available for quick
neutralization of acid with which crew members may come in contact during the operation.
During treatment, incrustation is dissolved and the fines incorporated 'in the agent remain in
the pack and base meterial. On completion of acidizing the well shall be redeveloped using

57
polyphosphate, sufficient chlorine for a shock treatment and one of the methods of surging or
jetting.
Glossy Phosphate Treatment
Glossy phosphates (polyphosphates) act by dispersing clays and salts and loosening their
adhesion to sand and gravel so that they may be readily pumped out of the well. Treatment
with one of the polyphosphates, coupled with vigorous agitation, effectively breaks up the
incrusting material and cleans the well. An important advantage is that polyphosphates are
safe to handle.
The polyphosphates are usually used in conjunction with a wetting agent, sodium carbonate
and chlorine compound. The wetting agent facilitates the penetration of the polyphosphate
solution into the fine-grained material and hastens the operation. Sodium carbonate has a
cleaning action on rust on iron screens and pipes and also serves to neutralize the effects of
oil and other organic compounds that might interfere with the action of chlorine. chlorine
acts as a catalyst and apparently improves the action of the polyphosphates besides sterilizing
the well and the adjacent formations.
NOTE - Under of the fabric. Therefore, until more is known of the fabric and composition
some circumstances, the wetting agents
cause too rapid a breakdown of the aquifer, it is recommended that wetting agents be omitted
from the solutions.
In wells screened with fiberglass-reinforced epoxy, sodium carbonate may be left out of the
solution without any loss of efficiency.
The following procedure may be adopted for rehabilitation:

Estimate the volume of water in the pack and screen between the water table and the bottom
of the hole to the nearest 450 lt. On the basis of the following amount of reagents per 450 lt
of water in the well, estimate the amount of various chemicals required:
a) For fibre glass-reinforced epoxy screens - Sodium hexametaphosphate 3.6 kg;
b) For metal screens-In addition to the above 900 g sodium carbonate; and

c) Should experience show use of a wetting agent is helpful, 450 g pluronic F 68

or equivalent.
Most wells contain between 10,900 to 15,900 lt of water. A wooden or black iron tank 1.2 x
1.5 x 3 m is a convenient size for transportation, etc, and holds in excess of 5 360 I of water.
Therefore, two or three batches of solution mixed in the tank shall be required for each well.

58
A convenient but not necessary arrangement that speeds up the operation is to use two tanks
in order that the next batch of solution may be mixed while the previous one is being placed
in the well.

The solution is poured or pumped into the well through a 38 or 50 mm plastic or black iron
pipe that initially is installed from the surface to about 1.5 m above the bottom of the well.
Sufficient solution is ,put in the well to displace an estimated 1.5 or 3 m of the water in the
casing and pack. The pipe is then raised 1.5 or 3 m and the procedure repeated until all water
in the well and pack are displaced by the solution. The solution has higher specific gravity
than the water and displaces it upward and outward from the well. When all the solution is
installed in the well, a volume of water equal to about one-half that contained in the casing
and screen in poured" is at the top to displace the solution from the screen and force it out
into the formation (see Table I). A 200mm casing contains about 11 lt and 200 mm screen
about 18 lt of water per metre of length. A surge block bail or similar tool is then run from
the bottom of the well to above the water table two or three times of the inductor pipe for air
surging may be replaced to near the bottom of the well and air bubbled up through the well
to thoroughly mix the solution remaining in the casing screen.
Chlorine Treatment
Chlorine has been found effective in loosening clogging of the intake section of the well and
water-bearing formation caused by deposition of iron oxide. Chlorine, when added to water,
forms hypochlorous and hypochloric acids, which kill the bacteria and produce an effect of
'burning up' the organic slime.
Sufficient amount of calcium or sodium hypochlorite to give a concentration of 100 to 200
ppm of free chlorine is added to the well either directly or in water solutions. Alternatively,
chlorine gas may be used but it is dangerous and requires experienced personnel and
equipment which may not always be available. It must be put into the well in a water solution
as it is both corrosive and toxic when inhaled. Hypochlorite solutions are cheaper, more
convenient and safer to use than gas but generally less effective.

59
The chlorine solution is introduced in the well through a small diameter plastic pipe. A
quantity 11 to 18 kg added slowly over a period of 12 hours shall suffice for a large well. The
pipe carrying chlorine must be positioned so that the solution does not impinge directly upon
any part of the pump, well casing, or well screen. After introduction, the chlorine solution is
forced into the water bearing formation by adding about 50 to 100 times the volume. of water
standing in the well.

The well shall be surged or the solution agitated vigorously as in acid treatment.
Repeated chlorine treatment will have more chance of flushing the clogged formation around
the well. Alternate acid and chlorine treatments are found to be even more effective.
Dry Ice Treatment
The use of dry ice, that is, solid carbon dioxide is still in the experimental stage. Dry ice
changes from solid to gaseous state rapidly with considerable pressure, when put into well
water. The rapidly expanding gas is confined within the well casing and is forced through the
screen openings to loosen the clogged material. On account of high pressure developed,
provision shall be made for the control and relief of pressure to guard against any damage.
As dry ice may cause severe burns, if handled with bare hands, heavy gloves or tongs shall
be used in handling the ice.
Explosives

60
These are sometimes employed to develop and enlarge crevices and fissures in tubewells
drilled in hard rocks. Charges of 30 to 500 kg are used according to the hardness of the rock
and the depth at which the charge is to be detonated.
Criteria for Acceptance
An increase in yield of the well by 20 percent of the pre-rehabilitated yield of the well or
attainment of 75 percent of the initial yield, whichever is more, shall be the basis of
acceptance. Alternatively; it may be agreed to between the contractor and the owner.
Information to be supplied by the contractor to Owner for future use
The Contractor shall supply the following in formation to the owner for future use:
a) Results of the investigations carried out before taking up rehabilitation;

b) Result of chemical tests carried. out before and after rehabilitation work;
c) Methods used along with name and quantity of chemicals used and number of
treatments given;
d) Results of rehabilitation; that is, discharge, depression and sand content in ppm
at start and after 20 minutes;
e) Sounding of the well after treatment;
f) Condition of the pumping unit before rehabilitation and details of repairs carried
'out to it;
g) Suggestions, based on investigations, for future upkeep and maintenance of the
well including recommended limit to continuous discharge and depression, that
is, rate of pumping in order to avoid harmful over pumping and thereby
limiting the entrance velocities; and
h) Any other relevant information desired by the owner.
WELL ABANDONMENT
Proper plugging of abandoned wells is a fundamental practice in the preservation of high
groundwater quality. Permanent sealing of abandoned wells is important because serious
groundwater pollution can occur from either contaminated surface water or interaquifer
transfer of ground water from a contaminated aquifer.

The basic concept in the proper sealing of an abandoned well is the restoration as far as
possible of the geologic conditions that existed before the well was drilled. The local
geologic conditions must be assessed in detail to determine the most effective method of well
sealing. Sealing is usually achieved by, grouting; when grouting below the water table, the
61
cementing material should be placed from the bottom up, by methods that would avoid
segregation or excessive dilution of the material. The upper portion of the casing should be
removed to ensure intimate contact of the grout with the wall of the hole to form a water-
tight plug in the upper 5 to 7 m.
2.3 To seal an abandoned well properly, the type of groundwater occurrence must be
considered. Under water table conditions, the objective is to prevent percolation of the
surface water through the well or along the periphery of the casing to the water table. Under
artesian conditions, the sealing operations must confine the water to the aquifer in which it
occurs.

4.14 Surface Waters

.
Artificial impounding reservoirs (Storage and Sedimentation Tanks ):
Rural water supply systems are planned with large impounding reservoirs as sources.
If an existing impounding reservoir is available nearby, it can be used as source for rural
water supply also, since construction of impounding reservoirs exclusively for rural water
supply schemes will be expensive. Where water is drawn from canal or from a non-perennial
river, it may be necessary to create a storage reservoir with capacity equal to the closure
period of canal or equal to the dry flow period in the river, it may be necessary to create a
storage reservoir with capacity equal to the closure period of canal or equal to the dry flow
period in the river or streams. Usually, the canal closure period will be about 2 weeks and
the river or streams may be dry for 3-4 months. The raw water from stream/ river/ canal may
have to be pumped over long distances and larger heads for storage in the impounding
reservoirs resulting in higher power charges. The capacity of impounding reasons to be
constructed shall be equal to the canal closure period/ dry season of stream or river plus the
evaporation and seepage losses. The pumping plant fro pumping the raw water from the
canal / river/ stream shall be designed such that the pumps, in addition to pumping the daily
requirement will also have capacity to fill the impounding reservoir before commencement
of the closure period of the canal or before stream/river goes dry.

The preferred technology option for treatment of surface water for rural communities
is plain sedimentation followed by balancing tank, slow sand filtration and disinfections
(with bleaching powder), pure water sump or filter water sump. Usually a jackwell is

62
constructed in the canal/ stream or river and water is pumped to the elevated storage
reservoirs for distribution to the villages thus resulting in higher power charges. In view of
the treatment cost and higher power charges and larger skilled manpower involved, user
charger for supplying treated water from streams and lakes are likely to be higher. Hence, the
community is to be informed for the high user charges and their willingness should be
obtained for such surface schemes before selecting as technology option.

Surface Schemes shall be designed only where the following conditions prevail :

1. Where ground water is insufficient or having quality problems such as high

fluorides and / or high TDS.
2. For the surface schemes to become viable the number of villages must be
minimum 3. However lack of cooperation among the villages may create
problems in operation and hence affect supply to the villages beyond the
source. Hence this aspect is also to be considered before a surface scheme is
proposed.
3. Since the cluster of villages requiring surface water has to be large to make
the scheme viable, some en-route villages (Which do not have quality
problem) can also be clubbed with the surface scheme. However, with
increasing number of villages, communication problems may affect operation
and maintenance.

63
 CHAPTER 5
PRELIMINARY SCHEME REPORT

This chapter describes the preparation of Preliminary Scheme Report (PSR) for a rural water
supply scheme, which is essential to arrive at an economical technology option in
consultation with the rural community.

Usually a PSR will consist of the following:

1. An executive summary in a single sheet describing the concept of the proposed
rural water supply scheme including rehabilitation of existing water supply
scheme
2. Salient features of the existing and proposed scheme.
3. Simple design calculations for the sizes of the components, line estimates of
capital cost for all the components including cost of rehabilitation of the existing
water supply scheme and proposed water supply scheme.
4. Cost of storage tanks shall be worked out by calculating per litre rate and cost of
pumping machinery shall be worked out on per BHP /KW basis
5. Below mentioned is sample rough cost estimate using single line rate method .
Sno Item Quantity Rate amount Remarks
1 Lump sum cost of Pump Chamber 15.62 6000 per
3.7x4.3 mt size complete with all sqmt sq mt
fittings plinth area =15.62 sqmt
2 Water works development of area 2000 100 per
= 2000 sqmt including cost of sqmt sqmt
fencing gate pillars etc
3 RCC OHSR 20 KL capacity FSL 20 kl 12000
20 mt per KL
4 Submersible pumpset of 7.5 BHP 7.5 BHP 5000 per
capacity including cost of electric BHP
control panel piping etc
5 Distribution system
PVC pipe 150 mm 2000 mt 300 per
mt
64
 PVC pipe 110 mm 5000 mt 200 per
mt
PVC pipe 90 mm 10000 150 per
mt mt
PVC pipe 50 mm 5000 mt 100 per
mt
Cost of misc fittings and contigent LS 100000
expenses like cost of surveying
supervsiosn

Alternatively rough cost estimates can also be prepared by using per capita cost
method . However line estimates will be more realistic .
6. O&M cost for the present population for water supply (including existing and
proposed), and small bore sewer (wherever proposed)
7. Schematic diagram of existing and proposed water supply schemes showing the
source, OHSR, transmission and distribution along with lengths and levels.
8. A village map showing the layout of the roads along with existing and proposed
water supply scheme showing the source OHSR, transmission and distribution
and roads and drains preferably using Total Station method.
5.1 Reconnaissance
A support Agency consisting of social scientist, consulting engineer & geologist and
the community shall go round the village for collecting the data required for
preparation of the PSR. During the reconnaissance, the functioning of the existing
water supply scheme is studied and the rehabilitation needs are noted. For the
proposed scheme, the location of the source and the location of OHSR have to be
identified with the consent of the community. The ground water availability and
quality of water may be ascertained by studying the water table in the existing sources
and discussion with the community. The highest ground level and the lowest ground
level and lengths of various components of pipeline have to be assessed. During the
reconnaissance the nature of terrain and soil condition are noted and alignment for
the out fall drain leading to the disposal point is also identified and noted on the map.
65
 At the end of the reconnaissance, the extent of rehabilitation and scope of the
proposed scheme along with the concept would have been formed.

After collecting the field data, approximate sizes are arrived at an approximate cost
for investment and O&M are worked out for various technology options for providing water
supply, sanitation, roads and drains. Approximate rates for pipelines, water storage tanks,
filtration units, ground water recharging structures are considered while preparing the line
estimates based on the previous experience structures are considered while preparing the line
estimates based on the previous experience. Hence a near reasonable line estimate for capital
cost and O & M cost can be arrived at so that the Community knows its required contribution
and likely O & M cost. After which a PSR is prepared consisting of the executive summary,
salient features, line estimates, capital cost and O&M cost for various technology options,
schematic sketches and village map. The PSR will be presented to the community in a Gram
Sabha, where various technology options will be discussed and the community will choose
the most suitable options which is affordable to them (with respect to water supply and
village sanitation). At the end of Gram Sabha, the land required for the implementation of the
scheme should also be identified and acquisition if necessary shall be completed before
detailed scheme report is to be done.

66
 CHAPTER-6
DETAILED ENGINEERING FOR
A RURAL WATER SUPPLY SCHEME
This chapter contains the methodology adopted for detailed engineering for a rural water
supply scheme. Field survey, design calculations, detailed plans and estimates etc are
described. The preparation of detailed engineering commences only after approval of the
PSR and therefore the designs and estimates will be prepared for the chosen technology
option only. The various components of a rural water supply scheme based on surface
source and groundwater source are discussed here.
6.1 Surveys:
The first step in detailed engineering is a field survey to find the levels at source, at
OHSR/UGSR and along the road network. In addition, lengths and alignment (bends) shall
be recorded. If any village map is readily available it will be up dated. Usually methods of
survey applicable for villages are chain and compass survey, level survey, plane tabling and
total station survey.
6.1.1 Total station survey System (TSSS) :
It is a modern method, which provides accurate and fast field information on levels,
distances, angles and landmarks. The TSSS is a system that includes an electronic theodolite,
electronic distance measuring instrument (EDMI), and an electronic data collecting system.
The system also includes tripods, tribrachs, prisms, targets and prism poles. The TSSS
system is used to perform the conventional survey methods of traverse, network, resection,
multiple ties, and trigonometric leveling This will be useful for planning all future village
developmental activities. Survey control points established with TSSS can be linked with
Geo-coordinates and the data obtained is directly transferred to a personal computer and
digital maps are generated. This process will yield highly accurate survey field data. Survey
using GPS and Total station ensures Millimeter accuracy. Compared to the traditional
method of survey, Total Station survey results in lot of savings in terms of time, money and
man days while ensuring more accuracy and lending itself to easy access, retrieval and
utilization of data.

67
The levels required shall normally be co-related to Mean Sea Level. Permanent as well as
temporary benchmarks shall be established at prominent places within the village for future
requirements.
a) Detailed L section survey should be carried out along the existing roads for all
pipelines and distribution system network. Levels shall normally be taken at 15 m
intervals. If necessary, additional levels may be taken at road junctions, bends or
peaks and valleys. Typical details to be included in a L section and cross section are
presented in Fig. 12
b) Net levels (Grid levels) are taken usually at 5m intervals for block survey of
OHSR/UGSR sites, treatment plant sites, pumping stations and intake structures.
c) The trial pits for pipelines shall be of size 1m x 1m and for a depth of about 1m to
note the nature of soil preferably at 500m intervals.
d) However, trial pits for other structures shall be taken to a depth of up to 2m to note
the nature of soil and subsoil water if any. Bearing capacity of the soil is determined
by SPT method and soil samples collected and tested in laboratory to co-relate the
results obtained in the field. For exceptional cases such as very loose soils or filled up
soils, detailed soil analysis may be required.

6.2 Selection of Source:

The origin of all sources of water is rainfall. Water can be collected as it falls
as rain before it reaches ground; or as surface water as it flows over the ground; or it
can be collected in ponds/lakes; or as groundwater as it percolates down to aquifers.
However, in Punjab state the main sources of water for irrigation and drinking
purposes is ground water and surface water from irrigation canals. Depending upon
the availability of potable water in the region the source of water supply is selected as
surface or ground water.
6.3 Groundwater based Schemes:
Ground water based water supply schemes shall have generally following
components.
6.3.1 Tube Wells:
Underground water which is abundantly available in most districts of Punjab is
tapped through installing Tube Wells. Tube Wells shall be drilled in accordance with
Indian Standard IS:2800 ( Part- I )-1979 with latest amendments, developed in

68
 accordance with IS:11189-1985 with latest amendments and tested in accordance
with IS:2800 ( Part-II )-1979 with latest amendments .

General Requirements:

Size of Tube well- M.S housing pipes confirming to IS:4270- 1983 with latest
amendments of nominal bore dia. 200 mm to 250 mm shall
generally be provided in most districts of Punjab. Length of
Housing pipe shall depend on depth of water table, draw down
and submergence requirements of pump.

Strainer - Steel strainer, Screens and slotted pipes shall be as

per IS:8110 2000 with latest amendments of nominal bore
dia. 200 mm shall generally be provided. Slot size of the
strainer shall be arrived at from grain size analysis of aquifer to
be tapped.

Depth - Depth of Tube well shall depend on availability of potable

water.
6.4 Water Works Structures:
6.4.1 Pump Chamber
Pump chamber to house machinery and other equipment shall be constructed as per
standard departmental designed, as shown in Fig 2
6.4.2 Staff quarter
Staff quarter for the residence of staff employed at water works shall be constructed
as per standard departmental designed, as shown in Fig 3.
6.4.3 Storage Tank
Elevated R.C.C. storage tank shall be constructed to supply water to the consumers at
water works site . In a multi village Rural water supply scheme OHSR can be
constructed at individual villages and a transmission line shall be laid from central
water works to storage tank to fill the water in the individual water storage tanks. The
capacity of water tank shall be calculated by using the mass curve . The height of

69
 tank shall be so adjusted as to keep a minimum residual pressure of 12 m (water
column) at consumer end. Tank shall be designed as per IS:3370 (part 1 to 2)-1965,
IS:3370 (part 3 to 4 )-1967. The staging of tank will be as guided by IS:11682-1985.
Foundation design shall depend on bearing capacity of soil.
6.4.4 Pumping Machinery
In a rural water supply system, pumping machinery serves the purpose of pumping water
from bore wells or for pumping raw water from source to treatment plant and treated water to
the service reservoir. In water supply schemes the pumps may be centrifugal or submersible
pumps are used for pumping water from sumps to Overhead tanks. The centrifugal pump
essentially consists of one or more impellers equipped with vanes mounted on a rotating shaft
and enclosed by a casing. Centrifugal pumps commercially available have a speed range of
980 to 2900 rpm and the most common speed is 1440 rpm. High-speed pumps have smaller
life span due to increased wear and tear though the size of the pump set is small. Some times
Vertical turbine pumps are used for pumping water from jack wells.

Generally Submersible pump set conforming to IS:8034-1976 (Refer annexure H for detailed
specification) shall be provided . The pumping hours shall be determined keeping in view
availability of electricity. Capacity of pump shall be sufficient to fill the elevated tank with
in the stipulated pumping hours . In the submersible pumps, the bowl assembly is directly
connected to a submersible vertical electric motor suitable for working under water and the
compact assembly thus formed operates below the surface of the water in the well. Delivery
of water to the surface is through the riser pipe on which the assembly is suspended. The
power is supplied to the motor through a flat type cable designed for working in under water
condition. These pumps are usually operated at a motor speed of about 2900 rpm.
To minimize the suction head, submersible pumps may have to be lowered inside the well. In
most of the rural water supply schemes the source is a bore well hence submersible pumps
are preferred for which suction head is zero.
6.4.4.1 Criteria for pump selection
Prior to the selection of a pump for pumping station, detailed consideration has to be given to
various aspects. The hours of pumping are decided and the quantity of water available in the
source is also calculated. Then the discharge of the pump set is calculated in terms of the lps
(liters per second). Friction head and the total head for the pump set are calculated for the
given diameter of the pumping main. Assuming a suitable efficiency and knowing the

70
discharging head the horsepower of the pump set is calculated by referring to the pump
manufacturers catalogue. After the required HP/KW is calculated; if water is to be lifted
from the tube well submersible pump is chosen or if a centrifugal pump is chosen for other
locations, reference is to be made to the relevant (either submersible or centrifugal)
catalogue of the commercially available pump sets.
The final selection of the pump shall be based on the commercially available KW/HP for the
given discharge (Q) and Head (H) . Selection tables based on above referred consideration is
given below :
Water rating Table I : Outer Diameter of Pump =150 mm
HP/KW Discharge in LPM
240 480 720 840 960 1200 Out let dia
mm
Total head in meters
5.0/3.7 22 19 17 15 13 7 100
6/4.5 35 31 26 24 21 12 100
7.5/5.5 47 35 32 25 16 - 100
10/7.5 60 52 45 41 36 21 100
12.5/9.3 72 63 54 49 43 25 100
15/11 85 74 64 58 51 30 100
17.5/13 96 84 72 66 58 35 100
20/15 108 96 82 74 65 38 100

Water Rating Table II :Outer Diameter of Pump =200 mm

HP/KW Discharge in LPM
600 900 1200 1500 1650 1800 Out let dia
mm
Total head in meters
7.5/5.5 22 21 19 16 14 11 100
12.5/9.3 39 36 32 26 22 16 100
15/11 44 41 37 31 26 21 100
20/15 57 52 47 38 27 - 100
25/18.5 66 62 56 47 40 32 100
30/22 88 82 74 63 52 42 100
35/25.7 110 103 93 79 66 53 100
20/15 108 96 82 74 65 38 100

6.4.4.2 Limitation on Suction Head:

For centrifugal pump sets suction head shall be limited to 4.50 m. In case where
suction lift exceeds 4.5m, the centrifugal pump may be installed at suitable elevation with
reference to the water level to restrict suction lift to 4.5 m. Where the suction lift exceeds 6m,

71
it is preferable to provide submersible pump or turbine pump depending on the site
conditions.
6.4.4.3 Pump Efficiencies:
The efficiency of pump sets depends on the friction and turbulence within the pump
set and mechanical and leakage loss. A pump set is chosen depending on the discharge and
head i.e. Q and H. Pump performance curves are provided by the manufacturers. Choice of
pumpset from among the various manufacturers shall be such that the pumpset has the
highest efficiency for the given duty conditions. Though the pump is chosen for the design
duty conditions, in practice the head may vary depending on the actual water level in the
source and friction head on the delivery point. Such a condition will result in the pump
delivering more water due to reduction in the head. This will decrease the efficiency of the
pump set and may also increase the power consumption. Some times, the variation may be so
high that the amperage of the motor will also increase resulting in failure of motor winding.
Hence, it is desirable to avoid over design of the pump sets and it is suggested that the pump
chosen shall work within plus 5%or minus 25% of the range of the maximum efficiency
point of O & H given in the family curve.
Fig 4 annexed with this manual presents characteristics of a pump under a constant
operating speed. It can be seen from the figure that each pump has a maximum discharge at
a minimum head, below which the pump will not work. Similarly at zero discharge (when
discharge valve is closed), the head developed is maximum and is known as shut off head.
Also it can be seen that maximum efficiency is obtained at a particular discharge. This point
is nearer to the middle of the range of head sand discharge of the pump. Normally,
performance curve for each type of pump will be given in the pump manufacturers
catalogue. In some catalogue instead of performance curve, water-rating charts will be given.
These indicate range of head and discharges applicable to the particular type of pump. Hence,
for a known head and discharge, from the range of pumps available, the most efficient one is
the pump in which the required head and discharge lies near the middle of performance curve
or water rating table. This also ensures satisfactory performance of the pump under varying
head and discharge during pumping.
6.4.4.4 Pump Installation:
Submersible Pumps:
Submersible pumps shall be installed in a bore well such that the motor assembly is always
submerged in water. Hence, normally they are installed at 1.5- 2.0 m below the lowest safe

72
yield level during summer under continuous operation. Hence it is necessary to install
Electronic water level indicators to read the water level in the bore well ensuring the required
minimum submergence (1.5m) also to avoid drawing of the sit/stand from bottom it is
preferable that lowest part of the pump is 3.0m above bottom of the well. The motor
assembly is suspended through the riser pipe, which in turn is clamped at the top of the
casing pipe. The insulated cable is tied to the riser pipe at regular intervals. The casing pipe is
taken to height of about 0.45 m above the ground level and is covered in order to prevent
misuse.

6.4.4.5 Accessories
Indoor control panels where pump chamber are provided or out door type control
panel for bore well pump sets will have provision for energy meter, main switch, starter,
single phase preventer, capacitor, etc.
a) Switches: A main switch of adequate capacity to disconnect power supply shall be
provided after the meter. This will enable to disconnect the service immediately in
case of any emergency or for maintenance purpose.
b) Starter: Starter with over load relay is provided to start and stop the motor and to
protect it against any over load. Over load may be either electrical or mechanical.
c) Capacitor:- Installation of capacitor of suitable rating in the motor circuit will
improve the power factor and reduce energy consumption. The running cost of the
motor will also be reduced. The recommended capacitor ratings are given below. It is
essential to provide capacitor to avoid penal action from the PSEB. Typical
components for starter and power capacitor rating for different range of motors are
presented below.
d) Single phase preventer :- In three phase circuit, three fuses are provided (1 for each
phase). If in any one phase fuses were to blow or any one phase is disconnected form
service during running of the motor, the motor keeps running drawing excess current
from the two lines and hence causing damage to the motor. If a single phase preventer
is provided in the circuit, it will sense the operating coil and trips the starter and
protects the motor from burning.

73
e) Voltmeter and three phase ammeters: - These meters will indicate whether system
voltage is within permissible range for the motor or to know whether motor is
drawing current equally on all three phases. The functioning of Voltmeter is very
important, voltage being low in villages damaging the motors.
(f) Selector Switch:- Selector switches of adequate capacity shall be used wherever more
than one pump is installed. The selector switches will enable to operate any one of the
pump or both the pumps from a single switch board.
Components for starter and power capacitor for different range of motors.

Sl. Range of Motors Starter Type Cables (copper Capacitor MCB Volt meter Ammeter
No conductor wires) KVAR Ams
1 Upto & inclusive D.O.L 2.5 Sq.mm 1 20 0 to 500 V 0-15A
of 3 HP
2 Above 3 HP upto D.O.L 2.5 Sq.mm 2 20 0 to 500 V 0-15A
and inclusive of
5HP
3. Above 5 HP upto Star delta 4.0 Sq.mm 3 32 0 to 500 V 0-30A
and inclusive of
7.5HP
4 Above 7.5HP Star delta 4.0 Sq.mm 4 40 0 to 500 V 0-30A
upto and
inclusive of 10HP
5 Above 10HP upto Star /delta 6.0 Sq.mm 5 40 0 to 500 V 0-60A
and inclusive of
12.5HP
6 Above 12.5HP Star / delta 6.0 Sq.mm 5 63 0 to 500 V 0-60A
upto and
inclusive of 15HP

6.4.4.7 Electrical Connection

Use of underground cable is usually made for service connection from PSEB supply
point to energy meter fixed inside the control board. Internal connections from meter to
switch to starter to capacitor and to single phase preventer etc. are done using suitable P.V.C.
insulated copper wires of 440 volts grade. From load side terminals of starter to submersible
pump, suitable water proof PVC insulated copper cable of 3 core type has to be laid. Use of
under ground cable of 4x 105mm dia aluminum conductor, PVC insulated, PVC sheeted
1.1 kV class is usually used from PSEB supply point to energy meter upto 15 HP loads. Use
of 3 core PVC insulated PVC sheathed copper conductor, water proof cable is used from
starter terminals to pump terminals (inside bore). All the electric installations including

74
transformer if any is checked by Chief Electrical Inspector before release of electric
connection by PSEB.
6.4.4.8.1 Safety Procedures
a) After installation, it shall be tested to ensure that the wires / cables used are
sufficiently insulated to avoid leakage of current.
b) For safety, all the metallic casing of enclosure of switches etc. must be solidly
connected to earth. The body of the out door kiosks shall have a separate and efficient earth
connection.

6.4.4.9 Pump Operation:

1. Trial Operation:
The operation of centrifugal pumps is quite simple and safe. There are
relatively few valves to operate and the pump will not be damaged even if the
discharge valve is closed for short periods of time.
2. Starting:
The pump must be primed before it will deliver any water. Failure to prime
the pump may cause the wearing of rings rub and seize or the shaft may be
scoured at the packing boxes. During starting it is desirable to have the vent
cock in the casing open slightly to remove any dissolved air in the water.
It is necessary to have the discharge valve closed so that the least load is
thrown on the driver when the pump is started. The valve should be opened
gradually to avoid over load on the motor and to prevent a sudden surge in the
discharge line.
3. Shutting Down
When shutting down, the discharge-valve should be in the same position as
when starting up by closing the discharge valve gradually so that less power is
dropped from the line and any sudden pressure surges in the pipe system are
avoided.
4. Inspection and Maintenance
Manufacturers supply instruction books that give directions for the operation
and maintenance of each pump.
If the base is not too rigid the shaft alignment should be checked occasionally.
6.4.4.10 Trouble shooting and remedial measures:

75
 Normally a centrifugal pump does not start pumping water immediately after
switching on due to failure of priming. This may be due to a clogged foot valve or
entrapment of air on the suction side. It is suggested that the pump is reprised by allowing
more water to fill the suction line by opening the by-pass valve on the delivery side. Usually
this may be sufficient. If the pump still does not deliver water then detailed inspection has to
be done for any mechanical clogging of the foot valve or due to visible leaks on the suction
side. In case of submersible pumps since suction head in zero, the above problems will not
arise.
If the pressure gauge on the delivery side does not register a gradual increase it means
that the water is not being delivered at the desired pressure or at the desired quantity. This
may be due to any leakage on the pumping main or burst of the pipeline due to the closure of
any valve on the pumping main. In such case, the pump has to be shut down and inspection
undertaken on the delivery side for any leakage.
If the motor itself does not start or if the speed is slow it indicates electrical problem
due to single phase current, low voltage or no power supply to the main switch or any fuses
might have been blown. In such case, the main switch is to be switched off and verification
done for the required voltage or replace any burnt fuses. During running of the pumps the
ammeter should always show the designed value of consumption of power. If the pump is
over loaded for any reasons and if the voltage is lower, it will indicate a higher value of
amperage in which case also the motor is to be switched off and resumed only after the
required voltage is observed. If all the above problems persists, if any vibrations are noticed
and if any unusual noise is observed the manufacturer is to be contacted.
In case of submersible pumps, if there is no discharge it may be due to:
i) Chocked strainer
ii) water level in the well being lower than the pump level
iii) single phase current, low voltage or no power supply to the main switch or any fuses
might have been blown.
If the problem is with the power supply the remedial measures as discussed above shall be
followed.
If the water level in the well is below the pump level, then sufficient time shall be
allowed for recuperation to raise the water level above the pump level. If this problem
persists it may be necessary to lower the pump. Hence it is essential to maintain the record
of water table in bore well and pump capacity observed to see whether pump needs to be

76
lowered. When none of the above are the causes for no discharge, the pump shall be removed
and checked for the fault.

6.4.5 Disinfection Plant

Disinfection of water shall be carried out using chlorine or silver ionization based
plant.
a) Silver Ionization Process :
The Silver ionization is a cold sterilization process using special silver electrodes
which discharge silver ions into the water by means of low power direct electric current. es.
As the water passes through the sealed chamber, metallic ions are generated to purify the
water. The microscopic action of the ions with bacteria are twofold. First, the bacteria are
destroyed through a change in their enzyme processes. The ions maintain a stable sanitizer
residual in the water until they are used up by this process.

Sketches showing Silver Ionization Process

77
Major Benefits
Effective protection against reinfection after sterilization
Conservation of the water is maintained over prolonged storage periods
The process ensures constant disinfection of conduits and storage tanks
The silver ionization process entails no risk of corrosion in pipes or storage tanks
The treated potable water is completely tasteless and odourless
Silver ions are non-volatile and retains their residual effect within a wide temperature
range
No moving parts in the unit ensure long system life and keep maintenance to a
minimum

b ) Disinfection By Chlorination

Chlorination has become the most common type of drinking water disinfection. It should be
noted that it is designed to kill harmful organisms, and generally does not result in sterile
water (free of all microorganisms). Two types of processes are generally used:
hypochlorination, employing a chemical feed pump to inject a calcium or sodium
hypochlorite solution, and gas chlorination, using compressed chlorine gas.

Hypochlorination. Calcium hypochlorite (Bleaching Powder) is available commercially in

either a dry or wet form. High-test calcium hypochlorite (HTH), the form most frequently
used, contains about 30% available chlorine. Because calcium hypochlorite granules or
pellets are readily soluble in water and are relatively stable under proper storage conditions,
they are often favored over other forms. Figure below shows a typical hypochlorite
installation.

Sodium hypochlorite is available in strengths from 1.5% to 15%, with 3% available chlorine
as the typical strength used in water treatment applications. The higher the strength of the
chlorine solution, the more rapidly it decomposes and the more readily it is degraded by
exposure to light and heat. It must therefore be stored in a cool location and in a corrosion-
resistant tank. Typically, 30 minutes of chlorine contact time is required for optimal
disinfection with good mixing. Water supply treatment dosages are established on the basis
of maintaining a residual concentration of chlorine in the treated water.

78
Water-based solutions of either the liquid or the dry form of hypochlorite are prepared in
predetermined stock solution strengths. Solutions are injected into the water supply using
special chemical metering pumps called hypochlorinators. Positive displacement types are
the most accurate and reliable and are commonly preferred to hypochlorinators employing
other feed principles (usually based on suction). Positive-displacement-type hypochlorinators
are readily available at relatively modest costs. These small chemical-feed pumps are
designed to pump (inject under pressure) an aqueous solution of chlorine into the water
system. They are designed to operate against pressures as high as 100 psi, but may also be
used to inject chlorine solutions under ambient (atmospheric) or negative head conditions.
Hypochlorinators come in various capacities ranging from 3.8 to 227 I/day. Usually, the
pumping rate is manually adjusted by varying the stroke of the pump's piston or diaphragm.
Once the stroke is set, the hypochlorinator accurately feeds chlorine into the system at that
rate, maintaining a constant dose. This works well if the water supply rate and the output of
the pump are fairly constant

6.5 Transmission:
Conveyance of water may be by gravity flow and/or pressure. Pipelines used for
transmission of water, normally follow the profile of the ground surface closely.
Gravity pipelines have to be laid below the hydraulic gradient. PVC Pipes are

79
 normally used for rural water supply schemes. MS/CI/GI pipes shall be used at all
road crossings and in hard rocky strata regions.
6.5.1 Hazen-Williams Formula
The Hazen- Williams formula is most widely used for estimation of velocity,
discharge and the loss of head due to friction.
V = 0.849 C r0.63 S0.54
Where:
V = Velocity in metres per second
r = Hydraulic radius of the pipe which is equal to D/4 where
D is the Inner Dia of pipe in m
S = Slope of hydraulic gradient m/m
C = Hazen- Williams Co-efficient of roughness

6.5.2 Co-efficient of roughness:

The values of Hazen- Williams co-efficient C for different pipe materials and
the values adopted for design purposes are given in Table.

HAZEN WILLIAMS CO-EFFICIENT

Conduit Material Recommended Values for
New Pipes Design Purposes
Plastic pipes (PVC) 150 145
Cast Iron, Ductile Iron and 130 110
Mild Steel Pipes of dia. up
to 500mm.

6.5.3 Resistance due to specials and appurtenances:

In pipelines there will be several transitions and appurtenances, which will add to the
loss of head in addition to friction loss. These are normally expressed as velocity heads i.e.,
K V2/ 2g

Where
V= Average velocity in a pipe of corresponding diameter in m/s
g= Acceleration due to gravity in m/s2
80
k= A specific resistance co-efficient for the specials or appurtenance.

The values of K to be adopted for different fittings are given in the manual on water supply
and treatment published by CPHEEO. However, in a rural water supply system it is
recommended to calculate the head loss due to specials and appurtenances at 10% of head
losses in pipeline.

6.5.4 Pipe Materials:

Out of the several of pipe materials available in the market, the most commonly used
pipes in rural water supply schemes is PVC pipes.

PVC pipes:
These are most economically suited for rural water supply schemes. These have
certain advantages over metal pipes, such as resistance to corrosion, light weight, easy
jointing

Specification - IS : 4985-2000
Class - 2.5 kg/sq.cm, 4kg/sq.cm, 6 kg/sq.cm and 10kg/sq.cm
Size - 20 to 315 mm (outer diameter)
Jointing - Solvent welded joints, flanged joints, rubber ring joints

Dimensions of Unplasticized PVC Pipes

Outside Tolerance On Wall thickness for working pressure in mm

Diameter (mm) Outside 2.5 kgf/sq.cm 4.0 kgf/sq.cm 6.0 kgf/sq.cm 10.0 kgf/sq.cm
Diameter (mm)
50 +0.3 - - - - 1.7 2.1 2.8 3.3
63 +0.3 - - 1.5 1.9 2.2 2.7 3.5 4.1
75 +0.3 - - 1.8 2.2 2.6 3.1 4.2 4.9
90 +0.3 1.3 1.7 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.7 5.0 5.7
110 +0.4 1.6 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.7 4.3 6.1 7.1
125 +0.4 1.8 2.2 2.9 3.4 4.3 5.0 6.9 8.0
140 +0.5 2.0 2.4 3.2 3.8 5.0 5.5 7.7 8.9
160 +0.5 2.3 2.8 3.7 4.3 5.5 6.2 8.8 10.2

81
 180 +0.6 2.6 3.1 4.2 4.9 6.2 7.1 9.9 11.4
200 +0.6 2.9 3.4 4.6 5.3 7.1 7.9 11.0 12.7
225 +0.7 3.3 3.9 5.2 6.0 7.9 8.8 12.4 14.3
250 +0.8 3.6 4.2 5.7 6.5 8.8 9.8 13.8 15.9

Note : Average thickness may be considered for design purpose for arriving at internal
diameter .
6.5.5 Depth of cover
The pipeline shall be protected against damages due to external influence. Hence, the
pipeline shall not be laid at surface, they shall be laid at sufficient depths to avoid damages.
A minimum cover of 1.0m above the pipeline is to be laid to avoid damage by superimposed
load. When heavy traffic is anticipated, depth of cover has to be worked out after taking into
consideration the structural and other aspects. However in narrow streets 1-1.5 mt wide
where no vehicular traffic is expected and digging deep may cause danger to the stability of
adjoining structures it may be reduced to 60 cm . Distribution mains and pumping mains can
be laid along the road berm to avoid load due to vehicular traffic on the pavement of road.
When road is to be crossed, GI/CI pipes are preferred to PVC pipes.

6.5.6 Hydraulic testing of the pipe line

After a new pipeline is laid, hydrostatic test shall be done to ensure that pipes and
joints are sound enough to withstand the maximum pressure likely to be developed under
working conditions.

The completed pipeline may be tested either in one length or in sections. Each section should
be properly sealed off with special stop ends and secured by adequate temporary anchors.
All permanent anchors should be in position and concrete should develop adequate strength
before the commencement of test. The section under test should be filled with water, taking
care that all the air is displaced either through vents at the high points or by using a peg or a
sphere.

In a pumping main the total head for which the pump to be designed is the maximum
working pressure. However, in the case of submersible pumps, by the time water comes out
of the pump up to the ground level near the bore well the total head will be reduced by the
depth of water in the bore well. Hence, PVC pipes at the bore well location, shall withstand a
resulting static head above ground level plus the head due to water hammer effect. In gravity
82
main the maximum static head is equal to the hydraulic gradient line minus the lowest
ground level along the alignment of the pipeline.
The test pressure for pipe lines shall be as per following :
Pumping Mains = 50% of Pipe test pressure class or working pressure which ever is
higher
Gravity Lines = 2/3 rd of the Pipe test pressure or working pressure which ever is
higher
After filling, the pipeline should be pressurized to the specified operating pressure and left
for a period of time to achieve stable conditions. The pipeline is pressurized upto the full test
pressure gradually and the section under test completely closed. The test should be
mentioned for a period not less than 10 minutes to reveal any defects in the pipes, joints or
anchorage. The test pressure should be measured at the lowest point of the section under test
or alternatively, an allowance should be made for the static head between lowest point and
the point of measurement, to ensure that the required test pressure is not exceeded at the
lowest point.

The leakages/ burst if any should be identified and rectified there after the test is again
carried out.

6.6 Appurtenances
Appurtenances are valves, which are installed in a pipeline to isolate and drain
pipeline sections for test, inspection, cleaning and repairs, and for expulsion of air. A few of
the commonly adopted appurtenances are discussed herein.

6.6.1 Sluice Valves

Sluice valves on main line are provided to stop and regulate the flow of water in the course of
ordinary operations and in an emergency. The principle considerations in location of the
valves are accessibility and proximity to special points such as branches, stream crossings,
major summit points etc.

Sluice valves of the same size as per diameter of the main line pipe are normally used for
isolating sections of pipe. Sluice valves are sometimes used for continuous throttling which
may cause erosion of seats and lead to body cavitations. Wherever small flows are required,

83
the bypass valve is more suitable for this purpose as compared to throttling the mainline
valve Fig. 5 presents the details of a sluice valve.

6.6.2 Scour Valve

Scour Valves are located in valley portions in the alignment of pipe lines, so as to facilitate
emptying of the pipe line whenever required for maintenance of the pipeline. The outlet of
the scour valve has to be connected to a natural drain. However, precautions must be taken to
ensure that the wastewater from the drains does not enter the water supply pipelines. During
installation of the valve, it should be ensured that it is always accessible for operation. A
proper valve chamber with locking ar5rangement is required to protect the valve and prevent
misuse. The size of scour valve shall be normally equal to half the diameter of the main line.
6.6.3 Air Valves
Air release valves are designed to expel air automatically from the pipe lines, which tends to
accumulate at the high points in the pipeline. Normally in gravity flow pipelines, when the
pressure in the pipe falls below the atmospheric pressure, air has to be drawn in to prevent
collapsing of the pipes to prevent the pipe from such collapse (vacuum). Additionally Air
Valve have also to release any entrained air which might accumulate at high points in the
pipe line during normal operations . For most cases in water works and pumping practice ,
two types of air valves are required . These are known as
A ) Large Orifice Air Valve : The purpose of this type of valve is to discharge air during
filling or charging of mains and to admit air to mains while they are being emptied . They
pass air at high rates of flow with small pressure difference either in to or out of the pipes on
which the valve is fixed . The ball which forms the valve element although buoyant is rigid
being covered with vulcanite . During normal service condition this ball is maintained in
contact with its seating usually of leather backed rubber by the pressure in the main and
cannot leave this seating except when the pressure falls practically to that of atmosphere .
This occurs at various sections of a main when it is either being charged or emptied . when
the pipes carrying a large orifice air valve are empty, the valve is open and remains in that
position until the ball is carried on to its seating by the arrival of water . once on this eating
and under pressure the valve cannot open and remains in that position even if the pipe is full
of air until the pressure drops . It will be seen there fore that this valve will not release air
accumulations under conditions of normal working pressure . when such a valve is
discharging at a high rate , as during the filling of main of a main there is a risk that the ball

84
although lying in a fully open position in the absence of water may nevertheless suddenly be
caught in the escaping air stream and closed when it may refuse to open again until the
pressure has been reduced . The ball of the valve in such a case would have to be held down
during filling operation . This defect has been over come in a large orifice air valve of the
advanced design known as kinetic air valve . In this air valve water or air enters from the
bottom side of the ball and the air rushing around the ball exerts the pressure and loosens the
contact with the top opening and allows he ball to drop down . When the solid water reaches
the ball , however it is at once displaced and instantly closed .

Figures depicting Kinetic Air Valve

Typical Sizes of Kinetic Air Valve
VALVE
A B WIDTH SUITABLE FOR MAIN SIZE
SIZE
40 370 440 210 Up TO 100
50 410 440 210 125 TO 200
80 430 505 235 225 TO 350
100 500 635 280 400 TO 500
150 620 860 430 600 TO 1200
200 735 990 505 100 TO 1200

B) Small Orifice Air Valve : The purpose of this valve is to discharge air which may
accumulate in sections of a main under working conditions , that is under the running
pressure in the main . The orifice is relatively quite small and is sealed by a floating rubber
covered ball at all pressures above atmospheric pressure except when air accumulates in this
valve chamber . When air has accumulated to depress the water level sufficiently the ball
falls away from out let orifice and the air escapes through this orifice until the water level
85
rises again causing the ball to re seal the orifice . The diameter of the ball in a small orifice
air valve is related to maximum working pressure and for a given size of orifice increase with
this pressure . The orifice is not less than 2.5 mm in diameter

Small Orifice air valve

C) Double Air Valves : In many instances both large and small orifice air valves are required
at the same point on a main and it is usual in such casaes to fit a combined air valve in a
single fitting .

Air inlet valves are used at peaks. A manually operated sluice valve is introduced between
the air valve and the main pipe to isolate the air valve for the repairs. Normally, air valves are
used with size equal to D/4 where D is the diameter of the main pipe on which the air valve is
placed. Fig 6. is a typical sketch showing location of air Valves and scour valves.
6.6.4 Reflux Valves

86
Reflux valves are also called check valves or non-return valves, which automatically prevent
reversal of flow in a pipe line. They are useful in pumping mains when positioned near
pumping stations to prevent back flow when the pump is shutdown. The reflux valve is
normally provided on delivery side of each pump to prevent back flow into pump impeller
and to avoid rotation of impeller in reverse back flow into pump impeller and to avoid
rotation of impeller in reverse direction. The size of the valve is equal to the same size as the
pipeline on which it is installed. Reflux valves shall have by pass valves, which can be used
for priming of the suction line before starting of the pumps.

6.6.5 Anchor Blocks:

Internal pressure including water hammer creates transverse stress or hoop tension. Bends
and closures at dead ends or gates produce unbalanced pressure and longitudinal stress.
When pipes are not permitted to change length, variations in temperature like-wise create
longitudinal stress. External loads and foundation reactions (manners of support) including
the weight of the full conduit, and atmospheric pressure produce flexural stress.
Bends end closures at dead produce unbalanced pressure and longitudinal stress in the
pipeline. Further when pipes are not permitted to change length due to variations in
temperature, pipes also expand and create longitudinal stress. Anchorages are necessary to
resist the tendency of the pipes to pull apart at bends and restrain or direct the expansion and
contraction of rigidly joined pipes under the influence of temperature changes. Figure ,7
presents the details of a typical anchor/ thrust blocks for a rural water supply scheme.

6.6.6 Water Hammer

The pump set is shut off only after the delivery valve at the outlet of the pump is closed
gradually so as to prevent the velocity rise in the pumping main. However, sudden power
failure causes the sudden stoppage of pump set. Such sudden stoppage of pumps prevents the
forward flow of water, which creates a separation of water column. Hence the water column
ahead of the pump set rushes towards the pump set (with a reversal of the direction) and
velocity increases by several times causing water hammer. This pressure rise or water
hammer results in a series of shocks, sounding like hammer blows, which may be of
sufficient magnitude to rupture the pipe. The pressure due to water hammer depends on the
elastic properties of the pipe material.
H max = CV

87
 g
C= 1425
1+Kd
EC1
Where
H max = maximum pressure in the closed conduit above the normal pressure in m.
C = velocity of pressure wave travel m/sec.
g = acceleration due to gravity in m/sec2 (9.81/ms2)
V0 = normal velocity in the pipeline before sudden closure in m/sec.
K = bulk modulus of water (2.07 x 108 Kg/sq.m)
D = Inner diameter of pipe in m
C1 = wall thickness of pipe in m
E = modulus of elasticity of pipe material
For D.I pipes =1.7 x 1010 Kg/ sq.m
For PVC/HDPE pipes = 3.0x108 Kg/ sq.m
For C.I pipes =7.5 x 109 Kg/sq.m
For steel pipes =2.1x 106 Kg/sq.m

The actual water hammer head can be calculated and added to the working pressure to arrive
at the class of the pipe which shall be able to withstand the total head on account of water
hammer plus the working head. Water hammer is contained in small size pipe lines by
operating them at lower velocities (not more than 1 m /sec.) Since water hammer head is a
function of velocity, choosing a higher diameter pipeline reduces the velocity and hence
reduces the water hammer head. However, cost effect has to be studied for choosing higher
diameter pipe to minimize water hammer head or chargining the pipe material or increasing
the pressure class of pipe to withstand the water hammer head.

6.6.7 Economical size of pumping main

For a given discharge, if smaller diameter of the pipes are selected the velocity of flow
increases. However the increased velocity results in higher frictional loss and hence increases
total pumping head, which requires increased HP of the pump. This leads to higher pumping
cost and may offset the reduction in initial cost due to the smaller diameter pipe. Normally,

88
the combined effect is a net increase in cost. On the other hand if too large a diameter of the
pipe is used the cost of pumping will be less, but the initial investment in cost of pipeline
and pumps has an annuity, which depends on the rate of interest and period of repayment of
loan taken for capital investment. The annual operating cost of the pumps will vary
depending on HP/KW of pumps (dependent on size of pipeline). For the most economical
condition we must choose such a pipe size, whose annuity due to initial cost together with the
annual pumping cost will make the total annual expenditure minimum. The size of such a
pipe is called economic size of the pipe. The optimum velocity for most economical sizes of
pipes is likely to be about 1 meter/ second.
The most economical size for conveyance shall be based on proper analysis of the following
factors:
a) The period of design considered or period of loan repayment.
b) Different pipe sizes against different hydraulic slopes.
c) Different pipe materials, which can be used for purpose and their relative costs as laid
in position.
d) The duty, capacity and installed cost of pump sets required against the
corresponding sizes of pipelines under consideration.
e) The recurring costs on
i) energy charges for running pump sets.
ii) staff for operation of the pump sets
iii) cost of repairs and renewals of pump sets
iv) cost of miscellaneous consumable stores
While selecting the class of the pipe higher of the following shall be considered
i) Twice the working pressure at the top of the bore well.
ii) Working pressure at the top of the bore well water hammer pressure.
Note : Economical size of Pumping main can be calculated by using the software in MS
Excel available with DWSS . Example of such design is enclosed at annexure - O

89
 CHAPTER-7
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
The treated water shall be pumped into the ground level reservoir situated at elevated places
in the village or to the overhead water tanks. The stored water shall be distributed through
appropriate pipe network system in the designed quantity at adequate pressure. The type of
storage tanks and their design and the design of distribution network system are discussed in
this chapter.
7 General guide line for selection of water works and OHSR site
Site selection criteria for Water Works and OHSR site :
a. For Rural Water Schemes Based on Tube Well as source of Water :
Site should be located at a site where there is possibility /indication of getting
adequate yield of potable water from under ground source on sustainable basis.
Resistivity method ca be used to determine adequate availability of Ground
water where ever required
Site should have independent approach
Site should be adequate so as to adjust proposed as well as future extensions
structures . It should be preferably located in such a way that adequate space is
available between OHSR ( Over Head Water Tank) and adjoining structures /
private buildings .
Site should not be flood prone and should not be low lying . and there is no
flow of sullage /sewage towards it . Site should normally be away from ponds
to avoid leaching action of pond water in to Tube Well water .
Site should normally not be abutting or adjoining cremation grounds and
dumping site of rubbish from village . In case it is not possible locate site away
from cremation ground adequate green cover / boundary wall shall be provided
to isolate the water works site from the cremation ground .
Site should not be located on recently filled / made up ground / mound or on
edge of rock where soil erosion can take place with rain water or other wise . It
should be preferably a firm ground .
90
 Site should be located such that working of Tube Well proposed on it is not
affected by working of private irrigation/ government Tube wells if any
installed in near viscinity .
Site should be located at such a place so the there is no hindrance / objection
from defence authorities / security agencies for the construction of OHSR . It
should be free from over head electric / Tele phone cables.
In case of multi village schemes site should be so selected that it is most
economical also as regards to length of rising main to UGSR / Height of OHSR
and sizes of distribution main pipes to villages .

7.1 Planning and Design Over Head Services Reservoirs

The water from the ground water source or treated water from surface shall be stored
properly and then distributed through network of pipes by gravity. Elevated service
reservoirs are the most commonly adopted structures for the above purpose as they can be
constructed at a suitable location within the village. Following are the parameters to be
considered in design of such overhead water tanks.
7.1.1 Capacity and Location
. Capacity of OHSR shall be calculated by Mass curve method keeping in view the
realistic availability of Electricity and water supply hours . Two number typical mass
curves are enclosed at annexure K as sample for different types of conditions of availability
of electricity . Normally in Rural areas of Punjab Electricity is available in shifts on rotation
basis . PSEB supplies electricity in Morning shift, Evening shift and Night Shift . Hence
before fixing the capacity of OHSR mass curve should be plotted for all the three shifts and
OHSR capacity should be worked out for worst case scenario. The tank shall be located
such that the minimum residual pressure at the remotest point in the village is at least 12
mts. If elevated lands are available at a reasonable distance, ground level reservoirs can be
proposed for storage of water. If such location is not available, an elevated service reservoir
can be proposed with staging such that it gives a minimum residual pressure of 12 mts after
counting for loss of head during peak hours due to simultaneous opening of the all the taps
on the distribution system

7.1.2 Staging
The staging height of the tank shall be such that, a minimum residual pressure of 12m of
water is maintained at the farthest/ highest point in the distribution system. The staging
91
height of reservoir is normally kept at 15m (Generally the staging height varies between
15m to 35m). It is desirable to locate the reservoir at the highest point in the village so that
the staging height is minimized.
7.1.3 Shape
The overhead water tanks should be made of Reinforced Concrete and can have shapes
preferably circular and intze type..
7.1.4 Standardized Capacity and sizes of Pipes :
Through the capacity of tank required varies from village to village for rural water supply
systems to be installed in this project, it is preferable to have standardized capacity.
Following standardized capacities along with sizes of pipes shall be used :
(As per CE circular no 42449-51 dt 31.10.90 and 56127-29 dt 16-12-93)
Sno Capacity FSL in Size of Pipes in MM
in Cum metre Inlet Outlet Over Scour
Pipe Pipe Flow pipe
1 25 15 100 100 100 80
2 50 20 100 100 100 80
3 75 22 100 100 100 80
4 100 25 150 150 150 100
5 150 28 150 150 150 100
6 200 28 150 150 150 100
7 250 30 200 200 200 150
8 300 30 200 200 200 150
9 400 30 200 200 200 150
10 500 30 250 250 250 200
11 1000 35 300 300 300 250

7.1.5 Pipe connections for inlet, outlet, scour, over flow etc.
The inlet pipe to the over flood service reservoir OHSR shall be preferably of the same
diameter as the pumping main feeding the tank and the inlet shall be taken above the
maximum water level of the tank.

92
The outlet from the OHSR shall be equal to the diameter of the first pipeline in the
distribution system starting from the OHSR. The outlet shall be placed atleast 150mm above
the floor level/ bottom of the OHSR.

The overflow pipe shall be equal in diameter to the inlet pipe so that the water coming into
the reservoir and overflowing quantity will be equal. The overflow pipe is located with its
invert at maximum water level of the OHSR.
The scour/ washout pipe in the OHSR will be located at the lowest point in the floor of the
OHSR. It is desirable to lead off both the overflow water and the scour-washout water
towards the nearest drain the hence these two pipes must be located adjacent to each other.
Some times the overflow pipe and scour (washout) pipe are joined to the same chamber near
the OHSR at ground level and later drained by a single gravity pipe to the nearest available
drain. At times the overflow water will be wasted for long periods due to lack of
communication between pump house and water tank locations. To avoid such wastage the
overflow pipe of the OHSR is joined to the outlet pipe of the OHSR so that the overflow
water is used in the distribution system instead of wasting.

It is desirable to provide bell mouths for inlet, outlet and overflow pipes to ensure smooth
flow and strainers to the outlet pipe to ensure that no undesirable particles enter distribution
system. The overflow and scour pipes are also provided with strainers at the termination
points in the masonry chamber to avoid entry of insect etc. Fig.8 gives a typical sketch of
elevation of an ELSR and arrangement of pipe connections for an OHSR. In addition, Fig.9
gives the typical sketch of fencing details.
Vertical piping provided for reservoir for inlet, outlet, and scour cum overflow should be
cast iron double flanged pipes. The flanges shall be machined to ensure that the pipes are
true to plumb and the joints with bolts and nuts are leak-proof. All the pipes entering the
tank and coming out of the tank shall be located at the floor of the tank. It is desirable to
keep the puddle flanges in the floor slab of the OHSR before concreting. However, while
embedding the same, care must be taken to ensure that the flanges are true to plumb so that
the vertical pipes connected to the OHSR are also plumb. sometimes it may be necessary to
fix the flanges after the concreting of the floor slab is done. In such cases it is suggested that
suitable grouting compounds may be used to ensure that no leakage occurs through the floor
slab at pipe locations.

93
 The vertical pipes may be marked with direction of flow and to identify the inlet, outlet,
scour and overflow. Color scheme be adopted
1) Inlet :- Green 2) Outlet :- Blue
3) Overflow :- Red 4) Scan :- Yellow
Similarly the Control Valves also shall be identified by proper marking. Control valves are
provided below the ground level in suitable masonry chambers and shall be vertical and true
to plumb. Sometimes a bypass connection is made between the inlet into the OHSR and the
outlet from the OHSR. This will facilitate supply of water directly to the distribution system
when the OHSR is taken out of service for cleaning. Supply from bypass may affect the
pressures in the distribution system.
7.1.6 Accessories
The standard type design drawings for the OHSR have provision for RCC. Spiral stairs
with RCC handrails, which terminate at the roof. The access from the rooftop into the tank
shall be with aluminium ladder to avoid corrosion. The roof of the OHSR shall be provided
with ventilators covered with GI fly proof mesh. An access manhole is provided just at the
entry point of the RCC ladder below which the aluminium access ladder is provided.
Lightning arrestor along with GI/ aluminium strip conductor is provided. The conductor is
run vertically along one of the columns. A water level indicator shall be installed and
located just above the ground level and connected to the water level in the tank with GI
wire and aluminium pulleys with an anti corrosive float ball in the tank. Care should be
taken that the Indicator is not accessible to the miscreants.
7.1.7 Design Principles
Type designs for RCC reservoirs are provided with this manual. However some basic
principles are noted: The designs of the OHSR are done to cater for gravity loads (i.e. wt. of
structure plus wt. of water stored), wind load on the structure and earthquake loads. The
components of an OHSRs can be classified as be are:
Foundation system- It may be raft foundation, pile foundation or individual footings
depending upon the safe bearing capacity of the soil at the site.

Staging- Comprising of columns and braces

Container comprising of top cover, vertical side wall, bottom slab and dome. All these
components are to be designed giving due consideration to the various factors affecting their
behaviour. The RCC for all components of ELSR shall be as per IS 456- 2000.

94
The type design of ELSRs are provided for maximum safe bearing capacity (SBCs
8.75T/m2). However, the actual SBC at the location of the OHSR may vary. It is necessary
to make a trial pit of 2mx2mx2m deep and collect the soil sample at each location and
determine the SBC. Based on the capacity, staging and actual SBC the suitable type design
will be used. However amendments in latest IS codes be strictly incorporated with special
regards to earthquake resistance. The OHSR of various capacities and staging heights are
being designed for various safe bearing capacities by an external consulting agency . These
designs and drawings shall be followed
7.2 Distribution System:
The purpose of distribution system is to convey wholesome water to the consumer at
adequate residual pressure in sufficient quantity at convenient points. The requirements for
the distribution systems are network of pipes connected to reservoirs with valves at suitable
locations for efficient operation and maintenance. Adequate residual pressure at maximum
demand depending upon the hydraulic capacity of the system should be provided. Normally,
water supply is intermittent in a rural water distribution system. Usually water supply is
made Thrice /twice a day which is equal to 6 /4 hours per day. Sometimes the total supply
may be restricted to 4 hours due to various reasons. Hence the distribution system is to be
designed for a peak factor of either 8 or 9 giving due allowance to higher demand in
morning nothing (assuming demand to be 2/1.5 times the normal supply). The road network
pattern in a village is normally with dead ends and rarely the roads are connected. Though
ideally a grid network is desirable, in a rural water supply system, dead end pipe systems are
common. In a dead end system, a single trunk main takes off from the OHSR with smaller
mains branching off from the trunk main. A single trunk main may be sufficient where
elevation difference between highest and lowest point in the village is not more than 4.5m.
When the difference between highest and lowest point in the village is not more than 4.5m.
When the difference in elevations is more than 4.5m, two trunk mains taking off from the
outlet main at OHSR may be required, one to serve the high level areas and the other to
serve the low level areas. Wherever, it is possible the distribution system of the high level
and the low level may be interconnected to provide emergency supplies. However, the
interconnection valves between the zones shall normally be kept closed.
Note: Depending upon the profile of the village either a dead end or a loop system of
distribution net work may be adopted, for all practical purposes.

95
Bulk Meters :
Bulk meters shall be provided to measure the quantity water supply to the communities
/habitations. Normally Bulk flow measuring meters shall be provided at Water works site
and at the entry point of each village / habitation . Readings taken from Bulk meters will
help in equitable distribution of water supply and identify looses of water in transmission
and consumption pattern can also be ascertained
7.2.1 Hydraulic Network Analysis:
A pipe network map corresponding to the road network of the village is prepared for
hydraulic analysis. The total length of present pipe network is calculated. The estimated
population/ households for the design period is arrived at. From this data the households per
running meter of network is calculated and hence the demand per running meter of the pipe
network is calculated. The demand for each pipe section is arrived calculating from the end
point as per the number of the households per running meter. The cumulative demand is
calculated for each branch and for the trunk main.
This demand is average demand, however, the network is to be designed for the peak
flow. The pipe network is then analysed for the estimated demand using the suitable peak
factor. Drawings should be digitized or prepared in Auto Cad . Design should be done on the
basis of hardy cross method or any other new method using software programmes as design
based on manual calculation may not incorporate all the practical commandments. The
design principles to be the followings :-
1) The algebraic sum of pressure around a closed loop not be zero i.e there can be no
discontinuity in pressure.
2) The flow entering a junction must be equal to the flow leaving the same junction, the
law of continuity not be satisfied.
7.2.2 Input data
In the Hydraulic Network Design one of the important criteria is the head loss allowed in
the distribution system. This is also an important constraint required in the optimization of
pipe sizes required in the linear programming model. The use of smaller diameter pipes
results in higher head losses, which calls for higher staging heights of OHSR to ensure
desired residual pressure at the farthest delivery point. On the other hand, use of higher
diameter pipes results in lower head losses but increases the cost of the pipeline. Hence the
pipe sizes selected shall be optimized using the maximum and minimum and minimum head

96
loss that can be permitted. Usually a minimum head loss of 0.1-0.5 m/km and maximum
head loss 5-10 m/km are adopted in a rural water supply system.
The minimum head loss a calculated as the drop in elevation from the LWL or the OHSR to
the lowest point in the village divided by the distance from the OHSR to the lowest
elevation point along the network. The maximum head loss is calculated as the drop in
elevation from the MWL of OHSR to the highest point in the village divided by the distance
from the OHSR to the highest elevation point along the network.
Next important input to the analysis is the Hazen- Williamss coefficient C for design
purpose is to be given as input based on the type of pipe material used in the network. The
design value of C for GI pipes is 100 and the design value of C for PVC pipes is 145.
The diameter in a rural water supply distribution system vary from a minimum of 75 mm to
a maximum of 200mm, The distribution system will be designed for a peak factor of 8 to 9
at a minimum residual pressure of 12 meters.
Software programs are available for solving the dead end network and loop system for rural
water supply system. The output diameters may give at some points residual head of more
than 8 meters. This may be due to the low ground levels at that point. In such case, the
particular diameter of the branch is further reduced and another analysis is carried out to
verify the residual head. Sometimes the diameter of that particular branch may be a
minimum diameter which cannot be further reduced. In such case the diameter of pipe in the
main line just prior to the branch or the diameter of the pipe at the starting point of the
OHSR is to be reduced and another analysis carried out. This kind of trial and error
procedure is carried out till residual head at all the points of the network is more or less near
to 12 meters. However if residual head at some points is more than 10 meters, and can not
be reduced, a throttling valve is to be used at the off-take of the branch.
7.3 Types of valves & their location
Sluice valves :- The size of SV is same as the size of the main upto 300 mm and for
bigger diameters the size of valves is about 2/3 the size of mains subject to a min of 300
mm.
Sluice valves are not used for continuous throttling as there wise erosion of the
scales & body cavitations will occur. It is recommended the change the frequently when the
working is affected.
Scour valves :- In pressure conduits, small gated take-offs known as blow-off or scour
valves are provided at the low points in the line such that each section of the line between

97
valves can be emptied and drained completely. They discharge into natural drainage
channels or empty into a sump from which the water can be pumped to waste. There should
be no direct connection to sewers or polluted water courses but through a specially designed
trapped chamber or pit. Their sizes depend upon local circumstances especially upon the
time in which a given section of line is designed to be emptied and upon the resulting
velocities of flow. Calculations are based upon orifice discharge under a failing head equal
to the differences in an elevation of the water surface in the conduit and the blow-off less the
friction head. Frequency of operation depends upon the quality of the water carried
especially on silt loads. In the distribution system scour valves are inserted in the scour
branch from the main at low points and at all dead ends. The size of the scour valve depends
upon the length of the main to be scoured. It is, however, about half the size of the main
which is to be scoured. The scour branch takes off from the main through a scour tee which
is a special tee with its branch connection having its invert at the same level as the main with
a view to drain out the bottom sediments.
Reflux valves :- Reflux valves are valves through which flow can proceed in one direction
only. Any tendency for the flow to reserve causes a reflux valve to close and to remain
closed until flow is re-established, in the unique direction. It should close without causing
shock. They are also called non return valves, check valves and retaining valves. In one
application, a reflux valve can be described as a foot valve. The term check valve is
generally restricted to small size mains and which are of the disc type. Check valve can be
had for the vertical as well as horizontal flow conditions. They are used in the house
plumbing system as well as in industrial installation. It has the advantage of rapid closure
but has simultaneously the disadvantage of causing water hammer associated with rapid
closure and causing high resistance to flow. Single door type reflux valves should conform
to IS : 5312 (Part 1)-1984.
Pressure Reducing Valves :
Presure reducing valves shall be provided at the entry point of distribution system to the
low lying areas to control excessive flow of water to the low lying areas
Air valves :- These are sited to release the air automatically when a pipe line is being
filled and also to permit air to enter the pipe line when it is being emptied.
In an intermittent system the distribution pipes are becoming empty when the supply is
stopped and draw in air and expel air when the water supply is resumed. Since the house
service connections/ public taps are above the ground level air is expelled or drawn in

98
through the open taps since these taps are usually kept open in an intermittent system even
after the supply hours are over. However, to cater for situations wherein air has to be
expelled or drawn in, Air Valves are sometimes provided at the highest point in the network.
The highest point is normally at the OHSR premises where an air valve is essentially
required. Air valves may have to be provided in the network, if the network pipes are having
several valleys and ridges. In such case the smallest diameter air valve available are
provided at the peaks. However, for these air valves to function effectively they have to be
mounted above the road level and hence the pipe connecting the main pipeline to the valve
is taken away upto the road boundary and housed in a secured chamber. In view of the
complicated arrangement required for air valves ina rural water distribution system, it is
recommended that instead of providing Air Valves. This will take care of the expulsion of
air from the distribution system. While designing the distribution network, the stand post at
the highest level shall be marked distinctly for using as Air Valve .
7.3.1 Location of the Air Valves
Air Valves are provided at all peaks. Peaks are not judged solely w.r.t. to horizontal datum
but also with respect to the maximum hydraulic gradient. Air valves are necessary at all
points where the pipe line approaching the hydraulic gradient changes its slope to recede
from this gradient .

7.4 House Service Connections

The supply from the main pipeline to the individual houses is made through a house
service connection. For a house service connection, ferrule is used on the main line either to
control the flow or for permanent disconnection. The ferrule is sufficiently throttled to
deliver required flow at the contemplated pressure. The size of the ferrule shall be 1/8inch
and also be less than the diameter of the connecting pipe. In case of main pipe being GI,
gunmetal or bronze ferrules are screwed onto GI pipe. If the main pipe is of PVC, special
screwed saddles are fixed onto the pipe. In addition, a stop cock will be provided in the
beginning of house connection pipe to control the supply or to facilitate temporary
disconnection.
Sometimes the connecting pipe to the consumer house may pass through a drain then there
is a possibility of the contamination with drain water through any leakage in the consumer
pipe. If the consumer pipe is with GI, it may corrode over a period of time and allow the
wastewater into the main pipeline. Further the PVC consumer pipes also may be damaged

99
when exposed in the drain portion, which may cause similar contamination. Hence it is
recommended that the casing pipe be provided around the consumer pipe when drain is to be
crossed.
7.5 Distribution of Water:
Water shall be transferred to OHSR by installing bulk meters conforming to
IS:2373-1981 (third revision) at inlet point in a village . Individual house
connections shall be given through ferrules confirming to IS:2692-1978 and
domestic water meters$ conforming to IS:779-1978 (fifth revision) shall be
installed at consumer end.. Refer detailed specification for Domestic water
meters at Annexure D and for Bulk Meters at Annexure E. House Service
meter connection has been depicted in figure no13

7.6 Design Approach for Water Supply Schemes in Severe Power Shortage areas :

It has been observed that in some Rural areas there is severe shortage of
power and it results in lower pumping hours and thus availability and reliability of
water supply to the community falls below the design level . At the time of designing
such schemes separate design approach shall be adopted so that water supply to the
community does not get affected . Following critical parameters shall be modified as
per below

Sno Design Parameter Value for Severly Electricity

shortage area
1 Pumping Hours T

2 Design safe yield for Tube well Daily demand x T e.g for T= 3
hours it is 3 times the daily demand
3 Pump discharge Average hourly discharge x24/ T
4 OHSR capacity To be designed by using mass curve
5 Peak factor for distribution network 24/T
6 DG set May be provided if supply is highly
erratic
.

100
 CHAPTER-8
WATER TREATMENT

The chapter provides various methods of water treatment applicable for rural water supply
system. In some parts of Punjab the ground water which is the main source of water supply
to the villages is having quality problems. Most of the water is having excessive
concentrations of fluorides, TDS, hardness, nitrates and iron. Further there are instances of
bacterial contaminations. Where the water quantity & quality problems are severe ground
water cannot be relied upon and hence surface water with minimum treatment may be the
only option. Normally rural water supply systems provide for plain sedimentation followed
by slow sand filtration and disinfections with bleaching powder.
8.1 Water Treatment Processes applicable in rural water supply system are shown below.
Activity Treatment process for Canal water based Water Treatment process for Tube
number Supply Schemes well based Water schemes
1 Intake of raw water through Intake structure and Pumping of water from Tube
carried to water through Inlet Channel well
2 Storage in Sedimentation tank and addition of Chlorination
Alum for flock formation to facilitate
sedimentation.
3 Gravity flow to under ground to Suction and Storage in OHSR
scour well
4 Pumping to High level tank Distribution
5 Gravity flow to Slow sand filter beds
6 Gravity flow to Clear water Tank
7 Pumping to Over head service Reservoir after
chlorination /Ionization
8 Distribution from OHSR

1.Ground 2.Pump 3.Disinfection 4.Storage 5. Distrribution

water

Treatment process -A

101
a) Normally ground water available in Punjab does not require any extensive treatment
and can be supplied with disinfections alone and hence option (a) shown in the above sketch
is applicable. Fluorides, TDS and Iron from ground water cannot be removed easily as
treatment plants for their removal require skilled operational personnel and constant attention
apart from very high Capital cost and O&M cost. Such treatment plants provided elsewhere
for removal of fluorides have become non-functional . The presence of nitrate, in water is
due to agricultural pollution and fecal pollution. There is no economical treatment method
available for removal of nitrates in domestic water supply. Hence it is suggested that the
point of contamination of the source with nitrates shall be identified and remedial measures
taken to prevent contamination rather than providing treatment process for removal of
nitrates.

Canal

Inlet Channel

Storage and sedimentation Tank and Flocculation

Under Ground Suction and succour well

Pump to High level Tank

Gravity flow to Slow and sand filter

Gravity Flow to Clear water Tank

Pump to OHSR

Distribution

Treatment option B

102
. Surface water in Punjab is taken from the flowing streams and canals may be treated and
supplied to the problem villages. Depending upon the turbidity of the surface water, line
diagram (b) is adopted. Whenever, the turbidity is more than 50 NTU it may not be
amendable for plain sedimentation which may require chemical coagulation. Chemically
settled water is not treatable in slow sand filters and hence when chemical coagulation is
suggested rapid sand filters may be required. In view of the high capital cost and O&M cost
and lack of skilled personnel for O & M, the rapid sand filters with chemical coagulation is
not recommended for rural water supply systems and is not dealt in this manual.
8.2 Intake structures for surface water:
When surface water is decide to be the technology option, it calls for specific
structures for the drawl and transmission. The normal units are intake well, collection sump
and pumping arrangements (jack well), raw water rising main. In addition to the above, the
setting tanks, slow sand filters, clear water sump are the other structures required.
8.2.1 Intake works:
These are the structures placed in a surface water source to permit the withdrawal of
water from the source. These are essentially used in rivers etc., where wide fluctuations in
water level are expected. Also these works help in drawing water from the most desirable
depth.
Location and Design Considerations:
1. It shall be located such that the raw water can be withdrawn continuously over the
year.
2. It shall be nearer to the raw water sump.
3. The location shall be free from the water currents and swirls.
4. The entrance of large objects shall be prevented by screens.
5. The capacity of the conduit and depth of suction well should be such that the
intake ports to the suction pipes do not draw air. A velocity of 60-90 cm/sec. will
give satisfactory performance.
6. The intake conduit shall be laid in a continuous rising or falling grade to avoid
accumulation of gas or air
Normally intake structure is made of :
1. Pipe Outlet for discharge up to 0.5 Cusec
2. APM out let for discharge more than 0.5 cusec but less than 5 cusec and
where large variation in canal water level are expected

103
 3. Open Flume Outlet discharge more than 0.5 cusec but less than 5 cusec and
where large variation in canal water level are not expected .
4. Siphon Out let where canal is of perennial source and it is running in
excavation

8.2.2 Inlet channel:

Raw water is carried to the sedimentation and Storage tank from the surface water
source through inlet channel. It is so designed as to fill the storage and sedimentation tanks
completing within seven days which is assumed to running days of the canal distributing Its
normal capacity is taken as three times the daily requirements.
8.3 Storage and Sedimentation of surface water: S&S tanks serve dual purpose of storage
and sedimentation
In sedimentation the water is allowed to settle in sedimentation cum storage tank for
a minimum detention period of 3-4 hours so that the heavier suspended particles settle down
and the turbidity of water reduces to 10NTU and below. Normally sedimentation tanks are
rectangular in nature with length to with ratio 3:1 to 5:1 and the depth of the water will be
between 2.5 to 5.0m these tanks will be provided with sloped bottom for easy removal of
settled solids. Proper inlets and outlets must be provided for uniform distribution of the flow
and collection of settled water. Usually baffles are provided at the inlet and outlet of the
settling tanks. Storage capacity is kept as 15 days requirement where raw water is taken from
canal via distributory, minor etc. and 3 days requirement where connection is taken from
main canal. Evaporation and percolation losses are assumed as 25%.
8.3.1 Suction and scour wells: Scour and suction well s should be located in such a
way that number of bends is reduced to minimum. For rural population above 15000 persons
these should be of 2.50m diameter and for population less than 15000 persons their diameters
may be reduced to 1.5mtr.
8.3.2 Pumping Units: For Rural water supply schemes a population less than 15000
persons the pumping units of raw water and clear water shall be designed for 8 hours daily
working. If the population exceeds 15000 person the working house may be increased to 16.
In any case a pumping set of equal capacity both far raw water and clear water may be
provided as stand by. It should be so arranged that one of raw water and one of clear water
pump should also be capable of being run by a source alternate to electricity.

104
8.3.3 High level tank: Capacity of high level tank shall be determined by using mass curve
based on actual supply hours and rate of filtration . .
8.4 Filters: The rate of filtration in slow sand filters should be assumed as 50
gallons per 8ft (2500 liters per sqm.) per day while fixing the dimensions of filters,
economical, sizes should be worked out as per example given below. About 25% additional
filters should be provided as stand bye i.e. for every four filter beds calculated one extra
should be provided. This practice should be followed for all urban water supply scheme. The
case of water supply scheme for small villages, the stand by provision should be added in the
filtering area and two filter beds for equal capacity should be provided.
Example: Assuming that for every 4 beds, an additional spare bed is provided and the
total area to be provided is 2400 sq.m. then area of the filter bed = 600sqm.
If L is the length of each bed the Breadth, b = 600/L
Therefore total perimeter of walls P= 10x600+6L
L
for minimum total perimeter= dp/dl=0
i.e. 6000 = 6 or L2 = 1000
L2 L = 31.6 meter say 32 meter
b = 600/32 = 19 meter

so the dimensions of each bed will be 32m x 19m.

8.4.1 Filtering media: The size and depth of filtering media to be provided should be
as under:
The filter should consist of 30 to 36 (750 mm to 900mm) sand, supported on 9 to
12 (225mm to 300mm) gravel. The gravel shall be under laid by a system of open jointed
under drainage. The sand shall have an effective size 0 to 3 mm and uniformity coefficient
=2.00
The gravel is usually placed in four layers for a depth of 12 (300mm) graded from
No.10 mesh to 2 (6.3 mm to 63mm)
The grading should be such that the voids in any layer are less in size fire particles of gravel
in the larger immediately above the supporting layer.
8.4.1 : Pressure Filters :

105
A single village canal based water supply scheme shall be designed by using pressure filters
to reduce cost as slow sand filters are economical for multi village schemes . However due
care must be taken to train the community for operation and maintenance of pressure filters.

A pressure sand filter shall have following salient features :

It shall have single valve operation to eliminate leakage from individual valves .
Give visual indication as to the present operation of the filter.
It shall have Multi port valve with quick connect threaded barrel unions .
It shall have Hydraulically balanced laterals to maximize water flow and automatic
air bleed .
Tank of the pressure sand filter shall be made of Fibre Glass .
8.5 Clear water Reservoir : As in case of high level tanks the storage capacity of
clear water tank shall be worked out on the basis of the filtration and pumping schedule.
Since the save water and clear water shall be pumped out according to the same pumping
schedule the capacity of clear water reservoir shall be equal to the capacity of high level tank
determined by using mass curve method
For small installations such as small rural water supply schemes, the high level tank,
filter beds and clear water tanks should be provided of circular section.
8.5.1 Over Head service Reservoir (OHSR) The capacity of over head service
reservoir, in the case of canal based water supply scheme shall also be fixed considering the
pumping schedule and draft pattern as in the case of Tubewell based schemes.
8.5.2 Disinfections: Chlorination with Chlorine gas using a vacuum chlorinator is a
very effective disinfections process for water treatment. However, the availability of gaseous
chlorine and maintenance of the chlorinator are the constraints to adopt this type of
chlorination practice of the rural water supply system. Hence, addition of bleaching powder
is usually practiced for disinfections of rural water supplies. Availability of good quality
bleaching powder with the required amount of available chlorinie and prompt addition of
bleaching powder in adequate quantity and at required interval is also essential. In order to
achieve maximum destruction of bacteria a minimum contact period of 30 minutes between
the bleaching powder solution and the water is required. If the bleaching powder is added in
the OHSR the addition has to be done before stopping of pumps since the turbulence due to
pumping will enable mixing of bleaching powder solution and the incoming water. However,

106
the distribution system outlet must be opened only after a minimum period of 30 minutes
after stoppage of pumping.
Normally the bleaching powder contains 30 to 35 % of chlorine when it is fresh. Since
bleaching powder losses its chlorine content with time, it is desirable to assume that
bleaching powder contains 25% of chlorine while determining dosage of bleaching powder.
Hence, in order to give a chlorine dosage of 1mg/ltr,: Bleaching powder of 4mg Per liter is
to be dosed. After addition of the bleaching powder the residual chlorine in the OHSR water
has to be about 1mg for liter to ensure minimum residual chlorine of 0.2 0.3 mg/ltr at the
consumption point. Any abnormal changes in the residual chlorine level or absence of
residual chlorine will indicate the contamination of water. A chloroscope shall be used to
check the residual chlorine content. Chloroscope consists of a colour comparator kit.
Orthotoladine solution is used to check the residual chlorine content. Chloroscope consists of
a colour comparator kit. Orthotoladine solution is used as reagent in finding residual
chlorine. A sample of water is taken in a test tube and a few drops of the reagent is added to
the water and shaken. If residual chlorine is present, the water in the test tube will turn to
yellow. The concentration of residual chlorine is indicated by the intensity of the yellow
colour i.e. the deeper the yellow; higher will be concentration of residual chlorine. The
comparator kit provides accurate comparison of colours and hence assess quantity of residual
chlorine. Chlorination shall be done by using metering Pumps based on Teflon diaphragms to
ensure accurate dosage and long life . The storage tank shall be FRP lined and body of the
pump shall Glass reinforced plastic to avoid corrosion. Ceramic balls shall be used as valves
and no MS ball shall be used . Silver Ionization process may also be used for disinfection of
drinking water supply. Detailed comparative study is enclosed at Annexure -F
8.6 Priority levels for Technical Options for water quality: The priority level for
treatment of various constituents like fluorides, nitrates, total dissolve solids, iron and
coliform bacteria shall be as below:

107
Sr.No. Parameter Available options Available Options
Accepted/ Recommended Options in order
of priority
1 Fluoride a. Alternate local/ distant ground water a. Where isolated small number of
source (with appropriate ground habitations are affected
water recharge arrangements) b. Where large number of contiguous
b. Local recharge arrangements. villages are affected.
c. Blending with non-fluoride water c. Where fluoride concentration is
wherever feasible. marginally higher (1.5-2mg/1) and
d. Dual supply with different service fluoride free water is available.
level (drinking, cooking and other d. Where community is aware and able to
purposes) distinguish the difference (on pilot
e. Household defluoridation units basis)
f. (i) Nalgonda Technique (using e. Can be tried on an experimental basis.
Alum). f. Can be tried on an experimental basis.
(ii) Ion Exchange Process (using
Activated Alumina)
2. Nitrate a. In areas affected with NItrate, a. In areas affected with Nitrate, open
open well sources shall be well sources shall be avoided.
avoided b. Alternatively bore well with a
b. Alternatively, bore well with minimum of 10 meters casing is
atleast 10 meters casing is recommended. Flushing is to be done
recommended. Flushing is to be first.
done first, before commissioning
the supply
3. TDS a. Alternate distant source/ ground a. Alternate distant source/ ground water
water b. Alternate local/distant surface source.
b. Alternate local/ distant surface source c. Blending, if possible.
c. Blending, if possible.
4. Iron a. Treatment for iron removal. a. Creating awareness to avoid long
b. Regular use of bore wells to avoid idling of bore wells.
accumulation of corrosion products b. Store water longer and strain through
from iron pipes. cloth.
c. Change the GI pipe to PVC pie casing.
d. Use PVC pipe for new bore holes.
5. Bacteria a. Disinfections a. Continuous chlorination of water
(Coliforms) supply to maintain a minimum
residual concentration of 0.2mg/lt.

108
 CHAPTER 9

ASSESSMENT OF EXISTING SYSTEM

In Punjab most of the villages are provided with water supply in one form or the
other. The technology options for these schemes varies from simple hand pump, mini water
supply scheme, piped water supply schemes with ground water source and a few piped water
supply schemes with surface water source. These schemes have been executed by the WSSD
Punjab and have been handed over to the respective GPs and O&M. Due to constrains of
funds the GPs are not able to pay even the electricity bills and are unable to maintain the
schemes optimally. In some instances lack of skilled labour is also contributing to this
situation. Hence most of the rural water supply systems are not functional or working below
their designed capacity. Failure of sources, water quality problems, leaking pipelines &
ESR, inefficient motors coupled with lack of management support are some of the common
problems. The community is not paying the user charges towards the water consumed by
them and the GP has no independent source of income. In view of this, there is a need to
assess the status of the existing water supply system and to estimate the rehabilitation needs
so that the systems will become fully functional.
Rehabilitation works have to be identified so as to facilitate integration of the
proposed water supply schemes with the existing water supply system. Rehabilitation works
can be divided into immediate needs and long term needs. In the immediate needs, there is no
major investment but small additions and proper management may certainly revive the
schemes. Some of the works that could be included shall be
a) Provision of required type of Valves at appropriate places.
b) Rectification of leakages in pumps, pipelines and reservoirs.
c) Immediate repairs to pumps and motors.
d) Effective supervision.

e) Establishing independent feeder main lines and disconnection of service

connections on main lines to ensure equitable water distribution.

In the long term needs, additional investments are made so as to upgrade the existing
system to the desired level. Some of the works that could be included shall be

109
a) Selection of additional sources where quality/ quantity of water available in the
existing system is inadequate.
b) Modifications to existing pipelines/ pumps or provisions of new pipelines/ pumps
in case existing pipelines and pumps are inadequate.
c) Strengthening/ restoration of existing storage tanks or provision of new higher
capacity tanks/ additional tanks to cater for additional storage capacity to meet the
designed demand.
d) Additions and extensions of the existing distribution system or provisions of new
distribution system where there is no pipeline network/ existing pipeline network
is inadequate and pipe are crusted due to hard water.
e) Scope & extent of ground water recharging measures required for ensuring the
sustainability of the existing and proposed sources.

110
 CHAPTER 10

SMALL BORE SIZED SEWERAGE SYSTEM

10.1 Present scenario of wastewater disposal :

The wastewater generated from various household activities in villages overflows into
open surface drains and is ultimately disposed into ponds, thus making them highly polluted
cesspools. Cow Dung also contributes to high BOD in these ponds. Seepage from pit latrines
may also affect the underground water. This is leading to a serious health risk where villagers
are drinking water from hand pumps located near soak pits or ponds, besides frequent
occurrence of water borne epidemics like cholera, hepatitis, malaria, diarrhea etc.

The World Bank has estimated that water-and excreta related diseases in 1979 were
responsible for loss of around 400 billion working days in Africa, Asia & Latin America
which amounted to US$ 200 billion. Hence investments in improved water supplies and
improved sanitation can bring benefits not only to individuals, but also to National
economics. Governments need, therefore, to invest in their water supply and sanitation
sector. If they do not, their economies will not develop as productively as possible, and
people will continue, in the words of the Barbara Ward- to defecate themselves to death.
Keeping the above facts in view, International agencies in the field carried out
extensive R & D for developing low cost water supply & sanitation technologies during the
International drinking water supply and sanitation decade (1981-1990) and now safe water
2000.
Realizing the consequences of excreta related disease transmission in rural areas, Pb.
Govt. on its own in 2001 took initiatives in developing and demonstrating workable and low
cost sewerage system and sewage treatment technologies. In the last 4 to 5 years, small bore
sewerage system alongwith cost effective sewage treatment technologies has been
demonstrated in 3 villages of Punjab. Govt. of Punjab has now taken a decision to implement
this technology in around 1500 villages in next 5 years.
10.2 What is small bore sewerage system :
Small bore size sewerage system is a cost effective sustainable technology which is
designed to receive only the liquid portion of house hold waste water and troublesome solids
are retained in intercepting chamber installed up stream of every house connection to sewer.
111
As such, the sewer requires less velocity for flow of waste water and reduced flow
requirements (less than 50% of conventional system).
In the small bore size sewerage system, HDPE/ PVC pipes of size 90mm, 110mm,
125mm, 160mm and 180mm o/d are laid at depths varying from 0.6 meters to 1.8 meters. As
per literature , even 75 mm o/d pipes can also be used . To prevent choking of sewerage
system, inspection chambers are provided in each individual house to retain the solids and
partially decompose the organic matter. Even the animal excreta are also contained into
inspection chamber after preliminary treatment. Thus, there would be no overflow of waste
waters onto streets. A novel syphonic system is incorporated for automatic flushing of sewer
at regular intervals. In this system, the conventional man holes have been omitted which are
normally never operated and are rather a source of dumping of garbage. Intercepting
chambers are required to be cleaned once in 3-5 years using trolley mounted vacuum pumps.
Instead cleanouts are provided for flushing and cleaning of sewerage, if needed, in case of
unforeseen choking of sewerage. These cleanouts are again buried below ground level to
avoid tampering. These features along-with the relative imperviousness of HDPE / PVC
pipes totally foreclose any possibility of infiltration of ground water or ex-filtration of
sewage contaminating the surrounding strata. Benefits of the technology have been reported
as:
The open drains have been eliminated and the streets are absolutely dry and clean.
No embarrassment to ladies and children due to open defecation.
Distinct hygienic quality of life visible even in weaker section.
People have become aware about the benefits of safe wastewater disposal.
Minimum Operation & Maintenance cost.
10.3 TREATMENT TOCHNOLOGIES :
The waste waters are ultimately collected at the last point and pumped for subsequent
treatment through various low-cost technologies which do not require any mechanical parts
and minimal power. Various technologies for treatment of sewage / waste water are enlisted
as:
i) Stabilization Ponds.
ii) Duckweed Ponds.
iii) Treatment by Forestry/ Tree Plantation (Karnal Technology).
iv) Root Zone Technology/ Artificial Wetlands
v) Aerated Lagoons
112
10.3.1 Stabilization Ponds:

Stabilization ponds are open flow through basins, specifically designed and
constructed to treat sewage and wastewater. These provide long detention periods extending
from a few to several days in which, organic matter in the waste is stabilized through a
symbiotic relationship between bacteria and algae. The facultative ponds are best suited and
most commonly used for treatment of sewage. In these ponds, at the surface, aerobic
conditions prevail while there are anaerobic conditions at the bottom. Sewage organics are
stabilized by both aerobic and anaerobic reactions. For further treatment of microbial
pollution, maturation ponds as per characteristics of the sewage & required level of treatment
are also provided, which are similar to facultative ponds.
Stabilization pond is comparatively simple and easy to construct. It does not require
skilled operation and is easy to maintain. It gives consistently good and high level of
performance in terms of pathogens removal and reliability, which is not attained by other
process. Thus these are most suitable for treatment of sewage for the rural areas as it requires
practically no maintenance and involves no moving parts. Moreover these are universally
accepted and have stood the test of time.
10.3.2 Duckweed Pond Technology.:
Duckweed pond is an earthen pond or a lined pond where duckweed plants are
grown. These duckweeds cover the entire water surface and eliminate growth of algae and
also suppress the odours and eliminate mosquito breeding. In these ponds, both anaerobic
reactions and activity of duckweed growth are responsible for treatment of sewage and
wastewater. Duckweed is still at development stage and is situational specific and
recommended to be used depending upon the specific situation.
10.3.3 Treatment by Tree Plantation/ Forestry (KARNAL TECHNOLOGY):
In this method, nutrient potential of raw sewage and wastewater is utilized for
forestry. Suitable ridges and furrows are made on the land and tree species such as eucalyptus
and poplar etc, which can grow fast, transp-evaporate huge quantity of sewage and at the
same time are able to withstand high moisture content in the roots are planted on the ridges.
Each tree acts as a small bio-pump absorbing liquid through the surrounding soil and
releasing it to the environment through transpiration. Nutrients like NPK and micronutrients
are supplied to soil and plants, thus building soil fertility. The amount of sewage to be
113
applied depends upon type of plant, climatic conditions, soil texture and quality of effluent.
Sewage treatment by tree plantation is situational specific and recommended to be used
depending upon the specific situation.

10.3.4 Root Zone Technology/ Wet Land System (RZ):

This is basically a manmade wetland, where waste water is kept at or above the soil
surface for enough time during the year to maintain saturated conditions and appropriate
vegetation like reeds. Reeds have an oxygen transport system from the leaves to the roots that
permits the roots to survive in the anoxic conditions prevailing in a wetland. The oxygen
supplied to the hollow roots called rhizomes is available to the aerobic bacteria growing in
wastewater. Wastewater is pumped directly into the upper end of the reed bed surrounded by
impermeable walls. The reed bed may require considerable time, several months to grow and
develop root system to achieve full treatment efficiency. This is a natural process of
treatment of effluents, economical and efficient at places where wasteland is available. On
the basis of experiments in Europe, USA and India, it has been found that by adopting this
process pollution load can be reduced by 80 to 90%.
Like duck weed technology, root zone technology in India is still at development
stage and is situational specific and recommended to be used depending upon the specific
situation.
10.3.5 Aerated Lagoons (AL):
Aerated lagoons are simple earthen basins, which act as a settling cum aeration basins
in which artificial aeration replaces algal oxygenations. It has inlet pipe submerged in liquid
to avoid odour and short-circuiting. Outlet at the other end is sufficiently wide to enable the
wastewater to flow through while aeration is provided to stabilize the organic matter. Scum
baffle is also provided at outlet. These are normally of facultative type in which some solids
may leave with the effluent stream and some settle down in the lagoon since aeration power
input is just enough for oxygenation. Lower part of such lagoons is anaerobic, while the
upper layers are aerobic. It is adopted at places where land space is limited, sufficient power
is available and enlargement or re-location is possible in the near future.
Aerated lagoons are not natural processes and require artificial aeration, which
involves regular power supply, moving parts and strict supervision and attendance. As such,
these are considered only in cases where electric power supply is assured.

114
 10.4 Cost of the Small Bore sewerage system :
Per capita cost of sewerage system including sewage treatment works out to be Rs
2200/- to Rs 2400 per capita when LLDPE tanks are used as intercepting chamber and
HDPE pipe as sewer line . Cost of small bore sewer can be reduced using alternate material
for ICs e.g. ferro-cement or Bricks and replacing HDPE pipes with PVC pipes . For
pumping of untreated sewage from sump well or disposal of treated sewage , regular power
supply is required . In the absence of regular power supply , provision of DG set should be
made mandatory while preparing estimates .

115
 CHAPTER-11
RURAL SANITATION

This chapter provides for planning designing and construction of environmental sanitation
facilities in the villages to provide a healthy environment to the community. Provision of
adequate sanitation facilities in the form of safe disposal of sullage and human excreta from
the residential houses is one of the essential requirement of environmental sanitation. In
addition, proper collection and disposal of solid waste generated is of prime importance to
minimize environmental pollution. Traditionally in the rural areas, people are used to
defecation in open areas due to lack of household toilets.

11.1 Use of locally available material for household toilets and drains.

In order to economise the cost of construction of the household toilets and drains it is
necessary to prepare the plans and estimates using locally available material such as
bricks and stones for construction of toilets, stone slabs for lining for drains, etc, to
the maximum possible extent. Locally available artisans, masons, plumbers, unskilled
made materials such as CI pipes, PVC pipes, FRP/ceramie water closet to be
procured.

11.2 Twin Pit Pour Flush Latrine (TPPFL)

Twin pit pour flush toilets to the rural communities, since these toilets require less water and
also do not pollute the ground water table. Further these toilets are economical and easy to
construct and maintain.
TPPFL consists of a squatting pan, a trap with water seal, footrests, a connecting drain and
two leach pits. The principle is that small quantity of water is used for flushing the toilet so
that this water leaches easily into the sorrounding soil and leaving the solids alone for
digestion.

The squatting pan is of special design with steep bottom shape bottom slope 25-28o

116
with a trap having 20 mm water seal set on a cement concrete floor. The slope of the toilet
pan is such that pouring small quantity of water (about 1.5 to 2 litres of water per use) can
flush human excreta.

The squatting pan is connected to twin leach pits through a trap and a pipe or covered drain.
The flushed contents from the squatting pan flows and fills the connected leach pit. When
one pit is full, the excreta are directed to the second pit. The filled up pit can be conveniently
emptied after

1 to 2 years, when most of the pathogens die off. The sludge can be safely used as a
manure. Thus the two pits can be used alternately and continuously. A typical twin-pit pour
flush water seal latrine is shown in Fig. 10 a and 10 b.

Pour-flush water seal latrine is a very satisfactory and hygienic sanitation system and hence it
can be located yards since the water seal prevents odour and insect nuisance.

11.2.1 TPPFL pits in Water Logged, Flood Prone and High Sub-soil Water Areas and
Rocky strata.

Pits in Water Logged, Flood Prone and High Sub-soil Water Areas

In high sub-soil, water logged of flood prone areas, the pits should be raised above
the ground level to a height such that the invert of the incoming drains/pipes is just
before the likely flood water or sub-soil water level. Raising the pipes will necessitate
raising the latrine floor also.

In pits located in water logged or flood prone areas, earth should be filled and well
compacted all around the pits in 1000mm width and up to the top. It is not necessary
to raise the pits by more than 300 mm above the plinth of the house because if water
rises above the plinth, the residents will anyway vacate the house.

In high sub-soil water areas, about 300mm filling all around the pits may be done
depending on site conditions.

117
In these situations, the pits should be designed as wet pits, taking into consideration
the infiltration rate of the type of soil.

Pits in Rocky Strata

In rocky strata with soil layers in between, leach pits are designed on the same
principles as those for low sub soil water level taking the long term infiltration
capacity of the soil as 20 litres per sq.m per day. However, in rocks with fissures,
chalk formation, or old roots channels, pollution can flow over a long distance; hence
these conditions demand careful investigation and adoption of pollution safeguards.

In impervious rocky strata, since there will be no infiltration of liquid, the pits will
function as holding tanks. In such situations, a PF latrine with leaching pits is not a
suitable system.

Pits in Soils with Low Infiltration Capacity.

Leaching capacity tends to be limiting factor when the infiltrative capacity of soil is
low. In these circumstances, there are two options;. construct a larger pit, or increase
the critical leaching area. the former option is costly, while the latter can be
accomplished by backfilling and compacting with brick ballast, gravel, sand etc., in
the required width all around the pit, since the leaching area is the vertical surface of
the excavation of the pit rather than the external wall of the pit.

Pits in Black Cotton soil are designed on the basis of whether the pit is wet or dry,
taking the infiltration rate as 10 litres per sq. meter per day. However, a minimum 300
mm* vertical fill (envelope all around the pit) of sand, gravel or ballast of small sizes
should be provided all round the pit, outside the pit lining, to separate the soil and the
pit lining as well as well as to increase the infiltrative surface area.
Pits Where Space is a Constraint

Where circular pits of standard sizes cannot be constructed due to space constraint,
deeper pits with smaller diameter (not less than 750 mm), or combined oval, square or

118
rectangular pits divided into two equal compartments by a partition wall, may be
provided. In case of combined pits, the partition wall, as well as the adjoining side
wall up to 225 mm width, should not have any holes. The partition wall should be 225
mm deeper than the pit lining. Both faces of the partition wall should be plastered in
cement mortar 1:6.

What are the Pollution Safeguards :

Proper information and investigation of both geological/hydrogeological conditions

of sites where pits are to be located, and the location of drinking water sources, size,
all are pre-requisites in planning, designing and construction of on-site low cost
sanitation systems to ensure that pollution risk to ground water and water distribution
mains is minimal. Faulty construction and wrong data/information regarding
hydrogeological conditions may lead to pollution of drinking water sources.

To ensure that the risk of polluting ground water and drinking water sources is
minimal, the following safeguards should be taken while locating the pits :

a. Drinking water should be obtained from another source or from the same
aquifer
but at a point beyond the reach of any faecal pollution from the leach pits.
b. If the soil is fine (effective size 0.2mm or less), the pits can be located at a
minimum distance of 3m from the drinking water sources, provided the
maximum ground water level throughout the year is 2m or more below the
pit bottom (low water table). If the water table is higher, i.e. less that 2m
below the pit bottom, the safe distance should be increased to 10m.
c. If the soil is coarse (effective size more that 0.2mm), the same safe
distances as specified above can be maintained by providing a 500 mm
thick sand envelope, of fine sand of 0.2 mm effective size, all around the
pit, and sealing the bottom of the pit with an impervious material such as
puddle clay, a plastic sheet, lean cement concrete, or cement stabilized
soil.

119
 d. If the pits are located under a footpath or a road, or if a water supply main
is within a distance of 3m from the pits, the invert level of the pipes or
drains connecting the leach pits should be kept below the level of the pipes
or drains connecting the leach pits should be kept below the level of the
water main, or 1m below the ground level. If this is not possible due to site
considerations, the joints of the water main should be encased in concrete.

11.2.2 Operation and maintenance of TPPF Latrine

How to operate and maintain a TPPF Latrine ?

Operation and maintenance of TPPF latrine is very simple but it is necessary

to educate the users regarding its proper use and maintenance.
Diversion of Flow from One Pit to Another

Only one of the two pits is to be used at a time. It is very important to

completely seal the entry to the pit which is not in use. This is done by
blocking one of the branches of the drain or in the case of the pipe, by
blocking the mouth of one pipe at the junction chamber. When water does not
flow out of the pan, either there is chockage or the pit in use is full. If by
rodding, the chokage is not removed, then the pit in use is full and the flow
needs to be diverted to the second pit. For this, remove the cover of the drain
or junction chamber and take out the blockage to allow the flow to the pit not
in use and block the flow to the pit which is full. Cover the drain or the
junction chamber properly so that foul smell is not emitted.

Removal And Disposal of Pit Sludge

When the filled pit is allowed to rest for a minimum of one and a half years,
the pit contents are completely digested and free of foul smell. The pit can
then be safely emptied manually, without being hazardous to health, by the
householder himself or through the local authority or a private agency.

120
 However, in the case of combined pits and pits located in water logged and
high sub-soil water areas, de-sludging of pits should be done carefully because
the sludge might not be completely safe and dry to handle due to travel of
pathogents from the pit in use to the pit to be desludged. After the pit is
emptied, the pit cover should be placed in position and the joint made air tight.
The humus collected has rich manure value and is a good soil conditioner. The
humus from dry pits can be used be directly either in the kitchen garden or the
fields, but from wet pits it can be used only when it is sun dried.

Dos and Donots

The following Dos and Donts should be explained to the users :

- Keep a bucket full of water outside the latrine.

- Keep a 2 litre can in the latrine filled with water for flushing.
- Before use, pour a little quantity of water to wet the pan so that excreta slide
smoothly into the pit.
- Flush the excreta after use.
- Pour a little quantity of water, say half a litre, in the squatting pan after
urination.
- The squatting pan should be cleaned.
- Use minimum quantity of water in washing the pan and latrine floor.
- Wash hands, using soap or ash, after defecation at the assigned place.
- If any construction defect is observed during the guarantee period, report the
matter to the local authority or the construction agency.
- When the pit in use is full, divert the flow to the second pit as discussed on
page 19
- If the trap gets choked, rodding should be done from the pan side as well as
from the rear side by means of a split bamboo stick, after removing the cover
of the drain or junction chamber.

121
- Care should be taken when desludging the pits located in water logged or high
sub soil water areas and in the case of combined pits, as the humus may not be
safe for handling.

DONTs

- Do not use both the pits at the same time.

- Do not use more than 2 litres of water for each flushing (if the waste is not
flushed with 2 litres, pour more water at the specific sports for flushing the
waste)
- Do not use caustic soda or acid for cleaning the pan.
- Do not throw sweepings, vegetable or fruit peelings, rags, cotton waste, and
cleaning materials like corn cobs, mud balls, stone pieces, leaves etc. in the
pan or the pits.
- Do not allow rain water, kitchen or bath waste water tro enter the leach pits
- Do not provide water tap in the latrine.
- Do not throw lighted cigarette butts in the pan
- Do not desludge the pit before one and a half years of its being out of use

Observations to be made during construction

During construction, one should check whether the following conditions have been
met :

- The depth of the pit below the invert level of connecting pipes or drain shall be as
given in relevant drawings.
- If the maximum ground water level throughout the year remains 2m or more below
the pit bottom, and if the soil at site is fine (effective size 0.2 mm or less), the pits
have been located maintaining a minimum distance of 3 m from the drinking water
sources. If the water table is higher, a minimum 10 m distance be kept to minimize
the chances of pollution.
- If the soil at the site is coarse (effective size more than 0.2mm), a 500 mm thick
envelope

122
 of fine sand of (0.2 mm effective size) has been provided all around the pit, its
bottom
sealed, it is located at a minimum distance of 3 m if ground water table is higher, a
minimum distance of 10 m has been kept to prevent pollution of drinking water
sources.
- The pit size conforms to be geological and hydrogeological conditions and the likely
number of users, and adequate leaching area has been provided, if necessary, by back
filling for proper infiltration of incoming liquid in to the pits. In cases where the
foundation is very close to the pits, holes have not been provided in the portion of
lining facing the foundation, and the leaching area has been increased suitably.
- The minimum distance between the two pits shall be equal to the effective depth
(depth of the pit below the invert of incoming pipe or drain ) of the pits.
- The pits shall not be located in a depression where water may stagnate over the pits
or in a drainage line which allows the flow of rain water over the pits.
- The bottom of the leach pit has been left in a natural condition except where it is
necessary to seal it to prevent pollution
- The RCC cover is as per designs.
- The top of the pit cover is about 50 mm above the natural ground level and the
earth fill is well compacted all around the cover sloping to avoid a step being
formed.
- The drain is U shaped, cross-sectionally and its inner surface is smooth.
- Drains with benching have been properly provided in the junction chamber to
divert the flow to one of the two pits.
- A minimum gradient of 1:15 has been provided in the connecting drains or
pipes.
The mouth of the drains or pipe is projecting nearly 75 mm past the pit lining
in the pits.
- The flow has been restricted to one pit by blocking the mouth of one of the
drains or pipes.
- The materials used are of the quality specified in the design, or relevant
standard specifications and the workmanship is good.
- The specifications laid down have been followed and the work has been
finished nearly.

123
- The floor surface is smooth and sloping slightly towards the pan.
- The foot-rests have been fixed at the proper place and at an angle, as in the
drawing
- 50 mm wide holes (honey combing) have been provided in the pit lining in
alternate layers up to the invert of the pipe or drain, and the lining above is in
solid brick work (no holes). If the soil is sandy, or if a sand envelope has been
provided, or there are chances of damage by field rats, the width of the holes
has been reduced to 12 to 15 mm. If the foundation of the building is close to
the pits, holes have not been provided in the portion of lining facing the
foundation. In cement concrete ring lining, rings below the invent of pipe or
drains should have 50 mm circular holes suggested about 200 mm apart.

- The covers over the pits, drains and junction chamber have been placed
properly.

- The pan and trap used are of a design specified for pour flush and these have
been fixed properly so as to provide a 20 mm waterseal, and that the joint is
water tight and the top of the pan is flush with the latrine floor.

- No Vent pipe has been provided.

- A well ventilated superstructure has been provided to enable use of the latrine.

- All surplus material have been removed and the site cleared and dressed.

- The users have been educated on the use and maintenance of PF latrines.

Materials :

The squatting pan can be of ceramic, glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP), high
density polyethylene (HDPE) or polyvinyl chloride(PVC) polypropylene (PP),
cement mosaic or even concrete superstructure. However, the ceramic pans are
favored in this project due to the better non-sticking & non-staining properties.

124
A minimum latrine size of 750 x 900 mm is recommended. The superstructure of
latrine cubical could be brick or stone in mud or in cement mortar.

11.3 Institutional and group toilets

Where individuals do not have adequate space a group of TPPFL toilets can
be constructed in a common area owned by individuals and used exclusively by the
owners duly providing locking arrangement. In institutions such as schools, primary
health centers etc., similar group of TPPFL toilets can be provided. A typical sketch
of an institutional latrine is given in Fig 11..

11.4 Soak pit

Soak pits are used dispose the effluents of the drain into ground where cannot
discharge the effluents in a natural stream. These are ideally suitable for the regions
where the terrain is flat and no nallah is available near the village. Normally, soak pits
are provided next to stand posts, hand pumps and washing platforms so that
wastewater does not get accumulated in the vicinity.
In general, the disposal of effluent may be either underground or over ground.
Normally, underground disposal either in the form of soak pits or dispersion trenches
is practiced. Satisfactory disposal depends on porosity and percolation characteristics
of the soil.

When black cotton soil is encountered, we have to conduct percolation field test on
the soil near the proposed disposal site. Normally permeability value for the black
cotton soil will be very less. This Value has to be taken for designing the disposal
system. Most of the time it is desirable to adopt a battery of dispersion trenches
depending on the rate of percolation obtained from the field test and providing larger
length of dispersion trenches.

The procedure to be followed to arrive at the size of the soak pit depending upon the
soil conditions for a known effluent quantity is as follows:

125
The important parameter to be determined is the rate of percolation of filter media.
For this, the following procedure shall be adopted. This is most important in clayey
soils, which are relatively impervious.

Drill a hole of dia 300 mm to the required depth of soak pit / dispersion trench at the
site chosen for constructing the soak pit. Remove all loose materials from the hole
and fill up coarse sand or fine gravel to 50 mm depth to prevent scouring of the
bottom. Fill up water to a depth of 300 mm in the hole and allow 24 hour duration
soil to get saturated with water by pouring water on subsequent days till some water
remains in the tested hole after the overnight swelling period. Now top up the water to
get a depth of 150 mm of water over the sand in the hole. Now the hole is ready for
carrying the test.

From a fixed reference point, measure the drop in water at 30 mm intervals for 4 hrs.
If necessary, water can be refilled to 150 mm depth over the gravel. The drop in water
level that occurs during the final 30 mm period shall be used to calculate the
percolation rate.

Note : In case of sandy soils, water seeps away in less than 30 minutes. Hence, the
time interval between measurement may be taken as 10 minutes and the test
run for 1 hr. The drop that occurs during the final 10 minutes shall be used to
calculate the percolation rate.

Calculation of Percolation Rate:

Based on the final drop during the period of 30 minutes (for sandy soils, 10 minutes)
the time in minutes required for water to fall by 25 mm shall be calculated which is
the percolation rate. A typical percolation chart is illustrated in Fit 34.

For example, we observe that during the 30 minutes period, drop in water level is
found to be 100mm.

126
The percolation rate =

25 x 30 = 25 x 0.3 = 7.5 minutes

100

From the chart-27, for the percolation rate of 7.5 minutes, the maximum rate of
effluent application =751/sq.m/day

Assuming total quantity of effluent = 750 litres/day

Surface area of soak pit required = 750/1 = 10 Sq.m
75
Hence a soak pit or dispersion trench of surface area 10 sq.m shall be provided.

11.5 Pucca drains

These are drains lined with brickwork and concrete.Even though lining is
costly, they are functional and easy to maintain. Preferably local available
material is be used. Type of drain are Punjab standard drains of type I, II, III
& IV according to the discharge and depth.

Layout of drains :

Surveying and Data Collection

Drains have to be provided in the lanes and then off to the disposal point.
Hence survey of the internal lanes in a village is the first step to decide the
layout of the drains. During the survey the available width and the length of
each lane and the gradient are also noted. The drains provided under the
project will closely follow the network of lanes. In the absence of sufficient
space for drains on either side of the lane, the paved surface itself has to be
designed to act as a drain for storm water. The center of the lane will act as
drain portion. This prevents water entering the sills of the houses.

127
The layout of drains has to be suitable to dispose the sullage/storm water in to
natural drainage course. Generally, slope of terrain has to be followed and
adopted so that the drains to be provided will have uniform depth. Also, it has
to be ensured that there is no stagnation of water, which may result in a
breeding of mosquitoes causing health hazard. Hence where there is no natural
slope of terrain minimum slope of 1 in 240 may be provided for 200 mm wide
drain and 1 in 375 for a drain of 250 mm wide. Whereever possible the drains
may be lead to rainwater harvesting structures so that general ground water
table is recharged and increase the sustainable yield of wells in the vicinity.

128
 CHAPTER-12
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF WATER SUPPLY SCHEMES

The infrastructure created in any scheme should satisfactorily last for the entire design
period of the project. To ensure this, the various components of the project need
maintenance during the project period for deriving maximum services out of them.
Without planning both technically and financially for the proper maintenance and
operation of the systems, these will not function correctly after commissioning and the
anticipated benefits will not be realised. In rural areas of developing countries, a key
to ensuring proper O & M is the participation of community from the conceptual
stages of project and their performances been taken fully and seriously into
consideration. : Therefore user should know the most likely cost of O & M. The
operation and Maintenance cost of a scheme depends on the capital cost, fixed cost
and variable cost.

The various maintenance works for a water supply scheme are listed as below:

1. Maintenance of the source.

2. Maintenance of pumps.
3. Maintenance of treatment units, if any.
4. Maintenance of pumping main.
5. Maintenance of OHSR/UGSR.
6. Maintenance of distribution system.
7. Maintenance of structures Lawns & Clean environment

12.1. Maintenance of source :

In most of the cases tube well forms the source of rural water supply scheme.
Waste materials should not be disposed near the source. This will prevent health
hazards due to water borne diseases.
The following point should be deserved :-

129
a) There should be periodic development of T/W after a period of 3 years. This
will rejuvenate the source. Otherwise the discharge of T/W may decrease with time.
b) There should be continuous monitoring of water level charges. Over a fixed
interval of time, which would indicate the health of the source.

12.2. Maintenance of pumps :- Maintenance of pumps is explained in Chapter-

6.and annexure -G

12.3. Maintenance of treatment units -

A layout plan of the entire plant indicating the flow pattern shall be maintained.

a) Maintenance of Slow Sand Filter :

For cleaning :-

i. Close the inlet valve.

ii. Allow water to deplete about 10 to 20 cm below the sand surface.
iii. Allow the drying of sand bed.
iv. Remove the top 1-2 cm of sand layer by manually. Manual operations is
preferred till labour is cheap.
v. After cleaning, level the sand surface.

For re-commissioning

i) The filter after cleaning allow water from under side so that dissolved gas or air
entrapped. When bed was exposed to escape and also to provide water cushion so that
when inlet valve is opened, sand bed is not isturbed.
ii) Opening inlet valve and ripening of filter is required. Dissolved oxygen (D.O) in
the treated water should not be less than 3 mg/lt. If D.O. is less than 3 mg/lt then re-

130
circulate the water treated through cascade aerator to increase the D.O. level in the
effluent.
iii) After several years of operation-by means of cleaning, sand depth may reach
minimum. Part of this removed sand has to be replaced back while resanding.
iv) For replacing the old sand when removed while cleaning, if decided to be used
again, it should be washed immediately after taking out from the filter otherwise sand
will become septic due to oxygen demand by micro organisms present in sand.
(Ripening of filter = to allow the growth of micro organisms for purification process,
time allowed to develop micro organism not less than 4 weeks.
(Range 2 8 weeks).

b) Maintenance of setting tanks:

In setting tanks, the basic maintenance is in the form of painting the surfaces
and removal of sludge
at the bottom. If any damp patches or leakages are noticed the same shall be
rectified immediately.

C. Operation and Maintenance of Disinfection systems :

C1) Differential pressure chlorinator :

The most frequently expected problem is development of holes in the rubber

bag. In such cases the rubber bag needs to be replaced, as a preventive maintenance, it
is preferable to change the rubber bag once a year. The inlet and outlet pipe joints,
control valves, drain valves and air release cock are to be maintained watertight. The
MS container shall also be painted at least once in two years. The diaphragm should
be replaced periodically, the rubber washer should be replaced. The container must be
cleaned at least fortnightly so that there are no. encrustations on container walls &
logging of pipes.
C2) Dosing Pumps:
a) Diaphragm of the dosing pump shall be replaced after 3000 hours of operation
or as recommended by manufacturer.
b) Chemical storage tank shall be cleaned once in month and it shall be covered
with proper lid

131
 c) Dosing pump valves shall be cleaned with weak acid once in month to prevent
clogging
d) Settings of dosing pump shall not be disturbed when power supply is off as it
will disturb the calibration
e) Electronic solenoid is prone to burning due to sudden voltage fluctuations
hence it should be provided with constant voltage stabilizer

C3) Silver ionization plant :

a) Regular cleaning of electrodes shall be ensured
b) Silver electrodes of the Silver Ionization plant shall be replaced after 9-
12 months of operation .

12.4 Maintenance of pumping main :

The pumping mains are often very long and generally laid along the road hence
damage to pipe may be caused due burst in pipe lines, tampering by unauthorized
persons, temperature variations, vehicular traffic, etc. Such unauthorized persons,
temperature variations, vehicular traffic, etc. Such damages should be observed and
attended to immediately. Ready made pipe sleeves, rubber sheets, and pipe clamps,
etc shall be always be kept in stock to stop the leakages in cracked pipes temporarily.
If the pipes have developed major cracks or severely damaged such pipes need to be
replaced with good ones.

The appurtenances in the piping main such as sluice valves, scour valves, air release
valves, etc shall be protected against tampering by unauthorized persons by always
closing the lid and locking the valve chambers.

12.5. Maintenance of OHSR/UGSR :

To prevent bacterial contamination of water and to maintain hygienic condition

of water it is necessary that clear water storage tanks are periodically cleaned and
disinfected. It may be necessary to clean them once in three months or more

132
frequently (if required). A program shall be prepared and display boards shall be
exhibited near the tank indicating last cleaning date and the next cleaning date. Men
entering the tank should use clean pair of gum boots, which are washed just before
entering the water tank. Brushes used must also be in clean condition, preferably they
should be soaked in bleaching powder solution at least for one hour before use. Also
hand gloves shall be used in cleaning.

i) Cleaning operation :

The water level in the tank may be got depleted by consuming the water on
previous day before taking up cleaning to avoid wastage of water. About 75 mm of
water can be kept in the tank to which decanted, clear bleaching powder solution
having concentration of 10 mg/lt chlorine may be added and the bottom and side walls
of the tank scrubbed well using the brush and thoroughly cleaned. Dirty water can be
added to the tank and the bottom and side walls of the tank cleaned and washed
thoroughly. On completion of the cleaning, it is necessary that the side walls and the
bottom of the tank is disinfected using a strong solution of decanted clear bleaching
powder solution having a strength of 50 mg/lt of chlorine. Solution may be splashed
on the side walls and bottom of the tank by means of small cans and the entire wall
surfaces and bottom of the tank drenched by the solution. About one hour of reaction
period may be allowed to complete disinfection to take place. The tank may be
recommissioned after one hour and put in to normal use.

ii) Safety Precautions

Proper tools and implements as indicated above must be used. Usage of gum boots
and hand gloves are necessary in order to prevent contamination of the tank and also
to prevent skin irritation to workmen due to chlorine solution. Tank must be properly
ventilated by keeping all manholes in open position when the cleaning operation is in
progress.

Un-trained workmen shall not be engaged for cleaning. Workmen shall not be
permitted into tank containing water more than 15 cm depth. Water level should be

133
reduced prior to allowing men inside to prevent accidents. Guard bars may be
provided an outlet/scour opening provided at the bottom and side walls of the tank
may be checked frequently and covers are to be replaced in position and locked.

12.6 Maintenance of Distribution system:

Distribution system has the likelihood of getting contaminated causing

secondary pollution of once treated water before it reaches the consumers. Hence, the
distribution system needs and deserves a careful maintenance.

A complete inspection of the distribution system and pumping mains shall be made
once and the survey must be made for leakages in the distribution system, sluice
valves, fire hydrants, scour and air valves. Underground leakages in a distribution
system is generally indicated by dampness. Flooding of water and extra growth of
vegetation above the pipe line at the place of leak. Leakage frequently occurs in house
service ferrule connections. A record shall be maintained to indicate the major repairs
and leakages occurred with reasons for the same which can be used to check
unaccounted water loss in the system and to have close check on these leakages prone
points. Scour valves shall be operated and dirty water let out once in a month. Gland
packing in sluice valves should be replaced once in 3 to 6 months or more frequently
depending on the leakage in gland, frequency of operation of valve etc. Excess
leakages in air valves shall be attended to in time.

In this project as the operation and maintenance of all the above units are to be
managed by the community without any financial contribution from the government it
is essential to educate the beneficiary community about the cost involved. The
following example is presented to arrive at the approximate cost and contribution by
the beneficiary.

12.7. Maintenance of Structures , Lawns & Clean Environment :-

The main structures are pump chamber and staff quarter. The structures should
be painted after every 3 years. Besides the Sluice Valve haudies etc. should also be

134
kept clean. The leakage in S.V's are valves leads to standing water & causes in
sanitary conditions.

12.8 Duties of Pump Operator & Maintenance of records

Pump operator is the most important functionary in the set up since it is he who
is in direct contact with the people all the time. The higher officers can maintain
contact only periodically. The pump operators primary responsibility is to run the
machinery and keep it in proper order. Besides he has to act a link between the
consumers & the officials of the department. The pump operator should maintain the
following record :-

I) Log Book :- The log book should be maintained on a daily basis &
incorporate the following things

1. Date
2. Time of start of pumping set
3. Time of switching off
4. Total hours of pumping
5. Volt meter reading
6. Ampere meter reading
7. Depth gauge reading
8. Spring Level at time of start
9. Spring Level at time of switching off
10. Time taken to restore water level
11. Signature of P.O.
12. Signature of Inspecting Officer
13. Remarks Columns
If diesel engine or a generating set is used then an account of oil consumed
should be given. Besides entry should be made in log book about all the repair work.

135
 The log book should contain the details of the machinery on the first page
clearly specifying the make, discharge capacity & head proper maintenance of log
book helps in keeping a check on the health of T/Well.
II) Complaint Register :- Complaint register should be properly maintained
and all the complaints should be entered chronologically along with the remedial
measures taken. The complaint should be self specific & the following should be
clearly mentioned :-
1. Date of Complaint
2. Nature of Complaint
3. Time for which the complaint is witnessing it
4. Place of Complaint
5. Complainants name & address
6. Date on which noted by the field staff (if any)
7. Date of Compliance
8. Any Special Remarks
9. Remarks or Comments by the Senior Officers
The J.E. should check the complaint register at least once a week and after
solving the complaints problem must made on entry. If there is no complaint recd.
during a month, a certificate regarding this should be entered by J.E/A/E.
III) Movement Register :- The P.O. should maintain a movement register.
So that the inspecting officers are able to check the attendance.

IV) Meeting register with Panchayats :- The P.O. should meet the village
Panchayat once a month & enter the minutes of meeting in the register. The J.E/A.E
should personally attend these meeting once in two months. This would help in proper
co-ordination between the department & the consumers.

V) Chlorination Register :- The register should have the following pts.

1. Date
2. Qty. of bleaching powder added
3. Pt. at which residual chlorine checked

136
4. Amt. of residual chlorine
5. Sign of P.O. and consumer in whose presence residual chlorine is checked
6. Sign of inspecting officer
The J.E/A.E should check the residual chlorine once a week and make an entry
himself.

12.9 Annexure of Model O & M Calculations for a Village Water Supply

Scheme.

The following inputs are assumed for the calculation of O & M cost.

(a) Cost of a borewell - Rs 50,000

(b) Cost of a Pumping Machinery- Rs 50,000
(c) Cost of PVC Mains
All Diametres Average Cost -Rs 250/Mtr
(d) Cost of Storage Tanks -Rs 6 per Ltr
(e) Cost of Disinfecting Unit -Rs 20,000
(f) Electrical Works -Rs 2,00,000
(g) Salary of Operators -Rs 1500/Month

12.10 O & M COST ESTIMATE

GENERAL:

For preparation of O & M estimate scheme, it is necessary to have details of scheme

components to assess the cost of operation and maintenance. In order to make things
clear, brief details of the scheme for illustration of O & M cost is furnished in the
example below.

1. SALIENT DETAILS OF SCHEME

137
a) Requirement of Water
Population served by scheme (Present) - 1041 persons 2001 AD
Population served by scheme - 1500 persons
(Considering the growth at 20% per decade)
No. OF households at 5 person 1041/5 = 210 households
Per capita W/S - 55 Lpcd
Daily water requirement 1500 x 70 - 10,50,000 ltr/day

b) Source
Tube well (assuming) yield. - 32140 ltr/hour
Sustainable yield 60% to be considered
And safe yield should be decreased by 30 % to cover the decline in discharge
over a period of time .
i.e. 18,000 x 0.7x0.3 = 13,500.00
13500/3600 = 3.75 Lps
Pumping hours - 10hrs/day
13500 x 8 = 108000 ltr/day
No. of Tube wells = 105000/108000 = 0.97 or 1 No.

Depth of bore well = 150 m

Pump installed at 45 m in bore well
Head on pump set
Depth of tube well - 45 m
Delivery head - 10 m
Line losses for 75 mm PVC pipe
of 6 KSC for 250 m length at
6.40 M/km 250 x 6.4/1000 = 1.6 m

Add 10 % for losses in Valves, etc. -0.16m

Total Head -56.76 m or 57m
HP = WQH / 75 x = 1 x 3.15 x 57 = 3.99 or 5 BHP
75 x 0.60
c) Storage

138
 Elevated tank over 15 m staging
(Equal to half day requirement) - 50.000 ltrs

d) Distribution System

Pipe sizes 110 mm to 63 mm PVC 4 KSC

Supply through stand post for 50% at
1 No. Per 150 persons.
No. of stand post 1500/2 = 750/150 = 5 Nos.

No.of house connection = 1500/2 =750/5 = 150 Nos.

2. COST OF SCHEME

a) Tube well - 1 No - 3,50,000.00

b) Pump chambers - 1,20,000.00
c) Pump set and piping in bore well 50,000.00
d) Pumping main from tube well to
Elevated tank 75 mm PVC 6 KSC 62,500.00
250 m long @ Rs 250/- m
e) Elevated Tank 50,000 ;ltrs/15m
Staging 5,00,000.00
f) Distribution System
110 mm to 63 mm PVC 4 KSC
1200 mtrs. @ Rs 250/- per m 3,00,000.00
g) Disinfections arrangement 20,000.00
h) Electrical works 1,00,000.00
i) Development of water works 50,000.00
15,52,500

139
 3. O & M Cost per year for schemes maintained by DWSS *
* VWSC may decide appropriate staffing pattern

a) Salary of operating staff

(i) Pump Operator 1 No. 148.46 x 365 Rs 54188
(ii) Fitter 1450/30000 = 0.05 no. Rs 2628
0.05 x 144 x 365
(iii) Fitter Helper = 0.05 x 89.25 x 365 Rs 1629
(iv) Patrolman cum keyman = 0.05 x 87.50 x 365 Rs 1596
(v) Mali cum Chowkidar = 1 No. = 1 x 88.50 x 365 Rs 32303

b) Energy Charges :

5.00 BHP Pump running 8/hour/day

5 x 8 x0.746 x 30 = 895 kwh/month
For 12 months = 895 x 12 = 10740units @ 2.85/unit Rs. 30,609

c) Bleaching powder for disinfection

Chlorine dosage = 0.35 kg per 1,00,000 ltrs
Requirement per year = 105000 x 0.35 x 365 / 100000
= 134 kg @ Rs 20/kg Rs. 2680

d) Supervision of change = 100 % of repair Rs 4200

of machinery
---------------
-
Rs
1,29,843/-
---------------
-
4. Annual Maintenance and repairs

140
a) Civil work % of Rs 670000/- Rs 1675/-
(b+e+i)
b) Machinery 1 % of Rs 52000/- Rs 5200/-
(a+c+g+h)
c) Water supply pipeline, 3/8% of Rs 362500/- Rs 1359/-
(d + f)
------------------
Total Rs 8234
------------------

Total maintenance cost ( 3+4) = 129843 + 8234 = 138077

Per capita Mtc. cost = 138000/1041 = Rs 132.56

Cost of water per 1000 ltrs = 138000 x 1000 = Rs 3.60/1000hrs

105000 x 365

Revenue (Taxation proposed to be collected from the community)

a. 20 % for stand post 42 house

connection holds
b. 80% for domestic connection 168 house
holds

Therefore Revenue to be collected from

Refer Annexure C for Detailed water Tariff Structure issued vide Govt of
Punjab Notification dated 4.10.2002

141
a. From stand post connection @ Rs 10 month per household
42 x 10 x 12 = 5040 per annum
b. From house connection @ Rs 70 per month per household
168 x 70 x 12 = 141120

Total = 146160
SAY : Rs 146000/-

Actual Expenditure for O & M = 138000/-

Miscellaneous Expenditure = 8000/-

-----------------
= 1,46,000/-
-----------------

The O & M Cost for water supply are to be explained to the users in various meetings
so that community can be aware of likely pattern of sharing of the cost.

142
 CHAPTER 13
Construction Management

This chapter explains the actions to be taken during the progress of work. The water
source is established during planning stage. Based on the yield, the project planning, design,
estimate and tender action will be done. Construction sequences, procurement of materials,
construction management, specifications, permissible tolerances during construction phase
are elaborated.
13.1 Sequence of construction
a) Source
The source being selected during planning phase shall be flushed once again and the
yield ascertained for its dependability as regards Quality and Quality before commencement
of civil works. Procurement of pumps and rising main should take place only after above
actions are completed. Application to PSEB electric supply should be processed
telescopically so that by the time rising main and reservoirs are completed, electricity is
(nearly) available.
b) Civil works.
The working levels shall be taken from the source point to service reservoir and
ascertained that the levels taken with that projected in the drawings proposed during planning
and preparation of DSR. If any variation is noticed the necessary action shall be taken to
redesign the raising main and pump machinery in accordance with the working levels now
obtained. As possibility of changes in location of OHSR are quite evident in villages for
reasons necessitating acquisition of land required for construction or change of sources. Civil
works construction will start once contract procurement process is over and work orders are
issued. Transmission line and Reservoir works can be taken simultaneously and immediately.
As per experience, Distribution works are likely to deviate from the original plans due to
change in user demand. Therefore, distribution work can be taken up after finishing Rising
main and Storage tanks. Accordingly procurement of distribution pipes can be phased out
suitably. Ground water recharging works should be taken after rainy season and be
completed before the next rainy season or at least constructed to a safe level so that it

143
withstands the impact of the floods. Sanitation work can commence simultaneously but water
supply should be available by the time sanitation works are completed and put to use.
c) Testing of Materials
All materials like sand, cement, aggregates, steel, GI pipes, PVC pipes, Pumps,
Electrical goods, paints etc shall conform to not less than BIS specifications. All the
materials shall be tested in laboratories.
d) Construction Management:
The works allotted to contractors are on turnkey basis i.e. all the materials will be
procured by the contractors.There shall be 3 tier structure for effective construction
management
Local level by SDE / EE of DWSS
SE of DWSS
Indepenedent construction quality control at head quarter levelunder the control of
CE of DWSS
. Water supply and sanitation department will watch progress and milestones and will take
corrective actions wherever necessary. Checklists to carry out quality adherence are given
elsewhere in this chapter. The DWSS will appoint a central Construction quality surveillance
team, which will carryout random checks, suggest remedial and preventive measures. Water
supply and sanitation department will take appreciation action and disciplinary action on the
project staff as per the need. The Contractors are expected to carry out the work in the most
professional way and will be watched closely. Avoidable Time over runs will be viewed
seriously. The quantities mentioned in the BOQ will be strictly adhered up to the given
allowance. Any increase or decrease will be discussed with the appropriate authority and
written permission will be taken before execution.
e) Payment Schedule to contractors:
Contractors prepare their bills which will be checked and recorded in measurement
books by the concerned Sub Division Engineers with recommendation to GP for payment for
the satisfactory works. Payments should be done to finished items only. Examples: supplying
and fixing of pipelines duly tested. Reservoirs on commissioning, Groundwater recharging
structures on completion or on attaining safe situation, etc. The emphasis should be to keep
the Construction management at safe and healthy level.
f) Commissioning & Trial Run.

144
 On completion of all civil works, the project will be commissioned PSEB would have
sanctioned electric supply, as registration would have been done immediately after the water
yield and quality test. If electric supply is not available then the contractor will provide
captive power and trial run will commence. The trial run will be for 3 months preferably in
lean months. VWSC will be involved actively during this period.
13.2 Technical Specifications

13.3 Check list for Construction Quality Management at Site.

Sr. No. Attribute Yes/ No
MATERIALS
1. Is coarse aggregate as per sample
2. Is fine aggregate as per sample
3. Is cement fresh & free from clods.
4. Does the cement set within one hour.
5. Is sand free from silt
6 Are steel bars of correct diameter
7. Does the steel bend without breaking
8 Are the pipes from tested consignment
9 Is the pumping machinery identical to tested sample
FOUNDATIONS
1 Are the foundation approved by the engineer including SBC
2 Is sand filling provided.
PLAIN/ REINFORCED CONCRETE
1 Is concrete Mixer used
2 Is water measured for concreting
3. Is vibrator used
4. Is slump test done
5. Is bulking of sand determined
MASONRY
1. Are bricks soaked in water before use
2. Are joints broken
3. Whether Masonry started from corner

145
4 Whether masonry constructed for uniform Height
5. Is mortar applied to each brick before placing in position
6. Is dressing of stone done before placing
7. Is watering of stone done before placing
8 Are bond stones dressed
9 Is base of face stones more than height
10. Is the masonry to plumb
11. Are the joints raked
RCC WORKS
1 Are cover blocks cast in CM-12
2 Are centering supports spaced less than 0.6 mts and
Adequate braces provided
3. Are the posts resting on firm ground with wooden wedges
4 Are steel plates used for centering bottoms and sides
5 Are the gaps in centering closed
6 Is centering level checked
7 Is plumb checked for columns
8 Is centering checked / approved before placing reinforcement
9 Is reinforcement as per drawings
10 Are chairs used to prevent disturbance of reinforcement
11 Are lap lengths OK and at suitable position
12 Is reinforcement checked/ approved and measurement
Recorded before placing concreting
13 Is water proofing done when roof slabs are green
14 Is curing being done at the time of visit.
15 Is remolding done after the required period
16 Are patches of surface touched immediately after demolding.
PLASTERING
1. Is the sand for plastering free from silt
2. Is the surface cleaned and watered before plastering
3. Are the plumb, line and thickness checked and correct.
PIPES, SPECIALS AND APPURTENANCE

146
1 Are the locations as per plans
2. Are the flanged dimensions as per standard thickness, pitch,
Circle/dia.
3. Are the faces of flanges machined
4 Is rubber insertion of required quality and thickness.
5 Are the bolts and nuts are good quality and sizes.
6 Are the pipes and specials aligned to gradient and plumb
7 Are the bolts and nuts tightened properly.
8 Are the specials and valves supported properly.
9 Are thrust blocks provided for bends.
PIPE LAYING
1 Is alignment of lines as per plans
2. Is trench dimensions and levels as per plans
3. Is the soil at the bottom of pipes good for laying of pipes
4 Are the pipes and specials lowered and aligned true to
gradient and line.
5 Is the required cushion provided
6. Are pipe ends cleaned before joining
7 Follow manufacturers instruction for joining (PVC pipes)
8 Are the pipes cleaned inside before laying
9 Are the ends of pipelines closed before the days work.
10. Are air valves and reflex valves, scour valves provided at
stipulated locations.
11 Are the pipe lines tested before commissioning
12. Is refilling done gently and consolidated
The discharge and head of pumps shall be as per the design requirement. Electrical fittings
will satisfy the requirements of the PSEB.
Typical formats for testing of various materials used in the water supply scheme are
presented in the following pages to have uniform data and also as a guideline for minimum
tests to be conducted on the materials.

147
PUNJAB RURAL WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION PROJECT

REQUEST FOR INSPECTION

District: Taluka:
Name of contractor :
Request No. :
Following works are / will be ready for inspection at (Time)
on (Date)
Description of works :
Location of work :
Ref drawing no. :
Type of work :

13.4 Formats for Test Report

Comments :
1. Remedial works listed to be completed and re-inspection is required.

This request was received (Time) (Date)

Signature

Contractor Supporting Agency Gram Panchayat

(Representative) (Representative) (Representative)

148
 PUNJAB RURAL WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION PROJECT

Protocol for Collection of Sample

Ref No. :
Date :
Name of Work :
Name of Agency :
Particulars of Sample :
Quantity :
Location :
Test to be conducted :

Contractor Supporting Agency Gram Panchayat

(Representative) (Representative) (Representative)

149
 PUNJAB RURAL WATER SUPPLY AND SANITATION PROJECT

CONCRETE POUR CARD

Inspection No. : Date: Time:
Drg. No.
AREA OF WORKS: : GRADE OF CONCRETE
1. Setting Out :
2. Levels :
3. Shuttering :
4. HD Bolts :
5. Inserts :
Reinforcement :
1. Dia :
2. Spacing :
3. Laps :
4. Chairs :
5. Top Level :
6. Cover :
Concrete :
1. Blind concrete :
2. Quality of CA & FA :
3. Admixtures :
4. Slump :
5. Cubes taken :
6. Vibrator provided :
The above structure works has been ckecked and found ready for concrete.
Note: Post concrete inspection/ Observation.

Contractor Supporting Agency Gram Panchayat

(Representative) (Representative) (Representative)
1. TYPICAL FORMAT OF TEST REPORT ON PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF
CEMENT
Source of Sample : Sample Supplied by the client
Clients Reference : Letter No.. Dated.
Brand :
Grade : 43
Project :
Identification :
Period of Test :
Technical Reference : IS: 8112-1989
Sr. Test conducted Results Requirements as Remarks
No. per IS: 8112-1989
1 NORMAL CONSISTENCY Not specified
2. INITIAL SETTING TIME Shall not be less
than 30 minutes
3. FINAL SETTING TIME Shall not be less
than 600 minutes
150
4 COMMRESSIVE STRENGTH
a) 72 1h (average of three results) Shall not be less
b) 168 2h (average of three results) than 23.0 Mpa
c) 672 4h (average of three results) Shall not be less
than 33.0 Mpa
Shall not be less
than 43.0 Mpa
5. FINENESS (by Blaines air Shall not be less
Permeability method) than 225 m2/ kg
6 SOUNDNESS Shall not be more
(by Le-Chateliers method) than 10mm

151
 2. TYPICAL FORMAT OF TEST REPORT
ON FINE AGGREGATE
Source of sample : Sample supplied by the client
Clients Reference : Letter No.. dated..
Date of Test :
Project : ..
Contractor : ..
Sample No. : .
Technical Reference : IS:2386 (Part I to VIII)-1963 (Reaffirmed-1990)
IS Sieve Designation Cumulative Percent Specification as per IS:383-1970 (Reaffirmed 1990)
for fine aggregate (%age Passing)
Retained Passing Zone-1 Zone-II Zone-III
04.75 mm 90-100 90-100 90-100
02.36 mm 60-95 75-100 85-100
01.18 mm 30-70 55-90 75-90
600 microns 15-34 35-59 60-79
300 microns 5-20 8-30 12-40
150 microns 0-10 0-10 0-10
Remarks

Test Conducted Results Requirements

Silt content -- --

152
 3. TYPICAL FORMAT OF TEST REPORT ON
COARSE AGGREGATES
Source of sample : Sample supplied by the client
Clients Reference : Letter No..dated.
Project : ..
Date of test : ..
Technical Reference : IS:2386(Part I to VIII)-1963 (Reaffirmed-1990)

Sieve Analysis- 40mm and Down

IS Sieve Designation Specification as per IS:383-1970 in Respect of
40mm nominal size aggregate (% Passing)
Cumulative Percent Graded Single Size
80.0 mm 100 --
63.0 mm -- 100
40.0 mm 95-100 85-100
20.0 mm 30-70 0-20
12.0 mm -- --
10.0 mm 10-35 0-5
4.75 mm 0-5 --

Sieve Analysis- 20mm and Down

IS Sieve Designation Specification as per IS:383-1970 in Respect of
40mm nominal size aggregate (% Passing)
Cumulative Percent Graded Single Size
40.0 mm 100 100
20.0 mm 95-100 85-100
12.5 mm -- --
10.0 mm 25-55 0-20
4.75 mm 0-10 0-5

153
 Sieve Analysis- 20mm and Down
IS Sieve Designation Specification as per IS:383-1970 in Respect of
40mm nominal size aggregate (% Passing)
Cumulative Percent Graded Single Size
20.0 mm 100 100
12.5 mm 90-100 85-100
10.0mm 40-85 0-45
4.75mm 0-10 0-10

154
 4. TYPICAL FORMAT OF TEST REPORT ON
BRICKS
Source of sample : Sample supplied by the client
Number of samples tested : ..
Clients Reference : Letter No..dated.
Project : ..
Identification : ..
Period of test : ..
Technical Reference : IS:3495-1992 & IS 1077-1992

1. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH:
Sr. Brand Measured Compressive Average Requirements as per
No. Size (mm) Strength compressive IS:1077-1992 for Class
(N/sq. mm) strength Designation 3.5
(N/sq.mm)
When 5 samples tested for
compressive strength,
average compressive
strength shall not be less
that 3.5 N/sq.mm

II. WATER ABSORPTION:

Sr. Brand Measured Water Average Requirements as per
No. Size (mm) Absorption (%) (%) IS:1077-1992
The average water
absorption shall not be
more than 20%

155
 5. TYPICAL FORMAT OF TEST REPORT ON
SOLID/ HOLLOW CONCRETE BLOCK
Source of sample : Sample supplied by the client
Client s Reference Letter no : Dated:
Number of samples tested : ..
Clients Reference : Letter No..dated.
Project : ..
Identification : ..
Period of test : ..
Technical Reference : IS:2185(Part-I) 1979 (Reaffirmed-1992)
1. COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH:
Sr. Measured Compressive Average Remarks
No. Dimension Strength compressive
(mm) (N/ mm2) strength (N/mm2)
1
2
3
4
5
Requirements: When 8 samples tested for compressive strength, average strength shall not
be less than 3.5 N/sq.mm for blocks used as load bearing members.
II. WATER ABSORPTION:
Sr. Measured Dimension Water Absorption Requirements as per IS:2185-
No. (mm) (%) 1979 (Reaffirmed-1992)
The average water
absorption shall not
be more than 10%.

III. BLOCK DENSITY:

Sr. No. Measured Dimension (mm) Block Density (Kg/cu.m)

Requirements: The average density of solid concrete blocks shall not be less than 1800
Kg/cu.m and shall not be less than 1500 Kg/cu.m for hollow concrete blocks.
6. TYPICAL FORMAT OF
COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST REPORT
ON CONCRETE CUBES

Number of samples : Sample supplied by the client.

No. of cubes tested :
Mix Proportion :
Grade of concrete :
Clients Reference : Letter No..dated.
Project : ..
W.O.No. : ...
Contractor : ..
Dimension of Specimen : 150 x 150 x150mm
Cross Sectional Area : 22500 sq.mm
156
Technical Reference : IS:516-1959 (Reaffirmed-1999)

Sr. Identification Weight Date of Date of Age of Max Compressive Remarks

No. (Kg) Casting Testing test Load Strength
(Days) (KN) (N/sq.mm)

Requirements as per IS:456-2000:

The 28 days compressive strength of cubes tested shall not be less than the grade of concrete
specified plus 3.5 N/mm2 (fck + 3.5)

157
 7. TYPICAL FORMAT OF
REINFORCEMENT STEEL TEST REPORT
Source of sample : Sample supplied by the client
Number of samples tested : ..
Clients Reference : Letter No..dated.
Date of test : ......................
Project : ..
Identification : ..
Grade : Fe 250 / Fe 415
Technical Reference : IS:1608-1995,IS:1786-1985(Reaffirmed in 1996)

a) Proof Stress
Dia of Wt. Proof stress Ultimate Tensile Elongation Bend Rebend
bar Kg/m N/mm2 Stress (N/mm2) (%)

b) Permissible limits for weight:

Nominal Size Range of Weight for batch
(Kg/m)
8.0 0.367 to 0.423
10.0 0.574 to 0.660
12.0 0.843 to 0.932
16.0 1.500 to 1.658
20.0 2.392 to 2.540
25.0 3.739 to 3.971
32.0 6.127 to 6.506

158
 8. TYPICAL FORMAT OF TEST REPORT ON
ANALYSIS OF WATER SAMPLE FOR CONSTRUCTION
Source of sample : Sample supplied by the client
Clients Reference : Letter No..dated.
Project : ..
Identification : ..
Period of test : ..
Technical Reference : IS: 456-2000
IS:3025-1983 (Part 11,15,16,17,18,22,23,24,&32)
Sr. Particulars Constituents Stipulation of IS:456-
No. Determined 2000
1. Quantity of 0.02N NaoH required to Shall not be more than
neutralize 100ml of water sample 5 ml.
using phenolphthalein as an indicator
2. Quantity of 0.02 N H2 SO4 required to Shall not be more than
neutralize 100 ml of water sample 25ml.
using mixed indicator
3. Inorganic Solids 3000 mg/ I max
4. Sulphates as SO4 400mg/lt max
5. Chlorides as CI 500mg/lt max for RCC
2000mg/lt max for
PCC
6. Suspended matter 2000mg/lt max
7. Organic matter 200mg/lt max
8. pH valve Shall not be less than 6

159
 Chapter 14
Specific Water Treatment Processess:

14.0 Defluoridtation of Water

Excessive fluorides in drinking water may cause mottling of teeth or dental fluorosis,
a condition resulting in the discoloration of the enamel, with chipping of the teeth in severe
cases, particularly in children. In Indian conditions where the temperatures are high, the
occurrence and severity of mottling increases when the fluoride levels exceed 1.0 mg/1. With
higher levels, skeletal or bone fluorosis with its crippling effects are observed. The chief
sources of fluorides in nature are (i) fluorapatite (phosphate rock), (ii) fluorspar, (iii) cryolite
and (iv) igneous rocks containing fluorosilicates. Fluorides are present mostly in ground
waters and high concentrations have been found in various districts of Punjab. Removal
Methods
The removal of excessive fluorides from public water supplies or individual water supplies is
justifiable solely on public health grounds. This is a problem particularly in rural areas and
hence the accent has to be on simplicity of operation, cheapness and applicability to small
water supplies. The methods use fluoride exchangers like tricalcium phosphate or bone meal,
anion exchangers, activated carbon, magnesium slats or aluminium salts.
14.1.1 Fluoride Exchangers
Degreased and alkali treated bones possess the ability to remove fluorides but have not been
used on a plant scale. Bone charcoal prepared by controlled combustion of bones under
limited supply of air in the presence of catalysts when treated with alkali or phosphate has
been found to be useful. One cubic meter of bone charcoal is capable of removing 1.1 kg of
fluoride from a water with fluoride content upto 6.0 mg/1. The spent material can be
regenerated with mono or trisodium phosphate. Tricalcium phosphate in powdered form can
also be used but it has a lesser capacity of 0.7 kg of fluoride /m3. The spent material is
regenerated by treatment with 1% alkali solution and rinsed with dilute hydrochloric acid.
14.1.2 Anion Exchangers
Activated carbons have also been known to have the capacity for removal of fluorides. An
activated carbon for Fluorides removal has been developed in India by carbonizing paddy
husk or sawdust, digesting under pressure with alkali and quenching it in a 2% alum solution.
This could remove 320 mg of fluoride per kilogram of the dry material. The spent material
could be regenerated by soaking it in a 2% alum solution for 14 hours. The attrition and
hydraulic properties of the carbon are however poor.

160
 A granular ion-exchange material Defluoron 2, which is a sulphonated coal operating
on the aluminium cycle has been developed in the country. The capacity of the material is
estimated to be 500 gm of fluorides/ m3 with test water containing 5mg F/1 and 150 mg/1
alkalinity. The regeneration is carried out by means of a 2.5% alum solution, with
replacement of two bed volumes. A flow rate of 4.8m3/m2/ hr of bed area is adopted. The
rinse water requirements after regeneration are 9-12 m3/m2/ hr for a maximum duration of 10
minutes. The medium has a life of three years.
High alkalinity of the water considerably lowers the capacity as well as efficiency of
the bed. Hydroxyl alkalinity beyond 5 mg/1 has a deleterious effect on the removal efficiency
of the medium. The efficiency of the medium falls down by 30% when hydroxyl alkalinity
becomes 25 mg/1.
Treatment cost using Defluoron -2 varies from Rs. 1.0 to Rs. 5.0 per 1000 litres of
water treated, depending upon the initial fluoride concentration and the alkalinity of water.
14.1.3 Magnesium Salts
Excess lime treatment for softening effects removal of fluoride due to its adsorption by the
magnesium hydroxide floc. The fluoride reduction is given by the following expression:
Fluoride reduction = 7% initial fluoride conc. x magnesium removed (9.1)

Sizeable Fluoride removals are possible only when magnesium is present in large quantities
which may not always be the case and magnesium have to be supplemented in the form of
salts. The process is suitable only when the water is being softened.
Magnesia and calcinated magnetite have also been used for removal of fluoride from
water. The study established the following empirical relationships for amounts of MgO
which are required to obtain 1 or 2 mg F/1 in treated water.
(a) MgO required to obtain 1 mg F/1 in treated water (F0> 2mg F/1)

(b) MgO required to obtain 2mg F/1 in treated water (F0>3 mg F/1)

F0 represents the fluoride concentration in the raw water. The pH of the treated water was
always beyond 10 and its correction by acidification was essential, adding to the
complexity of operations and control.
14.1.4 Aluminium Salts

161
Aluminium salts like filter alum and activated aluminium and alum treated cation exchangers
have shown beneficial effects. Filter alum during coagulation brings about some removal of
fluorides from water. The removal efficiency is improved when used along with a conagulant
aid-like activated silica and clay. 300 to 500 mg/1 of alum is required to bring down fluoride
from 4.0 mg/1 to 1.0mg/1 while with coagulant aid, the fluorides were reported to be reduced
from 6.0 mg/1 to 1.0 mg/1 with alum dose of only 100 mg/1.
Alum treated polystyrene cation exchangers and sulphonated coals have also been
used successfully. A cation exchangers prepared form extract of Avaram bark and
formaldehyde when soaked in alum solution has been found to have good fluoride removal
capacity (800mg/kg.)
Calcinated or activated alumina in granular form can be used fluoride removal and
the spent material regenerated with alkali, acid or by both alternately (removal efficiently 1.2
kg of fluoride/m3). A dilute solution of aluminium sulphate used as the regenerated for the
spent material makes the alumina four times more efficient.
14.1.5 Simple Method of Defluoridation
Deluoridation is achieved either by fixed bed media which chould be regenerated or by the
process of precipitation and formation of complexes. A simple method of defluoridations is
employed in the Nalgonda Technique. It involves the use of aluminium salts for the removal
of fluoride. The Nalgonda Technique employs either the sequence of precipitation, settling
and filtration or precipitation, floatation and filtration and can be used for domestic as well as
community water supply schemes.
(i) Domestic Treatment-Precipitation, Settling and Filtration
Treatment can be carried out in a container (bucket) of 40 1 capacity with a tap 3-5
cm above the bottom of the container for the withdrawal of treated water after precipitation
and settling The raw water taken in the container, is mixed with adequate amount of like or
sodium carbonate, bleaching powder and aluminium sulphate solution, depending upon its
alkalinity and fluoride content. Lime or sodium carbonate solution is added first and mixed
well with water.
Alum solution is then added and the water stirred slowly for 10 minutes and allowed to settle
for nearly one hour. The supernatant which contains permissible amount of fluoride is
withdrawn through the tap for consumption. The settled sludge is discarded. The amount of
alum in ml to be added in 40 litres of water at various alkalinity and fluoride level is given in
Table .

162
ALUM DOSE FOR DIFFERENT FLUORIDES AND ALKALINITY LEVELS
Test Water Fluoride Test water alkalinity, mg CaCO3/1
mg F/1 125 200 300 400 500 600 800 1000
2 60 90 110 120 140 160 190 210
3 90 120 140 160 205 210 235 310
4 160 165 190 225 240 275 375
5 205 240 275 290 355 405
6 245 285 315 375 425 485
8 395 450 520 570
10 605 675

14.2 Reverse Osmosis :

Reverse osmosis is a membrane permeation process for separating relatively pure water
from a less pure solution . The solution is passed over the surface of an appropriate semi
permeable membrane at a pressure in excess of the effective osmotic pressure of the osmotic
pressure of the feed solution . The permeating liquid is collected as the product and the
concentrated feed solution is generally discarded . The membrane must be highly permeable
without failure . Because of it simplicity in concept and execution , reverse osmosis appears
to have considerable potential for Purification of Water containing Flourides or any other
harmful dissolved solids
14.2.1 Consultancy Support for RO Plants :

Bhabha Atomic Research Centre, Trombay(BARC) has actively participated in the Rajiv
Gandhi National Drinking Water Mission (RGNDWM) and setup a number of small reverse
osmosis plants in the villages during eighties. It also provided active support to the Mission
in the water quality monitoring and analysed large number of water samples for the presence
of brackishness, nitrate, fluoride, iron etc. from various affected districts of Andhra Pradesh,
Karnataka, Maharastra, Gujarat and Rajasthan. In recent years, BARC has installed a RO
plant at Sheelgan village, Barmer district, Rajasthan. In January 2003, the Centre has
installed another plant at Satlana village, Jodhpur district, Rajasthan. This plant will also
remove excess fluoride and nitrate alongwith the brackishness. The cost of such plants which
provide drinking water to habitation of 1000 people is around 7 lakhs. The water cost comes
out to about 3 paise/litre.

163
.
BARC has been interacting in recent years with the Government of Rajasthan, Government
of Lakshadeep and Tamilnadu Water Board and will further expand this contact with
Government of Gujarat, Maharastra, Andhra Pradesh and Karnataka. It has been providing
consultancy services to several private parties and government undertakings. The mobile/
transportable desalination units based on RO & VC technology are in the advanced stage of
development. Standardized modules both for RO (5-50 m3/d) and small thermal desalination
units (5-50 m3/d) using waste heat (diesel or solar) specific to individual needs have been
developed. development of water scarcity areas and large coastal arid zones of the country.
14.3 PRESSURE FILTERS :

General
Based on the same principle as gravity type rapid sand filters, water is passed through
the filter under pressure through a cylindrical tank, usually made of Fibre Glass with single
valve operation wherein the underdrain, gravel and sand are placed. They are compact and
can be prefabricated and moved to site. Economy is possible in certain cases by avoiding
double pumping Pretreatment is essential. The tank axis may be either vertical or horizontal
as shown below

Salient Features :
164
 It shall have single valve operation for Back Wash , recirculation ,Rinse ,Filter Waste
close to eliminate leakage from individual valves .
Give visual indication as to the present operation of the filter.
It shall have Multi port valve with quick connect threaded barrel unions .
It shall have Hydraulically balanced laterals to maximize water flow and automatic
air bleed .
Tank of the pressure sand filter shall be made of Fibre Glass .
Disadvantages

Pressure filters suffer from the following disadvantages:

a) In case of direct supply from pressure filters, it is not possible to provide adequate
contact time for chlorine.

b) Because the water is under pressure at the delivery end, on occasions when the
pressure on the discharge main is released suddenly, the entire sand bed might be
disturbed violently with disastrous results to the filter effluent.

They may be used for Single Village schemes where population is less as traditional
canal based scheme may be very expensive for small communities .

165
 CHAPTER - 15
COMPLETION PLAN AND REPORTS
When a project is commissioned and handed over, the history of the project has to be
maintained. The advantages are, firstly it will be helpful while carrying out O & M functions,
secondly it will act as a guide for future projects and thirdly it will examine the mistakes
committed, why happened and how to avoid in future projects. This chapter explains how
completion reports are to be prepared fulfilling the above requirements.
15.1 As Built Drawings/ Completion Drawings:
On execution of scheme components as per approved working/ construction
drawings, it is necessary to prepare completion plans. The as built drawings may have to be
prepared based on the construction drawings with modifications made while execution or
variations to suite site conditions. The completion drawing in other words are as built
drawings and it shall indicate all changes made during execution. These drawings and other
project data shall be prepared in electronic format in relevant software like Auto Cad MS
Excel etc to ensure easy storage and retrieval of the data. This data shall be stored in central
computer and can be accessible through internet to the authorized user .
Note down the modifications, variations, changes made while carrying out works on
the construction drawings with all site particulars for preparing as built drawing.
Site plan or location plan with distance, angles with respect to other permanent
objects for easy identification.
All plan dimensions as built at site, cross sections strata details in case of bore
well/ open well.
Alignment and location of pipe sizes indicating size, material of construction,
classification, depth at which it is laid, location of valves, types, sizes, material of
construction.
If no changes are made, the construction drawing shall be certified that work is
executed strictly as per the drawing and signed by Engineer-in-charge with seal
having date, name and designation.
If there is any change during execution then as built drawing is to be prepared to
reflect the change made and certified that work is executed as per this drawing.
15.2 Completion Report:
(a) The completion Report shall contain all the text information of the project that
may be required in future for reference. This will be useful for carrying out O&M
activities and while upgrading the scheme. The completion report shall have the
following information .
Name of work
- Estimated cost
- Name of the Implementing Office
- Name of Agency/ Contractor
- Worlk order No. and date
- Time stipulated for completion
- Date of commencement of work
- Date of completion of work
- Date of Handling over to VWSC
- Cost as per final Bill of contract
- Cost of completion (contract and other components if any)
166
b) Cost over runs:
List of all sub works of scheme to be furnished with costs in the following format to
indicate abstract of scheme.
Sr. Name of Sub work Cost as per Variation Reasons for
No. Estimate Completion (-) savings Variations
(+) Excess
1 Tube well
2. Pumpset and Piping
3. OHSR
4. Disinfections
Arrangement
5. Distribution

c) Time over runs

Sr. Name of Sub work Period of execution as Variation Reasons for
No. per (In weeks) Variations
Plan Execution

d) Comparative statement showing quantity, rates as per estimates and actual and
reasons thereof or variations.
Sr. Description As per Estimate/ As per Execution Qty. of item Item which
No work order which varied varied the
. by 25% amount by
25%
Qty Rate Amt Qty Rate Extra (-) Saving (-) Saving
Executed (tendered Items (+) excess (+) excess
rate)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Name of Sub work :

Authorization for Execution :
Sanction No. and date :
Work Order No. and date :
Name of executing agency and address :
e) Plan, Design and Implementation Issues:
Planning of various components of the projects are carried out based on the certain
ground and technical inputs. Engineering drawings are prepared following the plans. During
execution of the project, certain anomalies may have been experienced. If so, these issues
should be examined and possible cause for happening should be ascertained. The results of
these exercise should be used for planning, designing and implementing the future projects.

167
 During project cycle, there may be instances of problems/ delays faced by the
implementing authorities from contractors, community, other Government offices, etc. These
impediments should be analyzed and remedial actions be suggested for future projects.

For record purpose, following information be furnished.

f) Performance by Key Agencies

Track record of the key implementing agencies should be maintained in respect to
project execution. This will help in assessing the managerial and technical capabilities of the
agencies for subsequent reference. The suggested method is as below.
1. Contractors
(a) Adherence to Quality
(b) Adherence to Time schedule.
2. Support Agency
(a) Preparation of Estimate and its efficacy in execution.
(b) Quality Control measures adopted and results.
3. Gram Panchayat and VWSC
a) Maintenance of accounts
b) Timely Payment to Contractors
c) Involvement of Community during Planning and Implementation
d) Capability in handling O & M activities.

168
Annexure A (Refer Clause 2.5.1 A )

Calculation of Quanity of Bleaching Powder/ Sodium Hypocholorite

requirement

Qty of
Chlorine Chlorine Qty of
Water to
Type of strength dosage chemical
Sno be Remarks
chemical in required reqd in
chlorinated
percent in mg/lt gram
in litre
Bleaching Say
1 20 0.5 5000 12.5
Powder 13Gm
Bleaching Say
2 20 0.6 5000 15
Powder 15Gm
Bleaching Say
3 20 0.7 5000 17.5
Powder 18Gm
Bleaching Say
4 20 0.8 5000 20
Powder 20Gm
Sodium Say
5 9 0.5 5000 27.77778
Hpochlorite 28ML
Sodium Say
6 9 0.6 5000 33.33333
Hpochlorite 33ML
Sodium Say
7 9 0.7 5000 38.88889
Hpochlorite 39ML
Sodium Say
8 9 0.8 5000 44.44444
Hpochlorite 44ML
Note : Above table can be used to calculate quantity of chemical required for different
quantities of water to chlorinated . Alternatively following formula shall be used to
determine quantity of bleaching powder / Sodium Hypochlorite
Qty of bleaching powder / Sodium Hypochlorite= QxDx100/P/1000
Where :
Q= Qty of water to be chlorinated in liters
D= Chlorine dosage required at water works in mg/lt
P= Chlorine strength in percent

1
Annexure B (Refer Clause 2.1)

Design Standards for Rural Water Supply Schemes

Sn Item Existing Practice Proposed Norm

o in W/s Department in Technical Manual under
world Bank Project
ARP MNP NABARD
PROJECT
1 Per Capita 40 LPCD 70 LPCD 70 LPCD 70 Lpcd (40 ltrs for domestic
Water supply use and 30 ltr. for cattle use)
Rate for all types villages.
However if any habitation /
village wants to design water
supply scheme at higher per
capita water supply rate they
shall be allowed to do so with
the condition that it bear all
the incremental cost required
in addition to 10% share
2 Design Life 15 years 15 years 15 years 15 years
for Tube
Well and
machinery
3 Design Life Do Do Do 15 years
for Head
Works
Structure
4 Design life 15 years 30 years 30 years 30 years
Distrbution
systems and
Rising Main
5 Increase in 1.2285% 1.2285% 1.2285% Final population forecast.
Population as per as per as per Population forecast shall be
per Annum census census census done considering the
2001 2001 2001 following factors:
Trend of population
growth in the previous
decade (from 1991-2001
Census Figure or the latest
census )
Possibilities of village
growth due to factors such
as industrial projects and
other projects which
influence the growth of
population.

2
 Any special factors causing
sudden influx or migration
of population like proximity
to a city/ town.

6 Pumping 8 hours for 8 hours for 6 hours 6 hours in General but

Hours design design availability of electricity
population population should also be kept in mind
<15000 no <15000 no at the time of fixing the
16 hours 16 hours pumping hours
for design for design
population population
> 15000 > 15000
Pumping Pumping
time =16 time =16
hours hours
7 Pump 14X16 ft 14x16 ft 3.7mtx4.3 3.7x4.3 mt
Chamber mt
size
8 Over Head 30% of 30% of 50% of Capacity of OHSR shall be
service daily daily Daily calculated by Mass curve
Reservoir demand demand demand method keeping in view the
capacity for for realistic availability of
Pumping Pumping Electricity and water supply
Hours=8 Hours=8 hours . Normally in Rural
20% of 20% of areas of Punjab Electricity
daily daily is available in shifts on
demand demand rotation basis . PSEB
for for supplies electricity in
Pumping Pumping Morning shift, Evening shift
Hours= 16 Hours= 16 and Night Shift . Pumping
hours will vary as per
availability of electricity .
Hence before fixing the
capacity of OHSR mass
curve should be plotted for
all the three shifts pumping
of water and supply hours .
OHSR capacity should be
worked out for worst case
scenario.
9 Pumping Set VT / VT / Submersib Submersible Pump set
submersibl submersibl le Pump
e Pump set e Pump set set
10 Peak 2 times of 3 times of 3 times of

3
 demand average average average Usually water supply is
Factor daily daily daily made twice/thrice a day to
demand demand demand the village community at
the rate of 3 hrs each time
which is equal to 6 hrs and
Alternatively due to non-
availability of power in the
day time, the distribution
hours may be restricted to 4
hrs a day, . It may be further
kept in mind that demand of
water is more in the
morning shift which may be
1.5 2 times of the average
daily demand . Hence peak
factor for designing the
distribution system shall be
worked out as below:
Calculation of peak flow
rate for designing the peak
flow rate
Based on above following
peak factors are
reccomneded
Sn Water Peak
o Suppl Factort
y s
Hours
1 6 8
Hours
2 4 9
Hours
11 Minimum 5 mt 8mt 12 mt 12 mt
Terminal
Head
12 Unaccounte 3 mt 3 mt 3mt 3mt
d losses in
tees bends
and sluice
valves
13 Stand Post 1 for 250 1 for 250 Nil 1 for 150 persons of 15
persons of persons of years prospective
15 years 30 years population
prospectiv prospectiv
e e
population population

4
14 Provision of Nil Nil N/a For high level and low level
zoning in areas if difference in
distribution elevation is more than 4
network meters separate feeders
shall be provided . Pressure
reducing valves shall also
be provided to stop
excessive water supply to
low lying areas where
separate feeders has not
been provided .

15 Minimum Nil Nil 90 mm None

size of the
distribution
pipe
16 Distribution Manual Manual Manual Used standard computer
system calculation calculation calculation software
design using using using
method Hazen Hazen Hazen
Willima Willima Willima
formula formula formula
Terminal 12 mt
Head
17 Survey Manual Manual Manual Digital survey
18 Depth and Width Width Width The pipes shall be laid with
Width of min=75 min=75 min=75 a minimum cushion of 1.0
Trench cm or cm or cm or m. How ever in narrow
required to D+30 cm D+30 cm D+30 cm streets3-5 feet wide where
lay the pipe which ever which ever which ever no vehicular traffic is
is higher is higher is higher expected and digging deep
Depth = Depth = Depth = may cause danger to the
One meter One meter One meter stability of foundations of
cover cover cover adjoining structures it may
minimum minimum minimum be reduced to 60 cm .The
width of trench required to
lay PVC pipes shall be
outer diameter+30 cm and
wider trench shall only be
excavated near the coupler
joint . Practice of measuring
the uniform width of trench
shall be discouraged as for
laying PVC pipe a wider
trench is only required at
joints. It will reduce the

5
 damage to the brick paving
laid in the village and
reduce the cost of
excavation

19 Pipe AC/PVC AC/PVC AC/PVC PVC 6 Kg/cm^2

material
20 Water Nil Nil Nil Water quality to be checked
Quality test for pesticides and toxic
for Pesticide elements
for Toxicity
and
Pesticides
21 Disinfection Chlorinati Chlorinati Chlorinati Chlorination / Silver
system on using on using on using ionization
Bleaching Bleaching Bleaching
powder powder powder/
sodium
hypochlori
te
22 Tube well Once at Once at Once at Once at the time of
developmen the time of the time of the time of installation and after that
t installation installation installation every three years
23 Safe yield 60% of 60% of 60% of 60% of developed discharge
developed developed developed and reduce it by 30% to
discharge discharge discharge account for decline in
discharge with the passage
of time
24 Use Full Life of Various Components :
Masonry 50 years
and RCC
structures
Filter Beds 30 years
Percolation 15 years
wells
Tube Wells 15 years
and Their
Pump
Chambers
Electrical 15 years
Machinery
and Pumps
Design Standards specifically for Canal Based Schemes
25 Storage and Storage capacity- 15 days
Sedimentati with evaporation and
on Tank percolation losses assumed

6
 as 25% . The optimum
depth of the tank should be
15 ft (4.5 mt)
26 Inlet Sufficient to fill S&S Tank
Channel in 7 days . Its normal
capacity shall be = peak
factor x Daily demand
27 Suction and Normally of circular shape
Scour well of 1.5 mt diameter for
population less than 15000
And for population more
than 15000 its diameter =
2.5 meter
28 High level The storage capacity of
tank High level tank shall kept in
relation to filtration hours
29 Slow sand Rate of filtration = 2.5 kl
filter Bed per sq meter + 25% filter
area as stand bye . Filter
shall consist of 750mm-900
m Sand layer supported on
225mm-300 mm gravel .
The sand shall have
effective size of 0.3 mm and
Coefficient of Uniformity
Cu= 2.0
30 Clear Water
Reservoir

7
Annexure C -(Refer Clause 12.10 )
WATER TARIFF STRUCTURE
PUNJAB GOVERNMENT GAZATTE
(EXTRAORDINARY) Notification dt. 04.10.2002
Department of Public Health (B&R 2 branch)
No. 11/220/2002-6 B&R II/5773- Public Health Department is providing safe
drinking water in the rural area of the State. Water Supply is often interrupted by the
people which creates shortage of drinking water causing inconvenience to the general
public and problems to the Department for maintenance. To overcome these difficulties
and to ensure uninterrupted water supply in the rural areas, a system has been evolved
under which fine will be imposed on the offenders according to the nature of offence
committed by them. Accordingly, the Governor of Punjab is pleased to order the levy of
fine of different offences as under:-

Sr. Nature of offence Fine to be levied Authority to impose fine

No.
1. Cleaning of utensil Rs. 10 per offence Agency responsible for
at public post Operation & Maintenance
2. Washing of cloths Rs. 20 per offence Ditto
3. Bathing of animals Rs. 50 per offence Ditto

PUNJAB GOVT. GAZ (EXTRA) OCT, 4, 2002 (ASVN 12, 1924 SAKA)

Sr. No. Nature of offence Fine to be levied Authority to

impose fine
4 Creating hindrance Rs. 50 per offence Agency responsible
by ante-social for Operation &
elements for the Maintenance
collection of water
5 Installation of tullu Rs. 500 per offence & Ditto
pumps confiscation of tullu
pump
6 Tempering of water Rs. 500 per offence Ditto
supply line
7 Illegal water Rs. 1000 per offence & Ditto
connections confiscation of
pipe/material
2. The tullu pumps pipe material so confiscated will be disposed of through open
auction after the expiry of the period of three months and the revenue collected
will be deposited in the receipt head of the department.
Chandigarh
The 3rd October, 2002
Principal Secretary/ to Government of Punjab
Department of Public Health

8
 The Chief Engineer (RWS-South/North)
Public Health Department,
Patiala.

Memo No. 7/19/2001-6B&R-II/

Dated Chandigarh, the 23 December, 2002

Subject: Revision of user charges for repair and maintenance of Water Supply Schemes.

Reference on the subject noted above.

2. The Governor of Punjab is pleased to revise the Water Tariff structure for Private
Water Connection for households, drawing water from Public Stand Post and for
commercial establishment over a period of five years as under:-

a) Tariff for Rural Water Supply Schemes and Households drawing water from Public
Stand Post.

Sr. Year Monthly tariffs for private water Monthly tariff for
NO. connections households drawing
For normal For NABARD water from stand
schemes designed schemes designed @ posts
@ 40 lpcd 70 lpdc
1 2 3 4 5
1 2002-03 50 60 10
2 2003-04 50 60 10
3 2004-05 55 70 10
4 2005-06 55 70 15
5 2006-07 60 75 15

b) Commercial Establishment

i) The flat rate of Rs. 200/- per month per water connection from a commercial
establishment/shop situated either inside the village or on the link roads.
ii) The flat rate of Rs. 500/- per month per water connection from a commercial
establishment/shop situated on the National / State Highway.

3. This order will come into force from Ist January of every year.

Endst No. 7/19/2001-6B&R-II/ Dt. Chandigarh, the December 2002

A copy is forwarded to the following for information and necessary action:-

1) The Accountant General, Punjab, Chandigarh.
2) The Deputy Secretary, Finance (FE-IV Branch).

Deputy Secretary, Public Health

9
Annexure D :(Refer clause 6.7)

Guidelines for Selection, Installation and Maintenance of Domestic

Water Meters
1. Scope

1.1 This code covers the selection, installation and maintenance of inferential and semi-
positive water meteres conforming to IS: 779-1968*.

2. Selection
2.1 Water meters shall be selected according to flow to be measured and not necessarily
to suit a certain size of main. The following points shall govern the selection of meters:

a). The maximum flow shall not exceed the nominal capacity of the meter specified
in IS 779-1968*.

b). The continuous flow shall be not greater than the continuous running capacity
rating specified in IS: 779-1968*.

c). The minimum flow to be measured shall be within minimum starting flows
specified in IS: 779-1968*.

Inferential water meter has the same accuracy as the semi-positive type at higher flows: it
passes unfiltered water better than a semi-positive meter and is lower in cost.

Special care is necessary in selecting the most suitable meter where large rates of flow
may exist for short periods. The normal working flow shall be well within the continuous
running capacity specified in IS: 779-1968*. as high rates of flow over short period may
cause excessive wear if the meter chosen is too small for the duty.

Owing to the fine clearances in the working parts of meters, they are not suitable for
measuring water containing sand or similar foreign matter, and in such cases a filter or
dirt box of adequate effective area shall be fitted on the upstream side of the meter. It
should be noted that the normal strainer fitted inside a meter is not a filter and does not
prevent the entry of small particles, such as sand.

3. Installation

3.1 A meter shall not be run with free discharge to atmosphere, if the static pressure
on the main exceeds 10 m head of water, otherwise the meter is liable to be overloaded
and damaged. For hose connections and similar applications, there shall always be some
resistance on the downstream side of the meter.

A Meter shall be located where it is not liable to get severe shock of water hammer,
which might break the piston or damage the rotor, and the position shall be such that it is

10
always full of water; a recommended method of making connection to achieve the
purpose is showl1 in Fig. I. If the meter body or adjacent pipes become partially drained
of water, the accumulated air, when passed through the meter, is registered as water, and
may cause inaccuracies and perhaps damage. The inaccuracies may be more pronounced
in the case of inferential meters. In such situations suitable devices like air-release valve
may be fitted on the upstream side of the meter. In the case of intermittent water supply
system, where there are frequent changes of air locks, the piston of the semi-positive
meter often breaks. In such a case, it is advisable to ensure that the top of the meter is
below the level of the communication pipe.

Semi-positive meters may be fixed in any position, with the dials facing upwards or
sideways, and they may be installed in horizontal or vertical pipe runs without affecting
wearing properties of accuracy at normal service flows. Where backward flows are
anticipated, reflux valves are recommended to be provided. A stop valve should be
provided on the upstream side as shown in Fig. 1 to isolate the meter whenever
necessary.

Inferential meters shall be installed in position for which they are designed; in the case of
meters conforming to IS: 779-1968*, they shall be placed horizontally with dial facing
upwards. However, where meters are to be installed in vertical pipelines, details shall be
as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser.

Turbulent flow of water affects the accuracy of the meter. There shall, therefore, be
straight lengths of pipes upstream and downstream of meter for an equivalent length of
ten times the nominal diameter of the pipe.

Meters liable to damage by frost shall be suitably protected. It is possible to incorporate

frost protection devices in certain types of meters, if ordered. Several devices are
adopted, the most common among them being a collapsible metal ring which, under frost
pressure, allows the top plate carrying the mechanism to lift and thus safeguard the body,
or a metal disc in the body which gives way under pressure. These devices have the
following disadvantages.

a) The damaged ring or plate requires immediate replacement in order to stop

wastage and restore water supply to consumer;'

b) Water runs to waste till the meter is attended to, which means loss of revenue;
and

c) Damage is discovered only after thawing has started.

3.6.1 A more satisfactory arrangement consists of. a method whereby the proportionate
increase in bulk of ice, which is approximately 14 percent, is accommodated by the
provision of pads of special quality
expanded natural rubber.

11
No arrangement, however, is regarded completely satisfactory, and for this reason, the
general practice is to install meters well out of the way of frost. Meters should be fixed
below ground level if they are located outside the building or, if in exposed portion inside
the building, the bodies of the meters should be protected with some form of lagging; in
the case of meters installed below ground, depth at which the meter should be fixed to
afford frost protection will depend on the nature of the soil.

3.7 Before installing a meter, the section of line to be metered shall be thoroughly
flushed to remove all foreign matter and, when starting up, control valves shall be opened
slowly until the line is full, as a sudden discharge may damage the meter.

3.8 Water meters may be installed underground, either in the carriage way outside the
premises or at a convenient place within the premises. In order to enable the meters to be
accessible for periodical reading, inspection, testing and repairs, they shall be housed in
water meter boxes conforming to IS: 2104-1962*. Top of the meter box shall be placed at
a slightly higher level than the surrounding ground level so as to prevent ground water
entering in and flooding the chamber during rains.

3.8.1 If it is required to be located in a private passage leading to the premises, proper

precautions shall be taken consistent with safety.

3.9 The meters and connecting pipes shall be strongly supported for protection of the
meters and to avoid noisy vibration.

4. MAINTENANCE

4.1 Periodic Testing of Water Meters

4.1.1 The period over which water meters retain their o-overall accuracy depends largely
on the quality of water being measured and to a certain extent on. Other factors which
cause excessive wear or inaccurate registration. The only way to determine whether any
specific meter is operating efficiently is to test it and the meter maintenance programme
should aim at establishing the frequency for testing every meter in service. From an
individual customer's viewpoint, meters should be tested to protect him against meter
inaccuracy that could result in over charges, while from the point of view of the water
undertaking; it should be to protect the undertaking against the revenue loss from under
registration by meters. No definite recommendations could be given in this regard as the
cconoll1k' results depend on such factors as the rates charged for water, the effect of
water of different quality on meters, local conditions under whole they operate and the
cost of removal, testing, repairing and re-installation proper economic balance should be
attained.

Irrespective of these considerations, the meters should be tested at least once in

two years.

4.1.2 In case of inferential water meters, water is passed even if the meter stops
registering, whereas, in the case of semi-positive meters, the water supply would be shut

12
off when the meter stops registering. From the waters supply would be shut off when the
meter and having regard to the seasonal fluctuations in the demand for water supply of a
consumer, it is possible to determine whether the meter requires to be removed for test,
being suspected of running slow.

4.2 When a meter is removed from the line for whatever reason, opportunity should
be taken to see that it is clean and functioning properly before it is re-installed. It should
also be tested for accuracy and reset to zero before installation.

13
Annexure E (Refer clause 6.7)

Specification for Water Meters (Bulk Type)

Foreword

0.1 This Indian Standard (Third Revision) was adopted by the Indian Standards
Institution on 27 February 1981, after the draft finalized by the Sanitary Appliances
and Water Fitting Sectional Committee had been approved by the Civil Engineering
Division Council.

0.2 This standard was first published in1963 and the first and second revisions were
issued in 1968 and 1973 respectively. A third revision of the standard has been taken
up to review the standard and incorporate changes found necessary in the light of
comments received from manufacturers and user during the course of implementation
of the standard.

0.2.1 In this revision, minimum thickness of the liner for enclosed type water meter has
been incorporated to ensure life of the body of water meters.

0.3 This standard contains clauses 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 4.12 and 6.2, which permit the purchaser
to use his option for selection to suit his requirements. This standard also contains
clause 8.2.2, which requires agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.

0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is
compiled with, the final value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test
or analysis, shall be rounded of in accordance with IS: 2-1960*. The number of
significant places retained in the rounded off value should be the same as that of the
specified value in this standard.

1. Scope

1.1 This standard covers bulk type water meters of the following types:

a). Vane-wheel (impeller) type water meters form 50 to 300 mm

b). Helical type water meters from 50 to 500 mm.

14
2. Terminology

2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following definitions shall happy.

2.1 Meter Casing - The outer casing in which the entire meter mechanism is
housed.

2.2 Body The part of the meter, which the runner and the transmission gear
train of the water meter. Some parts of the body may be integral with the
casing.

2.3 Registration Box The part of the meter casing which houses the
registration device.

2.4 Cap The part of the meter casing body to which is fitted the dial cover
and the lid.

2.5 Lid The tope cover, which is hinged to the cap with a view to protecting
the transparent dial cover.

2.6 Registration Device The unit, which comprises the recording gear train
and the indicating device consisting of a cyclometer type counter or
pointer on a dial or a combination of both. It registers in suitable
volumetric units the quantity of water, which has passed through the
meter.

2.7 Vane Wheel Type Meter Meter whose runner or impeller is mounted
on a vertical spindle, which has several vanes symmetrically spaced round
its axis. The water impinges on the runner over a part or the whole of its
circumference.

2.8 Helical Type Meter Axial flowmeter whose runner is provided with a
number of vanes forming a multi-threaded helix.

2.9 Water Meter, Dry Deal Type - Meter in which the counter mechanism is
isolated from water flowing through the meter.

15
2.10 Water Meter, Wet Dial Type Meter in which the complete counter unit
is in contact with water flowing through the meter.

Nominal Size

3.1 The water meters shall be of the following nominal sizes:

MM MM

50 250

80 300

100 350

150 400

200 500

3.1.1 The nominal size of water meters shall be denoted by the bore of their inlet.

4. Materials and manufacture

4.1 General - Water meters and their parts, especially parts coming in continuous
contact with water, shall be made of materials resistant to corrosion and shall be
non-toxic and non-tainting; where cost iron is used, it shall be protected suitably
against corrosion. Use of dissimilar metals in contact under water shall be
avoided, as far as possible, to minimize electrolytic corrosion. Information
required to be supplied by the purchaser with the enquire and order is given in
Appendix A.

4.2.1 Casing The casing of the meter shall be made from cast iron conforming
to grade FG 200 of IS: 210-1978* or bronze conforming to grade 2 of IS:

16
 318-1962* or brass conforming to Grade 3 of IS: 292-1961* grade cuzn
40 of IS: 1264-1965.

4.2.2 Body The body of the water meter shall be made of bronze conforming
to grade 2 of IS: 318-1962* or brass conforming to grade 3 of 292-1961*
or Grade CuZn 40 of IS : 1264-1958. in the case of enclosed type water
meters as the liner shall be made of minimum 1.5 mm thick brass sheet
conforming to IS : 410-1977.

4.2.2.1 The body shall be free from all manufacturing and processing
defects, such as blow holes and spongy structures and shall not be
repaired by plugging, welding or by the addition of material. The
integral shape of the body shall ensure smooth flow of water and
easy dismantling.

4.3 Connections The water meter shall be provided with flanges at both the
ends, the internal diameter of which shall be equal to the nominal size of the
meter. The flanges shall be machined flat, that is, without a raised joint face.
The dimensions and drilling of the flanges shall be in accordance with IS :
1538 (Part IV) 1976 and IS : 1538 (Part VI) 1976**. Tolerances on
dimensions and drillings shall be in accordance with IS : 1538 (Part I) 1`976
**. For meters of 50 mm size the dimensions and drilling of flanges and
tolerances shall be in accordance.

4.4 Screws, Studs, and Nuts Screws, Studs and Nuts shall be of mild steel,
brass or some other corrosion resistant material. Where fasteners are likely to
be in contact with water, they shall be made of brass conforming to IS: 318-
1962* or of stainless steel conforming to designation 07 or 18 Ni 9 of IS

17
18
4.5 Registration Box The registration box shall be made of the same
material as specified for body in 4.2.2.

4.6 Cap - The cap shall be made of the same material as specified for body in
4.2.2. The cap shall be so designed and fixed to the registration box as to
avoid entry of water and dirt. The transparent window, which covers the
dial, shall be inserted from the inside into the cap. The protective lid shall
be secured by a robust hinge or other suitable methods of robust
construction.

4.6.1 Where required by the purchaser, provision shall be made to lock the lid to
the registration box. The provision shall be such that the lock may be
conveniently operated from the top. - Where the provision is designed for
use in conjunction with padlocks, the hole provided for padlock shall be of
diameter not less than 4 mm.

4.6.2 Where so required, for dry type water meter, the transparent window
covering the dial shall be provided with a wiper on the inner side for
wiping off condensed water.

4.7 Strainer - Strainers shall be made of a material which is not susceptible to

electrolytic corrosion. They shall be of plastic or other corrosion. resistant
materials. They shall be rigid, easy to remove and clean and shall be fitted
on the inlet side of the water meter. The strainer shall have total area of
holes not less than twice the area of the nominal inlet bore of the pipe to
which the meter is connected. Where strainer is installed outside the
meter, it shall be at such a distance that it does not affect the accurate
functioning of the meter.

4.8 Runners (Impellers)

19
4.8.1 The runner shall be of tensile brass conforming to IS: 320-1962*, stainless
steel conforming to designation 07 Cr 18 Ni 9 of IS: 1570 (Part V )-1972t
or nickel alloys conforming in IS: 4131-1967*.

4.8.2 Runner of the meter shall be of ebonite, vulcanite, or suitable plastic, bronze
conforming to Grade 2 of IS :318-1962, stainless steel conforming to
designation 07 Cr 18 Ni 9 or IS: 1570 (Part V )-1972t or nickel alloy
conforming to IS: 4131-1967;. It. shall be accurately balanced. Runner
shall be durable and shall work with as low frictional resistance as
possible.

4.9 Runner Chamber - In the case of vane-wheel type meters, the runner
chamber shall be of brass conforming to Grade 3 of IS : 292-1961*.
Bronze conforming to Grade 2 of IS: 318-1 962t. Stainless steel
conforming to designation 07 Or 18 Ni 9 of IS: 1570 (Part V)-1972: or
nickel alloy Conforming to IS: 4131-1967. The runner chamber shall be
rigid and shall not change its form as a result of internal stresses or with
use.

4.10 Gears - Gears shall be 10 constructed as to tully and smoothly mesh with
each other. and shall be firmly fitted on their shaft. Gears coming in
contact with water shall be of stainless Steel conforming to designation 07
Or 18 Ni 9 of IS: 1570 (Part. V)-1972: Or nickel alloy conforming to IS:
4131-1967. In the helical type meters, the worm gears may be fined on a
shaft and the worm wheel shall be enclosed and protected against the
incursion of solid particles.
4.11 Bearings- Impeller bearings shall be of agate, sapphire, graphite filled
nylon or graphite filled ebonite suitable ground and polished. The shape of
the impeller bearing shall be such as to prevent the penetration of particles
of sand and to preclude the deposit of anything in solution or suspension
in water and to facilitate the washing away of such deposits by water flow.

20
 The shafts of the gears shall revolve freely in their bearings. The length of
the bearing shall ensure their effective operation.

4.12 Counting Mechanism - The pointer shall be made of sheet brass

conforming to' 410-197711 or suitable plastic. The counter shall be of
circular multi-pointer pattern with all pointers preferably reading
clockwise. The indicating device may also be of the straight reading
cyclometer type counter or a combination of pointer and the counter. The
rollers of the cyclometer counter shall be made of nickel or nickel-plated
brass or plastic specially suitable for the purpose and shall be self
lubricating. The external numbering shall be such that it will not fade
away under continued use.

4.12.1 The range of registration shall be as given in Table 2.

21
4.13 Dial- The dial shall be of vitreous enamel, copper or suitable plastic,
ensuring indestructible marking and good legibility. The unit of
measurement namely, 'litre' or 'kiIolitre" shall be marked on the dial 81
'LITRES or : KILOLITRES in boldface; the unit, cubic metre (m2) may
also be used in place of kilolitre.

4.14 Sealing - Sealing holes shall be provided and the meter shall be sealed in
such a manner as to render it inaccessible to the 'measuring unit, including
registration box and cap without breaking the seal. The sealing wire shall
be rust proof such as tinned copper.

4.15 Regulator - Every meter shall be provided with either an external or an

internal regulator. The external regulator shall be accessible from outside
to be operated by a suitable key without dismantling the meter and
protected by a sealed cover. The internal regulating device shall not be
accessible from outside.

4.16 Location of Serial Number - The serial number of the meter shall be
clearly indicated in any suitable place except the lid.

Performance Requirements
5.1 Temperature The meter shall be suitable for use with water up to 450C.
5.1.1 Temperature Suitability Test The water meter shall be
immersed in a water-bath maintained at 45 10C for 10 h.
afterwards it should be checked for flow and accuracy tests.

5.2 Hydrostatic Test Meters shall satisfactorily withstand a pressure of 1.6 MPa
(16 KGF/CM2).

5.3 Capacity Ratings for Water meters

22
5.3.1 Nominal Capacity or short period rating Vane wheel water meters shall be
capable of giving discharges not less than as given in without the headless
exceeding 10 m within the meter. The helical meters shall be capable of give
discharges not less than as given in without the headless exceeding 3 m
within the meter.

5.3.2 Recommend Capacities for Intermediate Flows Vane-wheel water meters

shall be capable of giving discharges not less than as given in Table 4
without the head loss exceeding 3 m within the meter; helical meters shall
be capable of giving discharges not less than as given in Table 4 without
the headloss exceeding I m within the meter.

5.3.3 The headloss within meters shall be measured in accordance with the
method given in Appendix B.

5.4 Minimum Starting Flow - The minimum flow at which the meters start
registering shall be as given in Table 5.

5.5 Metering Accuracy - The accuracy at lower limit of flow shall be calculated at
one-thirtieth of the nominal capacities of water meters given in Table 3; at the
lower limit of flow, the metering accuracy shall be 2 percent for both types
of water meters. The same accuracy shall he complied with at least up to
intermediate flows specified in Table 4.

23
 6. FROST PROTECTION DEVICES

6.1 Meters liable to be damaged by frost shall be protected with suitable frost
protection devices. Several devices are adopted and the following, which have
been found to give satisfactory performance, are given as typical examples:

a) Provision of pads of special quality rubber which accommodate the increase in

bulk of water when it freezes; and

b) Provision of collapsible metal ring which under frost pressure allows the
top plate carrying the mechanism to lift and so safeguard the body, or a metal
disc in the body which gives way under pressure. It should be noted that the
damaged ring or plate requires immediate replacement to restore water supply
to user or to stop waste. .

6.2 The purchaser shall specify with his order whether he requires frost protection
device.

7. MARKING
7.1 Each water meter shall be marked with the following information: a) Manufacturer's
name or trade-mark,
b) Nominal size of the meter, and
c) Direction of flow of water on b9th sides of the meter.

7.1.1 each water meter (with or without strainer) may also be" marked with the ISl
Certification Mark.

NOTE - The use of the 151 Certification Mark is governed by the provision of the
Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks) Act and the Rules and
Regulations made thereunder. The ISI mark on products covered by an Indian
standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced to comply with the
requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing

24
and quality control, which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the
producer. 151 marked products are also continuously checked by 151 for
conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under
which a licence for the use of the 151 Certification Mark may be granted to
manufacturers or processors, may be. obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.

8. TESTS

8.1 Classification of Tests - Tests shall be classified into three groups, namely (a)
production routine tests, (b) type tests, and (c) acceptance tests.

8.1.1 Production Routine Tests -. These tests are carried out on each and every
meter to check the requirements, which are likely to vary during
production.

8.1.2 Type Tests - These tests are carried out to prove conformity to the
requirements of the relevant specification. These are intended to check the
-general quality and design of a given type of meter (see 8.4 ). Once a
meter has undergone type tests, any major or essential alterations, which
the manufacturer intends to make, shall be reported to the testing authority
and further type tests shall be carried out in accordance with the procedure
laid down in this standard.

8.1.3 Acceptance Tests - 'tests carried out on samples selected from a. lot for the
purposes of acceptance of the lot.

8.2 Samples for Tests

8.2.1 Type Tests - Two meters in the case of 50 mm size and one meter in the
case of 80 mm size and above shall be sent along with 4 copies of the
manufacturer's detailed specification together with figures for the loss of head

25
 and accuracy curves to the recognized testing authority for the purpose of type
test. The samples shall be picked up at random from stock or routine factory
production.

8.2.2 Acceptance Tests - The number of samples shall be agreed to between the
manufacturer and the purchaser.

8.3 Production Routine Test - Production routine tests shall consist of:

a) Hydrostatic test ( set 5.2 ), and

b) Tests conducted requirements to determine the following performance
requirements

1) Recommended capacity for intermediate flows (set 5.3.2and Non: given

below),
2) Minimum starting flows (see 5.4), and'
3) Metering accuracy (see 5.5).

8.4 Type Tests - Besides all the production routine tests outlined in 8.3, the type
tests shall comprise those given in 8.4.1 and 8.4.2.

8.4.1 Construction - The meter shall be dismantled completely to its

component parts and checked for conformity with regard to
dimensions and tolerances with this standard; in the case of meters of
50 mm size, only one meter need be dismantled. A study of the
details of assembly shall be made on matters, such as case of
assembly, absence of riveted or turned over parts, forced fitting and
liability of, parts to break during dismantling and assembly.

8.4.2 Flow Test - The meter (both the meters in the case of 50 mm - shall

26
 then be subjected to the flow test to measure the following:

a) Loss of head at nominal capacity and recommended

capacity at intermediate flows,
b) Minimum starting flows, and
c) Metering accuracy.

NOTE 1 - Before the meter is subjected to the flow test it shall be run and brought
to normal condition by passing through them water at intermediate flow value for
a period of two hours. -

NOTE 2 - Type test certificate may be made available in lieu or' flow test at
manufacturer's premises.

8.4.2.1 Results of the type tests shall be reported in the form given in Appendix C.

APPENDIX A
Clause 4.1)

INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE PURCHASER

WITH THE ENQUIRY AND ORDER

A-I. The following information shall be supplied by the purchaser with the
enquiry and orders:

a) Nominal size of meter required;

b) Type of meter required, namely, vane-wheel or helical;
c) Provision for locking, whether required or not;
d) Type of counter required, namely:
1) Circular multipointer pattern,
2) Straight reading cyclometer type, or

27
 3) Combination of pointer and counter;
e) Frost protection device required or not;
f) Strainer required or not;
g) Wiper required or not; and
h) Wet or dry dial required.

28
 APPENDIX 8
(Clause 5.3.3)

METHOD FOR DETERMINATION Of' HEADLOSS IN

WATER METERS

B-1. DETAILS

B-I.I Pressure gauges or manometer shall be fixed upstream and

downstream of the water meter under test. The inlet and outlet
of the water meter shall each be provided with a straight pipe of
internal diameter equal to the nominal size of the meter and
having a length equal to at least 10 times its diameter on the
upstream or inlet side and a straight length of at least times its
diameter on the downstream or outlet side, free from tees,
bends, valves, etc, and the meter in no ease shall freely
discharge into the atmosphere. When discharging water at the
specified rates the pressure drop shall be noted which shall be
the headloss at the corresponding flows. A typical arrangement
for measurement of headloss is shown.

TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR MEASUREMENT OF HEADLOSS OF W'ATER

METERS

B-1.2 The regulating valve shall be situated at a distance not less than. 40
times the diameter of the pipe from the inlet end of the water meter. When
the feed of the water is through a pump instead of through an overhead tank;
the pump shall be situated and where required suitable damping devices,
such as air vessels or automatic pressure Switches, shall he so provided that

29
the pulsation in the flow water through the meter is reduced to the minimum

APPENDIX C (Clause 8.4.2.1)

TYPE TEST ON WATER METERS

Name of the manufacturer - ______________________________

Type designation - ______________________________

Nominal size - ______________________________

30
 Annexure F (Refer clause 8.5.2)
COMARASION OF DISINFECTION SYSTEM
(BASED ON ELECTRO-CHLORINATION AND SILVER
IONIZATION)

In the rural water supply schemes, primarily the disinfection of drinking water,
both for tube well and canal based schemes is done by bleaching powder. For this
purpose, either a cheap type or electro magnetic chlorinators are used. In a few schemes,
sodium hypo chlorite in liquid form is used. In town water supply schemes like Nangal,
Anandpur Sahib and Mohali, which are maintained by DWSS, liquid chlorine is used.
The operation of mixing of bleaching powder and regulation of chlorinated solution in
the distribution system is done by a pump operator or a mali cum chowkidar at the site.
But it has been observed that chlorination is not properly and regularly done. The reasons
are:

Non availability of fresh bleaching powder on regular basis to the field staff.
Storage of fresh bleaching powder is a problem as it losses its strength.
Chlorinators are not in working order.
Laxity on the part of field staff as the chlorination process involves daily
chores.
Difficulties in calculating and monitoring exact dose of bleaching powder for
maintaining minimum residual chlorine at tail end.

Further, it has also been noticed that no proper record is maintained for regular
dosing of bleaching powder and periodical checking of residual chlorine by the field
staff. All activities of chlorination of water supply are at the mercy of a pump operator or
other deputed staff. The picture is more alarming where single village schemes have been
handed over to the Panchayats. In majority of cases, Panchayats are not collecting water
charges from the consumers thus bleaching powder is not arranged and made available
for disinfection. This has resulted into total stopping of chlorination and may lead to
some epidemic. Even for the schemes where the O&M has been handed over to the
Panchayats, the department needs to keep regular check to ensure that properly treated
and disinfected water is supplied.
The evaluation and efficacy of drinking water disinfections by silver ionization
method was conducted by Industrial Toxicology Research Centre, Lucknow (ITRC). This
research centre is the premier Institution under Govt. of India and is multidisciplinary
research institute in the field of Industrial and Environmental toxicology. ITRC has
accreditation of National Accreditation Board for testing and Calibration Laborites
(NABL), department of Science Technology, India for chemical and biological testing. A
silver ionization plant is installed for disinfections of drinking water in a tube well at
HAL, Lucknow. The water disinfected for this tube well was evaluated for: -

31
 Bacterial contamination and other physico-chemical characteristics in post
treated water
To study the efficacy of silver ionization over a period of 51 hours after
treatment
To suggest the suitability of silver ionization method viz a viz other
conventional methods for disinfection of drinking water.

RESULTS AND CONCLUSIONS

Bacterial disinfection efficacy was 100% even at high level of E-coli

(4000 to 5000/ml)
Silver ions remain in water even after 51 hours after ionization without any
significant loss.
No change in physico-chemical characteristics in post treated water.
Silver ionization is safe, consumer friendly and reliable method over
conventional drinking water disinfections such as chlorine.

ADVANTAGES OF SILVER IONIZATION OVER CONVENTIONAL

CHLORINATION
1. In silver ionization system the disinfections of water with silver ions start
simultaneously with pumping of water whereas in conventional chlorination, chlorinated
bleaching powder solution is to be prepared before hand. This may not be practicable for
following reasons:-
Bleaching powder may not be available at site
Due to erratic power supply, the pumping of water is done by field staff at odd
hours without chlorination
Chlorinators are not in working condition
2. Chlorination of water has many drawbacks like chlorine smell, generation of
carcinogenic by-products, low residual effects, corrosion of metal parts of chlorinators,
pipe line and specials whereas, silver ionization has advantages like high residual effects,
odourless and non-corrosive.
3. Conventional Chlorination kills bacteria whereas silver ionization effectively
destroys viruses, bacteria, spores and fungi. Thus it helps in complete disinfections of
water.
4. The regulation of silver ionization is automatic. Chlorination regulation depends
on strength of bleaching powder and is totally manual.
5. The initial capital cost of silver ionization plant is comparatively high but running
cost is less than the conventional chlorination and highly dependable.

In view of above it is recommended that disinfections of drinking water with

silver ionization should be introduced in all new NABARD and World Bank schemes.

32
Meanwhile at least one such plant may be installed in each district on a scheme and water
quality of such schemes monitored.
Performance Study for Silver Ionization Plant installed at W/S/S Kasba Rurki
(Bahadurgrah) Distt. Paiala:
It is also pointed out that one such plant is already installed at w/s/s Bahadurgarh,
Distt. Patiala under RWS Division, Rajpura. The silver ionization plant is running
satisfactorily from the last more than one year. It has been experienced that this
technology is safe, effective, natural, gives good taste and is a sure method of disinfection
of water as the silver ions from the silver electrode automatically are injected in the
distribution system as and when the water is pumped from the tube well. The
concentration of silver ions can be controlled depending upon the quantity of water.
Testing of residual silver ions is as simple as for residual chlorine which uses simple
device called Chloroscope. (Orthotolodine test-OT test). The Rapid Silver Ion Test Kit
for testing silver ions in water is easy to use. The plant is easy to operate and requires
little or no maintenance. The silver electrode completes a life of about nine months
before it needs replacement. The bacteriological test of treated water was got done from
Research Centre DWSS laboratory, Patiala on 24-10-2005. The result showed that water
was potable with no plate count (Colonies/ml.) and no Coloform organism (MPN/100ml).
The residual silver ions were also checked at the various consumer points for verifying its
efficacy. It was found that the residual silver ions were adequately present in all the
distribution system including the tail end, highest level consumer point and also in the
thickly populated area.
COMPARISON OF VARIOUS DISINFECTION SYSTEMS
Sr.No. Parameters Silver Chlorination UV KMnO4
Ionization radiations
1 Harmful to Eyes? No. Yes Yes Yes
2 Irritating to skin? No. Yes Yes Yes
3 Bleaching hair? No. Yes Yes No
4 Explosive, unsafe? No. Yes No Yes
5 Dangerous to store? No. Yes No Yes
6 Corrosive to pipelines? No. Yes Yes Yes
7 Evaporates? No. Yes No No
8 Toxic to landscaping? No. Yes No Yes
9 Unpleasant smell? No. Yes No Yes

To further see the various benefits with installing of Silver Ionization

Plant on Tube wells such as smooth running of water supply scheme with proper
disinfection having residual effect in water for more then 48 hours and no regular man
power is required to running of these plants.

TENDER SPECIFICATION

33
 for

DISINFECTION SYSTEM BASED ON SILVER IONIZATION

TECHNOLOGY.

Supply of water disinfection equipments with rust proof corrosion free stainless Steel

water chamber confirming to SS 304 for disinfecting drinking water with discharge

varying from 5000 lph to 100000 lph with following technical specifications :

S. Discharge of No. of Inner Dia of Life of Electrode in

No. water in LPH Electrode Electrode Million Litres @ dosage
Chambers Chamber of 0.01 ppm

1. 5,000 1 38 mm 10
LPH
2. 15,000 LPH 1 50 mm 15
3. 25,000 LPH 1 50 mm 40
4. 50,000 LPH 2 50 mm 80
5. 1,00,000 2 75 mm 160
LPH

A. CONTROL

The control should work on a single phase 220 V/50 Hz power supply and should
be housed in a metallic box of 18 gauge thickness box of ABS material. The box should
be fully powder coated and weather proof. It should have a seven segment display with
display driver. The equipment should be capable of working continuously for 24 hours
and 365 days a year and should meet following requirements.
i. The device should use the micro processor based digital technology.
ii. The equipment should automatically Switch ON when the pump is switched ON
iii. The equipment should automatically Switch OFF when the pump stops.
iv. The power ON Switch should get ON when the pump starts.
v. The Pump Active signal should ON when the pump starts running.

34
 vi. The booster pump should ON when the pump starts. (Booster pump to be
supplied should be IS 8472)
vii. The Water should flow through the flow meter and it should be indicated by the
rotation of the wheel. Flow meter should be as per IS : 779.
viii. It should have a seven segment display for setting the actual flow in the
pumping main.
ix. The dosage should automatically be set when the LED is set for the required
discharge. The LED set should stay constant even when the power goes and
comes back again.
x. The Control should indicate SIGNAL when there is accumulation of dirt/scale
formation on the electrode.
xi. The control should indicate SIGNAL when the electrode is nearing
completion.
xii. The control should give a BEEP sound when there is a short circuit of electrode.

B. WATER CHAMBER.

i. The water Chamber must be Constructed of Stainless Steel and should only use
stainless steel casting with SS 304 pipes.
ii. The size of stainless steel chamber and no. of chambers should be as specified in
the Technical Data Coloumn.
iii. The chambers must be non-corrosive and should not leave any harmful by
products.
iv. Chambers shall be made of stainless steal 304 casting material and should have
single Chamber or double chamber as per capacity of the silver ionization plant.
v. Water chamber should have high quality Ball Valves for easy operation.

C. ELECTRODES.

35
i. The electrodes should be fixed on anti corrosive material.
ii. The composition of Electrode should be Non Toxic and hazard free.
iii. The electrode should under go proper metallurgical treatment and Chemical
treatment for dissipation of minute ionic disinfectant.
iv. The electrode life should be mentioned in million litres.

v. The electrode life should be as mentioned in the Technical Data Coloumn.

vi. The disinfectant should able to kill bacteria etc..
vii. The residual effect of the disinfectant must be present for atleast 2 days.
viii. The electrode assembly must be able to be removed and fixed by lay men.
ix. Necessary spanner must be provided.
x. The disinfectant must not leave any bad Smell or taste.

D. TOTAL ENCLOSURE.

i. The equipment should have all safety features for Voltage fluctuation and
change indirection of current.
ii. The equipment should have Miniature Circuit breaker of reputed make with
necessary fuses in the control box.
iii. The Control panel, Water Chamber, electrodes and controls Switches must be
placed in a powder coated MS fabricated box of 20 gg .
iv. It should have locks with universal key for safety.
v. The equipment must be wall mountable or fixed on a platform bed.
vi. The equipment must have a multicore chord with plug for plugging, in socket.
vii. Necessary instructions for operation and maintenance must be pasted inside the
equipment.

E. OVERALL.

i. Equipment should be guaranteed for a minimum period of 1 year.

ii. The disinfected water should not contain any coliform as per IS 10500 even at
the tail end and should pass the laboratory test.
iii. The residual effect should be present at the tail end also.

36
 iv. Test kit must be supplied along with the equipment to do a minimum of 10
tests.

Terms & Conditions :-

1. The tenderer must have approval Government of India or any other Government of
India ITRC (Industrial Toxicology Research Centre, Lucknow) or recognized
institute, regarding their technology for disinfection of water through silver
ionization.

2. Installation charges of each size of plant capacity alongwith all erection material, site
requirements, tools etc. will be quoted separately for the different capacities of the
plant. Electricity connection and proper space for installation will be provided by the
department.

3. Prices of electrode for each capacity of plant will be quoted separately.

4. The tenderer must provide the testing kit to check on site silver Ions in the water with
each capacity of plants to carry out minimum 10 test and the prices of such test kit
will also be quoted separately.

5. Tenderer must quote the prices of each capacity of plant separately.

6. The plant to have minimum 12 months guarantee / warranty from the date of supply
against all manufacturing defects.

7. The supplier shall also be required to submit an undertaking for maintenance support
during guarantee period. The supplier shall also be required to submit an undertaking
for guaranteeing of availability of spares for a minimum period of three years.

8. The Supplier or the Principal Manufacturer should have supplied these Products to
State Government or Central Government organizations along with performance
report from the concerned department.

9. Any damage to the equipment during transit or installation shall be contractors

responsibility.

10. Complete list of the equipment parts, detailed literature indicating the specifications,
makes, working of the apparatus and installation instructions shall accompany the
offer.

37
11. The tenderer must provide authority letter of the principal manufacturer and signed by
the Managing Director, Partner, and Proprietor of the company.

COST COMPARISON FOR FLOW RATE OF 100000

LPH
S.NO WORKING DETAILS Quantity Units
1 Rate of flow in Ltrs per hour (LPH) 100000 LPH
2 No of pumping hours per day 8 HOURS
3 Daily requirement of water in Liter = 800000 LITERS
4 Cost of Sodium Hypochlorite solution in 20 Rs.per Ltr.
Rs.per Ltr.(10%)
5 Dosage of chlorine required of source for 2 PPM
drinking water in PPM
6 Quantity of Sodium Hypo required to 16 LITERS
maintain 2 ppm of Chlorine at source
7 Cost of disinfection using Sodium Hypo=Rs 320 Rs per
20x2.4 800000 Ltr.
8 Cost of Silver ionization 128.00 Rs per
800000 Ltr.
S.no Description Chlorination Silver
Ionisation
Amount in Rs. Amount in
Rs.
1 CAPITAL COST 10,000.00 139,545.00
2 Cost of INBUILT DISINFECTANT 25,600.00
ELECTRODE
3 Consumable cost per day for 50,000 lpH 320.00 128.00
x 8 hours.

38
4 Consumable Cost per year 116,800.00 46,720.00
5 Total Cost (capital Cost and consumable 126,800.00 186,265.00
cost) for One year. (1+4+5)
6 Saving per year in consumable cost without 70,080.00
adding Capital cost.
7 Electrode Life in Million Ltrs.( Approx) 160.00
8 Electrode Life in days( Approx) 200.00
9 Cost at the time of installation 0 10,000.00 139,545
10 Cost after 3years 3 360400 279705
11 Cost after 5 years 5 594000 373145
12 Cost after 10 years 10 1178000 606745
13 Cost after 15years 15 1762000 840345
14 Saving after 15 years including Capital cost. 921655
15 Dosing required Per Day Replacement of
electrode after
consumption of
30 million ltr
water
16 Dosing required 2-3 years.max 15-20 years
minimum
17 Labour required for mixing Hypo Solution Yes No
18 Corrosion Yes No
19 Automation No Yes
20 Running cost per 1000 Litres of water in 0.40 0.16
Paise

39
ANNEXURE G (Refer Chapter 12)
OPERATION AND MAINTAINENECE
DETAILS REQUIRING ATTENTION TO PREVENT OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS IN
PUMPING
Guide Lines for Maintenance Centrifugal Pumps :

FOUNDATION

The concrete foundation must have thoroughly dried and set before erection of the pump to ensure that
loads due to weights of pumpsets, twisting moments and inertia forces due to the machine as well as the
weight of, and thrust set up by the pipeline can be borne without any movement or settling of the
foundation, Concrete foundations for reciprocating pumps should be still heavier, and if necessary they
should be isolated from the adjacent ground by a layer of material such as sand, cork, felt padding, timber
etc. capable of damping out vibrations.

Rotary machines are invariably dynamically balanced so that no unbalanced inertia forces of any
appreciable magnitude can occur.

Vibrations of the foundations can be avoided provided the machines are correctly aligned under stilled
supervision. This is necessary even for smaller pump units usually mounted on a common base plate and
lined up before despatch to take care of the possible distortions occurring during transport or set up on site
by irregularities in the surface of the foundation.

B. SUCTION PIPES

The internal dia selected for the suction lines should in no case be less than that of the suction branch of
the pump. The suction pipe must be kept as short as possible and total suction from all causes should not
exceed the limiting value specified by the manufacturer. Normally, it should not exceed more than 4.5 m
for general purpose pumps.

Pipeline should be supported and fixed in such a manner that the pump is not subjected to any stress from
piping. To avoid the formation of air pockets, suction lines must be arranged with a continuous rise towards
the pump. Isolating valves of the gate type on the suction side should be fitted with the valve spindle
horizontal and their glands sealed by means of water from the discharge side of the pump.

40
When water containing dissolved air or other gas is pumped, it is desirable to provide an air separation
vessel and a divide such a vacuum pump for removing the air.

If at all possible, each pump should have a separate suction line in order to prevent air leaking in, from a
pump that is shut down. However, if the use of a common suction line cannot be avoided, the non return
valves of the discharge side of the pumps should be omitted, and instead such valves should be fitted
immediately upstream of the suction branches.

When a number of pumps are installed adjacent to one another, with their suction pipe in the same pump,
care should be taken to see that a minimum of 3 dia distance is kept generally between two suction pipes to
prevent aeration problem resulting in the loss of output because of entrance of air into the pump or even
ceasing of some pumps altogether.

In the absence of a suction strainer fitted with a foot valve, the inlet to the suction pipe should be bell
mouthed, situated at an adequate height above the bottom of the well, and also always submerged below the
lowest water level. The bell mouth diameter should be at least 1.5 times that of the suction pipe and it
should be at a height of at least half the dia of suction pipe, from the bottom of the sump. Vortex effects
with vertical axial-flow and propeller type pumps can be minimized by locating their bell-mouth inlets as
close as possible to the rear wall of the suction chamber.

In the case of suction strainers fitted with foot valves, it should be located at an adequate height above the
bottom of suction chamber and also submerged below the lowest surface level of the water. They should be
arranged to ensure uniform intake of water from all sides. The total are of the holes in the strainers should
be equal to or more than the cross sectional area of the suction pipe. The flow velocity in the suction branch
of the pump should not exceed 2 mps.

C. DELIVERY PIPE

Non-return valves must always be fitted when the discharge head exceeds 10m, so that in case of
sudden stoppage of pump the surge pressure due to the returning column of liquid is not imposed on the
casing. The non-return valve should be provided with a bypass so that all the surge pressure is not imposed
on the seating of the valves, but it is bypassed and the water goes to the sump. A relief valve should also be
provided on the delivery side.

PIPE FITTINGS

41
If it is found necessary to fit a bend immediately upstream of the suction branch of a pump, the radius of
the bend should be equal to or greater than 2 D+100mm.
Branch fitting of Y type are to be preferred to T pieces.

The length of tapered reducing pieces, when the divergence, should be about five times the difference
between outlet and inlet diameters.

If used as reduces, tapered fittings may be very much shorter; the most suitable form is that of a nozzle
type.

E. COMMISSIONING

Priming is essential and is done by using a foot valve. In the case of large pumping units, priming is
generally done by using a vacuum pump which exhausts the air from the pump casing and sucks in the
liquid from the sump. In the case of pumps having a positive head on the suction line, priming is done by
opening the valve on suction pipe.

Prior to starting, the direction of rotation of the drive should be checked. All lubrication system should also
be checked. The stuffing boxes should be packed properly and care is taken to see that the lantern ring is
located exactly underneath the water seal piping. After making all the above checks, the coupling pins are
fitted and the rotating elements are rotated by hand or with the help of spanners in case of large units. This
makes sure that the pump will accelerate and attain full speed smoothly. Over packing of stuffing box may
damage the sleeves.

The pump should be started with the delivery valve closed. On starting, check that the pump is generating
the head. This will be indicated by the delivery pressure gauge. Immediately after the pumps run to full
speed, check should be made on bearings, stuffing boxes and vibrations and residual air should be vented
out by the air-cock provided on the top of the casing.

Stuffing boxes and glands should be checked for over heating and gland leakage. The gland packing, when
it is new, does tend to get slightly heated but it comes to normal after running for sometime. A few drops of
liquid should trickle out in the gland bowl. If the gland leakage is excessive the gland should be tightened
or additional gland packing should be introduced.

The centrifugal pump should not be run on closed valve for long periods. After making all checks the
delivery valve should gradually be opened and the pump may be put on its rated load. The ammeter should
be checked to see that the meter is not overloaded.

42
Attention should be given to the temperature of the bearing after running the pump on its rated load.
Periodic check on temperature of the bearing should be made.

In case the pump fails to generate pressure, it should be stopped immediately and checked for air leakage
from all joints in suction pipes and the stuffing boxes.

It is most important that in no case should the pump be started without liquid, as this may result in seizure
of the internals of the pump.

43
A

SCHEDULE OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Centrifugal Pumps

Sr. Name of Maintenance to be Frequency time Remarks

No section or part carried out internal at which
to be attended inspection &
maintenance to be
done
1. Bearings Checking of temperature Two months Hot ball or roller bearing point to too
with thermometer much oil or grease; hot sleeve
bearings need more oil or heavier
lubricant does not correct, dissemble
and inspect the bearing alignment of
pump and driver.
2. Glands Changing of land packing Two months
3. Bearings Lubrication (greasing) Two months Check for saponification resulting in
whitish colour wash out with
kerosene.
4. Gauges Checking of pressure & Three months
vacuum gauges
5. Valves Changing of gland Six months
packing in delivery sluice
valve, suction valves, bye
pass valve, reflex valve.
6. Exhaust pump Checking of gland Six months
& its packing & six months its
auxiliaries auxiliaries etc.
7. Impeller Checking of impeller Year
blades Year sleeves,
efficiency Rings,
bearings, neck ring
impeller nut etc.

44
45
 B

SCHEDULE OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Electrical Motors
Sr. Name of section Maintenance to be carried out Frequency time Remarks
No or part to be internal at which
attended inspection &
maintenance to be
done
1. Induction Motor Opening of end covers dust One month Depending on the
stator & Rotor blowing & checking of air gap. working conditions
and maintenance
staff available
2. Slip Ring Device Cloaning of slip rings & One month
adjustment of carbon brushes,
shortcircuiting jaws, oiling of
clutch etc.
3. Bearings Proper lubrication Two months
4. Windings Checking of motor after taking Two years
out its Rotor, dust blowing,
checking of end connections of
stator & Rotor & taking
insulation test, no load test before
putting the motor on load.

SCHEDULE OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Power Transformers

Sr. Name to be Carried out Frequency time Remarks

No internal at which
inspection &
maintenance to
be done
1 Checking of silicagel, topping of transformer oil, Six months Checked & if required
temperature gauge, vent pipe, voltage tap changing silicagel must be changed
switch. before the outbreak of
monsoon.
2. Filtration of oil, checking of dielectric strength, Year
checking of viscosity of oil, terminal boxes (H.T. &
L.T. both), insulators, Neutral Earthing, tightening
of nuts bolts, cable rockets, stopping of leakages if

46
 any through joints.
3. Checking of its functioning Year
4. Checking of condition of core of the transformer 5 years
and its windings insulation condition

47
 D

SCHEDULE OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Clariflocculators & Their Drive

Sr. Name of section or Maintenance to be Frequency time Remarks

No part to be attended carried out internal at which
inspection &
maintenance to be
done
1. Trolley wheels Lubrication One month
(greasing )
2. Reduction Gear Box Checking and Three months
topping of oil level
3. Turn Table Checking and Three months
mechanism topping of oil level
4. Verticalslip Ring Dust blowing, Four months
Motor checking of earbon
brushes, bearing
etc.
5. Rail/Track Adjustment of gap Four months
between two rails &
its aligning etc.
6. Reduction gear box Checking of helical Six months
or spurgears
condition
7. Rubber type wheels Checking of wear Six months More
iron wheels & tear alignment & frequently in
its positioning the old
installments
8. M/S Sorapers Tightening of nuts Year
& bolts,
replacement of
broken parts.
9. Turn table Checking of its Two years
mechanism sprockets chains,
steel balls, gear
boxes etc.

48
 E

SCHEDULE OF PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

Switchgears (Air or Oil Circuit Breakers)

Sr. Name of Maintenance to be carried out Frequency time Remarks

No section or internal at which
part to be inspection &
attended maintenance to be
done
1. Oil circuit Checking, cleaning and tightening of Six months
breaker or Air nuts, bolts of fixed auxiliary contacts,
circuit breaker moving auxiliary contacts, main fixed
contacts, main moving contacts. No volt
coil, overload coil, interlock system,
condition of transformer oil, knife
switches & insulators, etc.
2. Oil tank Cleaning & topping of oil & checking Six months
dielectric strength of transformer oil.
3. Contacts Changing of old & sluggish transformer Three years Depending
oil of oil circuit breaker. Changing of old on the
& wearing out contacts (fixed moving source of
auxiliaries) power
supply & its
tripping etc.

SCHEDULE OF LUBRICATION

S. Name of machines to be Grade of lubricants Remarks

No. lubricated
1. Bearing of motors, pumps Mobilux grease No. The manufacture recommendation
3 also be carefully studied. In case of
difference discussion may be held
and proper lubricant decided upon.
2. Oil bearings of motors, pump, D.T.E. heavy
Air compressors, lathes, medium oil
Drilling machines, shaper,
Milling machine
3. Gear Boxes Cylinder oil or as
per manufacturers
recommendation
4. Turn table mechanizing Tress oil 65
5. Sluice valve, by pass valves Ordinary yellow In no case too many grades of

49
 pen stock etc. grease or BRB-I lubricating oils and grease by used
Experience has provided that the
chances of mixing up, increase and
more damage is caused than good to
the machines.
APPENDIX-17

CHECK CHART FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMP TROUBLES

Symptoms Possible causes Key

(1) (2) (3)
Suction Troubles
Pump does not 1,2,3,4,6,11,14,16,17,22,23 1. Pump not printed.
deliver liquid 2. Pump or suction pipe not completely filled
with liquid.
Insufficient 2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,14,17, 3. Suction lift too high.
capacity 20,22,23,29,30,31 4. Insufficient margin between suction pressure
delivered and vapour pressure.
Insufficient 5,14,16,17,20,22,29,30,31 5. Excessive amount of air or gas in liquid.
pressure
developed
Pump loses 2,3,5,6,7,8,11,12,13 6. Air pocket in suction line.
prime after 7. Air leaks into suction line.
starting
Pump requires 15,16,17,18,19,20,23,24,26, 8. Air leaks into pump through stuffing boxes.
excessive 27,29,33,34 9. Foot valve too small.
power
Stuffing box 13,24,26,32,33,34,35,36,38, 10. Foot valve partially clogged.
leaks 39,40 11. Intel of suction pipe insufficiently submerged.
excessively
Packing has 12,13,24,26,28,32,33,34,35, 12. Water-seal pipe plugged.
short life 36,37,38,39,40 13. Seal cage improperly located in stuffing box,
preventing sealing fluid from entering space to
form the seal.
Pump vibrates 2,3,4,9,10,11,21,23,24,25,
or is noisy 26,27,28,30,35,36,41,42,43,
44,45,46,47
Bearings have 24,25,26,27,28,35,36,41,42,
short life 43,44,45,46,47
Bearings have 24,26,27,28,35,36,41,42,43, System Troubles
short life 44,45,46,47
Pump 1,4,21,22,24,27,28,35,36,41 14. Speed too low
overheats and 15. Speed too high
seizes 16. Wrong direction of rotation.
17. Total head of system higher than design head
pump.

50
 18. Total head of system lower than pump design
head.
19. Specific gravity of liquid different from
design.
20 Viscosity of liquid differs from that for which
designed.
21 Operation at very low capacity.
22. Parallel operations of pumps unsuitable for
such operation.
Mechanical Troubles
23. Foreign matter in impeller.
24. Misalignment.
25. Foundation not rigid.
26. Shaft bent.
27. Rotating part rubbing on stationary part.
28. Bearing worn.
29. Wearing rings worn.
30. Impeller damaged.
31. Casing gasket defective, permitting internal
leakage.
32. Shaft or shaft sleeves worn or scored at the
packing.
33. Packing improperly installed.
34. Incorrect type of packing for operating
conditions.
35. Shaft running off-centre because of worn
bearings or misalignment.
36. Rotor out of balance, resulting in vibration.
37. Gland too tight, resulting in no flow of liquid
to lubricate packing.
38. Failure to provide cooling liquid to water-
cooled stuffing boxes.
39. Excessive clearance at bottom of stuffing box
between shaft and casing, causing packing to be
forced into pump interior.
40. Dirt or grit in sealing liquid leading to scoring
of shaft or shaft interior.
41. Excessive thrust caused by a mechanical
failure inside the pump or by the failure of the
hydraulic balancing device, if any.
42. Excessive grease or oil in antifriction bearing
housing or lack of cooling, causing excessive
bearing temperature.
43. Lack of lubrication.
44. Improper installation of antifriction bearings
(damage during assembly, incorrect assembly of

51
 stacked bearings, use of unmatched bearings as a
pair, etc.).
45. Dirt getting into bearings.
46. Rusting of bearings due to water getting into
housing.
47. Excessive cooling of water-cooled bearing,
resulting in consideration in the bearing housing
of moisture from the atmosphere.

52
 APPENDIX- 18

CHECK CHART FOR ROTARY PUMPS: CAUSES OF TROUBLES AND

SUGGESTED REMEDIES

I. Pumps falls to discharge:

A Not Properly Primed:

Reprime from discharge side. Keep air vents open until liquid begins to
discharge.

B. Wrong Direction of Rotation:

Reverse wiring at motor.

C. Speed Too Low, hence Displacement is less than Slip through Clearances:

Check driver to see than it is upto rated speed. Change drive to increase speed,
if necessary.

D. Valves closed or an Obstruction in Suction or Discharge Pipe:

Open all valves. See that flange gaskets have the centre cut out and that there
if no obstruction across end of suction pipe.

E. Strainer Clogged:

Remove basket, clean and be sure it has ample area.

F. Suction-pipe End not submerged in Liquid:

Increase length of suction pipe or raise liquid level in supply tank.

G. Foot Valve Stuck:

Check to see that suction pipe has not been screwed into foot valve far enough
to hold it closed.

H. Suction Lift Too High:

Check with vacuum gauge. Suction lift should not be within 0.15 kg/cm2 of
vapour pressure of liquid at its pumping temperature.

J. By-Pass Open:

Examine all by pass return lines for open valves. Close them, if open. A relief
valve stuck open may by pass the entire pump capacity.

53
 K. Air Leaks in Suction:

Paint and tighten all suction-pipe gaskets and threaded joints. Tighten
stuffing-box packing.
L. Check Valve in Discharge Backed up by Hydraulic Pressure:

Install an air-release valve between check valve and pump.

M. Pump Badly Worn:

Replace parts, so clearance will not cause slip equal to pump displacement.

II. Pumps is Noisy:

A. Insufficient Liquid Supply:

Increase suction-pipe size and reduce its length. Lower position of pump to
prevent liquid from vaporizing and producing cavitational noises within
pump.

B. Air Leaks in Suction:

Paint all pipe joints, replace faulty flange gaskets, repack stuffing box to stop
cracking noise due to air bubbles in pump.

C. Pump Out of Alignment:

Align drive with pump. Release pipe flanges to determine if they strain pump
casing enough to cause metallic contact between rotating elements an casing.

D. High Spots on Rotating Elements:

File or scrap high sports that cause rotating elements to bind and produce a
noise synchronized with each revolution.

E. Bent Drive Shaft:

Replace shaft, as it causes rotating element to operate unevenly, with

consequent noise.

F. Excessive Pressure:

Check Pressure. Install a relief valve.

G. Coupling Out of Balance or Alignment:

54
 Align driver and pump. If coupling has floating sleeve or cover, misalignment
often results in slapping sound.

III Pump Wears Rapidly:

A. Grit or Dirt in Liquid:

Install fine-mesh strainer or filter in suction.

B. Pipe Strain strainer or filter in suction.

Release piping and align it in independent support before connecting to pump.

C. Pump Operating against Excessive Pressures:

Install relief valve to protect pump, or use a heavier duty pump.

D. Corrosion Roughens Rubbing Surface:

Order a pump made of metals that resist corrosive action.

E. Pump Runs Dry:

Provide ample supply of liquid at all times. Do not allow pump to operate
under conditions where liquid supply may fail.

IV Pump Not up to Capacity:

A. Suction Lift Too High. Bubbles form Reducing Pump Capacity:

Check with vacuum gauge. Suction lift should not be within 0.15kg/cm2 of

vapour pressure of liquid at its pumping temperature.

B. Suction Strainer Partly Clogged or of Insufficient Area:

Clean the screen. If all danger of foreign material has passed and screen has
insufficient area, remove Pump.

C. Suction Pipe End Insufficient Submerged, so that liquid Eddied and Allows
Air to be Drawn into Pump:

Increase suction-pipe length to obtain greater submergence.

D. Suction Pipe Too Small, Too Long, or has Many Fittings to Increase Pipe
Friction Abnormally and Cause Liquid to Vaporise:

55
 Simplify suction line to reduce pipe friction and increase its size.

E. Stuffing Box Improperly Packed, so that Air is Drawn In:

Repack box, tighten gland. Caution: Dont tighten enough to cause excessive
packing wear and heating.

D. Air Leaks in Suction Piping:

Paint all pipe joints. Replace gaskets where necessary.

56
 G. Speed Too Low:

Check driver for speed and overload. Change drive speed ratio.

H. Hand By-pass or Return Line Partly Open:

Close all by-pass valves and see that they are sealed properly.

J. Relief Valve Improperly Seated or Incorrectly set:

Regrind valve on its seat. Be sure that valve does not open until desired
pressure is reached.

K. Pump Parts Worn:

Replace parts and adjust clearness to eliminate excessive slip.

V. Pumps Starts, then Loses its Suction:

A. Suction-line End Not Immersed Deeply Enough:

Increase suction pipe length so that liquid is not drawn down to near the end
of pipe.

B. Liquid Vaporizes in Suction Line:

Reduce suction lift.

C. Air or Gas Pockets in System:

Reduce size of pockets in suction system, or provide a partly open by-pass to

maintain pump prime.

D. Air Leaks in Suction Lind:

Check for air leakage into the pump suction.

VI. Pump Takes Too Much Power:

A. Speed Too High, or Liquid Heavier or More Viscous than specified for Pump.

Reduce speed or heat liquid to reduce its viscosity.

B. Obstruction in Discharge Line Causes Pump to Operate above Rated

Pressure:

57
 If new installation, recalculate what the head should be. Dont forget to
include head due to friction losses in pipe and fittings. Check this head against
rated pump head. With pressure gauge, check head developed by pump. An
obstruction or partly closed valve in discharge line may increase head above
normal. If head cannot be reduced to give safe load on motor, reduce pump
speed or install larger motor.

C. Stuffing-box Packing Too Tight:

Check packing. If too tight, make necessary adjustments or replace packing

with correct type, properly installed.

D. Shaft Bent or Out of Alignment:

Check shaft, pump and motor alignment. If shaft is bent, straighten it or

install new one. Properly align pump and motor.

E. Rotating Element Binds and Wears Excessively:

Pipe connection out of line distorts pump casing. Disconnect suction and
discharge piping from pump to see if they are in alignment. Flange faces
should be parallel and align axially without being forced. Support pipe
separate from pump. Check fit of rotating parts to make sure they do not bind
or have not worked endwise on shaft to rub casing.

58
ANNEXURE- H (Refer clause 6.4.4)
SPECIFICATION OF SUBMERSIBLE PUMPING SET

The submersible pumping set should conform to I.S. 8034-1989 with latest
amendment. The pump should be fitted dynamically balance enclosed type
impeller. Each impeller shall be balanced dynamically to grade of G 6.3
(6.3mm/s). The pump shaft shall be guided by bearing provided in each stage bowl
& in the suction land discharge casing. The surface finish of shaft or of the
protecting sleeves should be 0.75 micron Ra Max. The inlet passage of the suction
casing shall be stream lined to avoid eddies. The suction case shall be fitted with a
strainer of corrosion resistant material. Suitable sand guard shall be provided just
above the suction case bearing to prevent the entry of foreign material into suction
case. The pump should be provided with the non return valve above the pump
discharge case with standard flanged connection. The individual casting part or
pump as a whole in assembled condition should be able to withstand a hydrostatic
pressure of 1.5 time maximum discharge pressure. The gaskets & seals used shall
conform to I.S. 5120-1968 or latest. The cable clamp of adequate size be supplied
for fixing submersible cables to the rising main pipes.

The pump shall be directly coupled to a submersible motor. The

submersible motor shall be squirrel cage induction motor conforming to I.S. 9283-
1979 or latest capable of operating on 415+ 6% volts, 3 phase 50 cycles, A.C.
supply. Both pump and motor shall run at 2900 R.P.M. The water lubricated thrust
bearing should be of adequate size to withstand the weight of all rotating parts as
well as the imposed hydraulic thrust. The motor shall be protested by means of
cable glands, rubber seals etc. from ingress of bore well water, sand and other
foreign material. The motor shall be provided with breathing attachment like
bellows, diaphragm etc. to compensate the volumetric variation due to change in
the temperature. The motor shall be made of corrosion resisting material or

59
suitable materials to resists corrosion under normal conditions. The rotor shall be
provided with shaft protecting sleeves having a surface finish of 0.75 micron Ra
Max. The starter shall be star delta. The class of insulation shall be F. The
submersible cable of L&T & finolex make for submersible motor shall conform to
I.S. 694 (Part-III)-1964 or latest. The flanged column pipe shall conform Table 2
I.S. 1239 ( Part-I )- 1979 or latest (Medium Class) Table-2.

The efficiency of submersible pump shall be guaranteed to specified point

of rating only & shall not be guaranteed to cover the performance of the pump
under condition varying there form nor for a sustained performance for any period
of time. The pump discharge may be guaranteed for the range of head between
25% & + 10% of the specified head when the later is 30 meters of above. Below
30 meters the limits shall be from 25% to 25% or + 3 meters whichever is less.
The H.P. of motor shall be such that is shall be 15% in the excess of maximum
H.P. required under all heads of working. Performance guarantees shall be based
on laboratory tests corrected for field performance.

MATERIAL OF COMPOSITION OF DIFFERENT COMPONENTS OF PUMP:

Sr. No. Component Material Specifications

1. Bearing Sleeve (As Stainless Steel 12 % Chromium Steel
per IS: 8034-1989) or Grade 04 Cr 13,12 Cr or
Bronze 20 Cr 13 of ISI 1570
(Part-5) 1985 or latest
or
Bronze Grade LTB3, 4 or
5 of I.S. 318-1981 or
latest.
2. Casing wear ring Bronze LTB 3, or 4 of I.S. 5 318-
1981 or latest.
3. Bearing bush -do- LTB3, 4 or 5 of I.S. 318-
1981 or latest.
4. Impeller -do- LTB2 of IS 318-1981 of
latest Glass filled
polyphenylene oxide
(Modified PPO) Upto 400

60
 LPM as per IS: 8034-
1989
5. Discharge casing Cast iron Grade FG200 of IS 210 of
IS 1978 or latest.
6. Pump bowl/diffuser -do- -do-
7. Suction casing -do- -do-
8. Pump shaft Stainless steel 04 Cr 13, 12 Cr 13 or 20
Cr 13 or IS 1570 (Part-5 )
1985 or latest

APPROVED MAKES

1. CALAMA
2. KSB
3. SU
4. WPIL
5. SEEREX

Note :- Glass filled Polyhenelane Oxide (Modified PPO)

61
INFORMATION TO BE FURNISHED WITH THE TENDER (As per IS: 8034-1989)

DETAIL OF PUMP

CODE DESIGNATION PUMP

1. METHOD OF LUBRICATION:
2. MINIMUM BORE WELL DIA METER IN MM:
3. NUMBER OF STAGES
4. OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF BOWL

(The max, diameter pump fitted non return valve & max, overall diameter
of the pump set including the cable guard)

5. DISCHARGE IN LPM
6. TOTAL HEAD MTR
7. SPEDD IN RPM
8. PUMP INPUT AT DUTY POINT IN K.W.
9. OVER ALL EFFICIENCY IN %
10. MINIMUM SUBMERGENCE REQUIRED

DETAILS OF MOTOR

1. RATING IN K.W.
2. TYPE
(in accordance with I.S. 9283-1979)

3. DETAILS OF POWER SUPPLY

4. RATED SPEED

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION & MAINTENANCE WEIGHT OF

PUMP, MOTOR & CABLE & RISING MAIN PIPE FOR A SPECIFIC
SETTING

62
SPECIFICATION OF CONTROL PANEL FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMPING SET

Panel board having size 900mm x 250 mm made of not less than 2 mm
prestressed cold rolled sheet & auto claved painted. The board should comprise
of rigid welded structural frames made of structural steel sections of not less
than 3 mm thickness. The board should be smoothly finished & free from
flaws. The panel board should have the following flush mounted instruments.
It should have space for providing power meter & light meter.

M.C. B:- Standard, MDS, Havell, GE. (upto 10 H.P.)

M.C.C.B:- L&T, Crompton, G.E. Havell (Above 10 H.P.)

E.L.C.B.:- L&T Havell, MDS, G.E.

Switch Fuse Unit:- L&T Simens, G.E.

Contractors, Relays & Timers : L&T Simens, G.E.

Single Phase Preventor : L&T Minillec.

Ammeter & Voltmeter : AE, Meco, L&T

CT for ammeter; AE, EE, GE.

Selector switch for ammeter & Voltmeter : L&T Kaycee

Capacitor : ISI marked or approved by P.S.E.B.

Indicating Lamps (22.5 mm dia):- Led Type.

H.R.C. Fuses: Havell, L&T Siemens, G.E. Havell

Fuse Bases:- -do-

Wires:- Plaza, Kent, Finolex

THIMBLES: DOWELL, JAINSONS, Urmiltron

TESTS: The following tests should be performed on the panel board during
the inspection at the manufacturer place.

1. General Visual Test.

63
 2. High voltage test upto 2 KV
3. No load operational test by energizing the panel.
NOTE:-

1. Upto 7.5 H.P. D.O.L. Starter will be installed. Above 7.5 H.P. Star Delta
Starter will be installed.
2. THE FOLLWING FAMILY CURVE ALONGWITH THE
CHARACTERISTICS CURVES SIGNED BY THE MANUFACTURER
(not below the rank of REGIONAL MANAGER OF REGIONAL
INCHARGE) be attached with the tender. Photo copy of the same will not
be accepted.

D. HEAD V/S DISCHARGE CURVE.

E. DISCHARGE V/S POWER INPUT CURVE.
F. DISCHARGE V/S OVERALL EFFICIENCY CURVE.

3. PERFORMA NO. 1 PRICE FRO THE SUBMERSIBLE PUMPING SET,

CONTROL PANEL, COLUMN PIPE & CABLE SHOULD BE QUOTED
SEPERATELY
4. PERFORMA NO. 2 ONLY THE PRICE OF SUBMERSIBLE PUMPING
SET WITHOUT CONTROL PANEL IS TO BE QUOTED.
5. The inspection of the pump will be carried out at the manufacturers
premises by the two representative of the Department.
6. The firm should supply the following information for all the pumping set.

DISCRIPTION 1. NET 2. GROSS 3.DISCHARGE 4. EFF. 5. 6. BHP 7. BHP

EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE OF COMBIN REQUIR
COL.
HEAD HEAD PUMP ED EFF. ED
INCLUDING OF 6+15
LOSSES IN PUMP &
PUMPING MOTOR
SET
DUTY POINT
25% OF D.P.

+ 10% OF D.P

64
ANNEXURE-I (Refer clause 2.5.1.1)
WATER SAMPLE QUALITY TESTING AND SAMPLE COLLECTION PERFORMA

PARTICULARS TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THE WATER SAMPLES

A
1. Name and address of person requesting the examination.
2. Date and time of collection and dispatch.
3. Purpose of examination.
4. Source of water and its location (well, tubewell, stream, river, etc.).
5. Exact place and depth below surface, from which sample was taken.
6. Weather at the time of collection and particulars of recent rainfall, if any.
7. Does the water become affected in taste or odour after rainfall or under any
particular circumstances.
8. Are there any complaints from the consumers. If so, the nature of the
complaint.
9. Character of surroundings and proximity to drains, cess pools, cattle sheds,
manure heaps, grave yard, bathing ghats and other sources of pollution.
10. Methods of purification and disinfection if any, details, dose of chemicals and
points of application.
B

11. If from a dug well or a bore well.

(a) Whether an old source or newly constructed.

(b) Whether open or covered: nature and material of cover.

(c) Nature of steining or casing and depth to which constructed and whether
it is in good condition.

(d) Height and condition of parapet and apron.

(e) Method of pumping or other means of raising water.

(f) Depth of well and of water surface from ground level.

(g) Whether the water is clear as it flows out of tube well and remains clear if
exposed to air (4-6 hours) or becomes discoloured and turbid.

12. If from a river or stream.

(a) Nature of flow and whether floods are common or rate.

(b) Whether level of water is above or below normal.

65
 (c) Is there any bathing ghat, boat jetty, burial ground and sewer outfall? If
upstream, give distance from sampling point.

13. If from lakes, impounded reservoirs and tanks.

(a) How supplied (channel, stream, rain).

(b) Nature of catchment, whether conserved or not.

(c) Nature and extent of weed growth.

14. Size and number of service reservoirs.

(a) Whether open or covered.

(b) How often cleaned and method of cleaning.

(c) Date of last cleaning.

15. Number of hydrants and sewers on the distribution system.

1. Hours of pumping and supply.

17. Population served.

18. Any other particulars.

Station

Date

Signature and name in block letters of the person collecting and forwarding the
samples.

66
 SPECIMEN FORM FOR SHORT PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL EXAMINATION

Name and Address of the Laboratory:

Name and Address of Sender Senders No. Date of Collection...............

Date & time of receipt at Lab

Lab. Ref. No. Date & time of commencing of examination

1. Raw water
2. Coagulated water
3. Filtered water
4. Water after specific treatment
5. Distribution system
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Time of Collections

PHYSICAL Expressed as
0
1. Temperature C
2. Turbidity JTU
3. Colour Units of Pt.Co. scale
4. Taste and Odour Qualitative

Chemical
5. PH
6. Conductivity micromhos/cm
7. Free CO2 (mg/1) CO2
8. Alkalinity (mg/1) CaCO3
9. Chlorides (mg/1) C1
10. Nitrites (Qualitative)
11. Dissolved oxygen (mg/1)O
12. Hardness (mg/1) CaCO3
(a) Carborate
(b) Non-carbonate
(c) Total
13. Iron (mg/1)Fe
14. Fluorides (mg/1)F
15. Residual Chlorine (mg/1 C1
16. Alumina in Alum (%) A12O3
17. Available chlorine (%) C1
in Bleaching Powder
18. Coagulant Dose Jar Test (mg/1)

67
19. Chlorine Demand (mg/1) C1

Remarks :
Officer-in charge
Date

68
SPECIMAN FOR COMPLETE PHYSICAL, CHEMICAL AND BILOGICAL EXAMINAITON
Name and address of the Laboratory:
Name and Address of Sender Senders No. Date of Collection...............

Date & time of receipt at Lab

Lab. Ref. No. Date & time of commencing of examination

1. Raw water
2. Coagulated water
3. Filtered water
4. Water after specific treatment
5. Distribution system
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Time of Collections

PHYSICAL Expressed as
0
1. Temperature C
2. Turbidity JTU
3. Colour Units of Pt.Co. scale
4. Taste and Odour Qualitative

Chemical
5. PH
6. Conductivity micromhos/cm
7. Free CO2 (mg/1) CO2
8. Alkalinity (mg/1) CaCO3
(a) Pheno-phthalen
(b) Total
9. Chlorides (mg/1) C1
10. Ammonia (mg/1)N
(a) Free and Saline
(b) Albuminoid
11. Nitrites (mg/1) N
12. Nitrites (mg/1) N
13. Dissolved oxygen (mg/1) O
14. Oxygen absorbed at 27 oC (mg/1) O
(a) 3 minutes
(b) 4 hours
B.O.D. (mg/1) O
B.O.D. (mg/1) O
Hardness

69
 (a) Carbonate
(b) Non-carbonate
(c) Total
Iron (mg/1) Fe
Manganese (mg/1) Mn
Fluorides (mg/1) F
Calcium (mg/1) C1
Magnesium (mg/1) Mg
Residual Chlorine (mg/1) C1
Sulphates (mg/1) SO4
Total Solids
(a) Dissolved
(b) Suspended
(c) Volatile

Alumina in Alum (%) Als, O3

Available chloride in Bleach (%) C1
Powder
Coagulant Dose-Jar Test (mg/1)
Langelier Index
Chlorine Demand (mg/1) C1
Total Silica (mg/1) S1O2
Penolic Compounds (mg/1) Phenol
Synthetic Detergents (mg/1)/MBAS
Sulphide (mg/1) S
Arsenic (mg/1) As.
Cadmium (mg/1) Cd.
Hexavalent Chromium (mg/1) Cr.
Copper (mg/1) Cu.
Cyanide (mg/1) CN.
Lead (mg/1) Pb.
Selenium (mg/1) Zn
Zinc (mg/1) Zn
Mercury (mg/1) Hg
Oil and grease (mg/1)
Polynuclear Aromatic (mg/1) PAH
Hydrocarbon
Radio activity (pci/1)
(a) Ggrossalpha Activity
(b) Gross Bets Activity
BIOLOGICAL

Total count of Plankton Total count of SAU

Organisms /m1)

rks: Office-in-charge

70
 SPECIMAN FORM FOR SHORT BACKTERIOLOGICAL EXAMINATION OF WATER

Name and address of Laboratory :

Name and Address of Sender Senders No. Date of Collection...............

Date & time of receipt at Lab

Lab. Ref. No. Date & time of commencing of examination

1. Raw water
2. Filtered water
3. Chlorinated Water
4. Distribution system
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2. 3. 4.
Time of Collections Expressed as

1. Plate count Colonies/ml

(a) 20 oC
(b) 35 oC

2. Coliform Organisms MPN/100 ml

Remarks: Office-in-charge

71
 SPECIMAN FORM FOR SHORT BACKTERIOLOGICAL EXAMINATION OF WATER

Name and address of Laboratory :

Name and Address of Sender Senders No. Date of Collection...............

Date & time of receipt at Lab

Lab. Ref. No. Date & time of commencing of examination

1. Raw water
2. Filtered water
3. Chlorinated Water
4. Distribution system
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
1. 2. 3. 4.
Time of Collections Expressed as

1. Plate count Colonies/ml

(a) 20 oC
(b) 35 oC

2. Coliform Organisms MPN/100 ml

3. E. Coli MPN/100 ml

4. Completed Test

5. Differential Test (IMVic)

Date : Office-in-charge

72
 ANNEXURE J (Refer clause 2.5.1.1, and 2.1.2.1)
PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PARAMETERS (as per manual on water supply
and Treatment By CEEPHEO and Hand Book on Water Supply and Drainage
issued by BIS no SP 35 (S&T) 1987 with latest amendments )
(These standards are subject to change or revisions by Bureau Of Indian Standards
from Time to time )
Sr Characteristics Acceptable **Cause for Remarks
no Rejection
1. Turbidity (NTU) 2.5 10
2. Colour (Units on Platinum 5 25 Consumer acceptance decreases
cobalt scale Hazen Unit )
3. Taste and Odour Un Un Consumer acceptance
objectionable objectionable decreases
4. PH 7.0 to 8.5 <6.5 or >9.2 Water will affect the mucous
membrane & /water supply
system
5. Total dissolved solids 500 1500 Consumer acceptance
(mg/lt) decreases. Laxative effect upon
people who are not accustomed
to it. May cause gasto-intestinal
irritation.
6. Total hardness (as CaCO3) 200 600 Encrustation in water supply
(mg/lt) structure and adverse effects on
domestic use/scale formation
7. Chlorides (as C I) (mg / I) 200 1000 Taste, palatability and corrosion
are affected
8. Sulphates (as SO4) (mg/lt) 200 400 Causes Gastro intestinal
irritation
9. Flourides (as F) (mg/lt) 1.0 1.5 Results in dental/skeletal
fluorosis
10. Nitrates (as NO3) (mg/lt) 45 45 May cause
Methaemoglobineamia / blue
baby disease
11. Calcium (as Ca) (mg/lt) 75 200 Encrustation in water supply
12. Magnesium (as Mg) <30* 150 structure and adverse effects on
*If there are 250 mg/l domestic use
(mg/lt) of sulphates Mg
content can be
increased to a
maximum of 125mg/l
with the reduction of
Sulphates @ 1 unit per
every 2.5 units of
Sulphates
13. Iron (as Fe) mg/lt) 0.1 1.0 Taste & appearance are affected
and promotes iron bacteria &
adverse effect on domestic use
and water strips.
14. Alkalinity (mg/lt) 200 600 Water will affect the mucous
membrane &/ water supply
system, taste becomes
unpleasant.

73
 15. Manganese as Mn mg/l 0.05 0.5
16. Copper as Cu mg/l 0.05 1.5
17. Zinc as Zn mg/l 5.0 15.0
18. Phenolic Compounds as 0.001 0.002
Phenol mg/l
19. Anionic detergents as 0.2 1.0
MBAS mg/l
20. Mineral Oil mg/l 0.01 0.3
21. Toxic Materials
22. Arsenic (as As) (mg/lt) 0.05 0.05
23. Pes icides (total, mg/lt) Absent 0.001 Water becomes toxic.
24. Cadmium as Cd mg/l 0.01 0.01
25. Chromium as Hexavalent 0.05 0.05
Chrome Cr^6 mg/l
26. Cyanide as CN mg/l 0.05 0.05
27. Lead as Pb mg/l 0.1 0.1
28. Selenium as Se mg/l 0.01 0.01
29. Mercury total as Hg mg/l 0.001 0.001
30. Polynuclear 0.2 micro g/l 0.2 micro g/l
aromaticHydrocarbons
(PAH)
31. RADIO ACTIVITY
32. Gross Alpha Activity 3 pCi/l 3 pCi/l pCi =pico curie
33. Gross Beta Activity 30 pCi/l 30pCi/l
34.
35. Residual free chlorine 0.2 - To be applicable only when
(mg/lt) water is chlorinated. Tested at
consumer end. When protection
against viral infection is
required, it should be min. 0.5
mg/lt)
36. Bacteria (MPN/100ml) 0 10 Results in diarrhoea, decently,
typhoid etc

Notes : * The figures indicated under the column Acceptable are the limits upto
which water is generally acceptable to the consumers.
** Figures in excess of those mentioned under Acceptable render the water not
acceptable,
but still may be tolerated in the absence of an alternative and better source but upto the
limits
indicated under column Cause for Rejection above which the sources will have to be
rejected.

74
 BACTERIOLOGICAL QUALITY OF DRINKING WATER

Organisms Guideline Value

All water intended for drinking

E.coli or thermotolerant coliform Must not be detectable in any 100-

bacteria ml sample. A sample of the water
entering the distribution system that
does not conform to this standard
calls for an immediate investigation
in to both efficacy of the
purification process and method of
sampling
Treated water entering the distribution system
E.coli or thermotolerant coliform Must not be detectable in any 100-
bacteria ml sample.
Total coliform bacteria Must not be detectable in any 100-
ml sample.
Coliform Organism Not more than 10 per 100 ml
sample
Coliform organism should not be
detectable in 100 ml of any two
consecutive samples or more than
5% of the samples collected for the
year
Treated water in the distribution
system
E.coli or thermotolerant coliform Must not be detectable in any 100-
bacteria ml sample
Must not be detectable in any 100-
Total coliform bacteria ml sample.
In case of large supplies, where
sufficient samples are examined,
must not be present in 95 % of
samples taken throughout any 12
month period.
Virological Aspects 0.5mg/l of free chlorine residual for
one hour is sufficient to inactivate
virus even in water that was
original polluted . This free
Chlorine residual is to be insisted
in all disinfected supplies in areas
suspected of endemicity of
infestations hepatitis to take care of

75
 the safety from the bacteriological
pint of view as well . For other
areas 0.2mg/l of free residual for
half an hour should be insisted
a. Immediate investigative action must be taken if either E.coli or
total coliform bacteria are detected. The minimum action in the
case of total coliform bacteria is repeat sampling; if these bacteria
are detected in the repeat sample, the cause must be determined by
immediate further investigation.
b. Although E.Coli is the more precise indicator of faccal pollution,
the count of thermotolerant coliform bacteria is an acceptable
alternative. If necessary, proper confirmatory test must be carried
out. Total coliform bacteria are not acceptable indicators of the
sanitary quality of rural water supplies, particularly in tropical
areas where many bacteria of no sanitary significance occur in
almost all untreated supplies.

76
ANNEXURE-K (Refer Chapter 3.1)
POPULATION FORECAST EXAMPLE FOR CALCULATING
Data assumed

Census Year Population

1961 343
1971 589
1981 686
1991 1087

Using various methods the population for the design period is estimated and the realistic
value of population is selected for the design of the scheme.
1. INCREMENTAL INCREASE METHOD
Sr. Year of Population Increase/ Decade % Increase in Incremental
No. Census population Increase
1 1961 343 -- -- --
2 1971 589 246 71.72 --
3 1981 686 97 16.46 -149
4 1991 1087 401 58.45 +304
744 146.63 155

Average population increase/decade = X= Total Increase = 744/3 = 248

No. of decades
Net Incremental Increase = Y = 155
Average Incremental Increase = Z= Y/2=155 /2= 77.5
Population forecast for 2001 = P 1991 + (X +Z)* n
Where n = No. of decades
Population in 2001 = 1087 + (248 + 77.5) *1 =1412.5
Population in 2011 = 1087 + (248 + 77.5) *2 =1738.0
Population in 2021 = 1087 + (248 + 77.5) *3 =2063.5 =2100

II. ARITHMETIC INCREASE METHOD:

Average population increase/ decade = X = Total Increase =744/3 = 248

77
 No. of decades

Population forecast for 2001 = P 1991 + (X)* n

Where n = No. of decades.

Population in 2001 = 1087 + 248 *1 =1335
Population in 2011 = 1087 + 248 *2 =1583
Population in 2021 = 1087 + 248 *3 =1831

III. GEOMETRICAL INCREASE METHOD

Total % increase in
Average percentage increase in population =M = Population
No. of decades

= (71.72 + 16.46 + 58.45) = 146.63/3 = 48.87

Population forecast for 2001 = P 1991 + (1+M/100)* n

Where n = No. of decades

Population in 2001 = 1087 * (1+48.87/100)1 =1616.36
Population in 2011 = 1087 * (1+48.87/100)2 =2403.54
Population in 2021 = 1087 * (1+48.87/100)3 =3574.06

Population forecast can be calculated by using a software also. The results obtained from
software is appended and is in agreement with hand calculation.

Final Prediction:
The geometric progression gives too a high a value hence cannot be considered in the
present case. It gives a valve more than 2% annual growth. Considering 2% average
national growth per year; the population in 2021 will be 1880. Hence, arithmetical
increase method gives the nearest value. However, as there is a drastic change in
population from 1981 to 1991 by nearly 100% in this particular case, hence it is
recommended to adopt 2100 (as obtained by arithmetical increase method) instead of
1880 (Considering 2% average national growth per year) as the future population in the
design of water supply.

78
ANNEXURE-M (Refer clause 4.12)
EXAMPLE FOR CALCULATING THE YIELD OF TUBEWELL
Data: A 15 cm. well penetrates 30m below static water level. After a long period of
pumping a rate of 1800 Ipm, the draw down in the observation wells at 12m and 36 m
from the pumped well are 1.2m and 0.5 m respectively.
Factors to be Determined from the data:
i) The transmissibility of the aquifer
ii) The draw down in the pumped well assuming R=300 m
iii) The specific capacity of the well.
Solution:
Assuming radial flow into the aquifer from Dupits equation
Dupits Eqn. Q = K (h22 h12)
2.303 log 10 r2 r1

Where,
T = Transmissibility of the water table aquifer
H = Saturated thickness of the aquifer
R = Radius of influence
rw = Radius of the well
hw = Depth of water in the well during pumping
H-hw = the resultant draw down in the pumped
h1=H-S1 =30 1.2 =28.8m, r1 =12m
h2=H-S2 =30 0.5 =29.5m, r2 =36m
Q= 1800 Ipm K= co-efficient of permeability

Refer enclosed sketch for the above details.

1.800 = K (29.52 28-82)

60 2.303 log 10 36
12
K= 2.57 x 10-4 m/sec (or) 22.21 m/day.
i) Transmissibility T = K * H
= 2.57 x 10-4 x 30 = 77.1x 10-4m2/sec.

79
 (or 666.3 m2/day
ii) Draw down in pumped well
Q = 2.72 T (H-hw) = 2.72 x (77.1x104) xSw
Log10 300
0.10
Draw down Sw = 5.15 m
iii) The specific capacity of the well
=Q = 1.8 = 5.82 x 10-3 cu.m/sec/m
Sw 60x 51.5 or 361.8Ipm/m

Pump set to be provided for pumping at the rate of 360 Ltrs. per minutes against total
head involved to deliver water in the receiving tank.

Precaution during yield test:

The water pumped out should be led away from the well/ borewell so that the same will
not reenter the aquifer. The influence of pumping in the neighboring bore well/ well on
the test well has also to be observed especially if such wells / borewells are in the zone of
influence.

80
Annexure N
Table I showing Discharge of tube well corresponding to water head
discharge over 60 deg Vnotch in LPH
HEAD OVER V- NOTCH
mm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 29 37 46 57 68 81 95 111 128 147
20 167 188 211 236 263 291 321 353 386 422
30 459 498 540 583 628 675 724 776 829 885
40 943 1003 1065 1130 1196 1266 1337 1411 1487 1566
50 1647 1730 1817 1905 1996 2090 2186 2285 2387 2491
60 2598 2707 2820 2935 3053 3173 3297 3423 3552 3684
70 3819 3957 4098 4242 4388 4538 4691 4847 5006 5168
80 5333 5501 5672 5847 6025 6206 6390 6577 6768 6962
90 7159 7359 7563 7770 7981 8195 8414 8633 8857 9085
100 9316 9551 9789 10031 10276 10525 10777 11033 11293 11556
110 11823 12093 12367 12645 12927 13212 13501 13794 14091 14391
120 14696 15004 15316 15631 15951 16275 16602 16933 17269 17608
130 17951 18298 18650 19005 19364 19727 20095 20466 20842 21221
140 21605 21993 22385 22781 23181 23586 23995 24408 24825 25246
150 25672 26102 26336 26975 27418 27865 28317 28773 29233 26698

81
Table II
DISCHARGE OVER 90 deg. V- NOTCH
(Liters per hour)

HEAD OVER V- NOTCH

mm 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 51 65 80 98 118 141 165 192 222 254
20 289 326 366 409 455 504 556 611 669 731
30 795 863 935 1009 1088 1169 1255 1344 1436 1533
40 1633 1737 1844 1956 2072 2192 2315 2443 2575 2712
50 2852 2997 3146 3299 3457 3619 3786 5958 4133 4314
60 4499 4689 4883 5083 5287 5496 5710 5928 6152 6381
70 6614 6853 7097 7346 7600 7859 8124 8394 8669 8950
80 9236 9527 9824 10126 10434 10747 11066 11390 11721 12058
90 12398 12745 13098 13457 13822 14192 14569 14951 15339 15734
100 16134 16540 16953 17371 17796 18227 18664 19107 19557 20013
110 20475 20943 21418 21900 22387 22882 23382 23889 24403 24923
120 25450 25984 26524 27072 27625 28185 28752 29326 29906 30494
130 31088 31690 32298 32913 33535 34164 34801 35444 36094 36752
140 37146 38088 38767 39453 40146 40847 41555 42270 42593 43703
150 44460 45205 45957 46716 47483 48258 49040 49830 50627 51432

82
Table 1 A

DISCHARGE OVER 60 V-NOTCH

(Gallons per hour)

HEAD OVER V NOTCH

Inch 1 1/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8
1 67 90 117 148 184 225 270 321
2 377 439 507 580 659 745 836 935
3 1040 1151 1270 1396 1528 1669 1816 1971
4 2134 2305 2484 2670 2865 3068 3280 3500
5 3728 3966 4212 4467 4731 5005 5288 5580
6 5881 6192 6513 6844 7184 7534 7895 8266
7 8646 9038 9439 9851 10274 10707 11152 11607
8 12073 12550 13038 13538 14049 14571 15104 15650
9 16207 16775 17356 17948 18552 19168 17797 20437
10 21090 21755 22433 23124 23826 24542 25270 26011
11 26765 27532 28312 29105 29911 30730 31563 32409
12 33269 34142 35029 35929 36843 37771 38713 39669

83
Table II A

DISCHARGE OVER 90 V-NOTCH

(Gallons per hour)

HEAD OVER V NOTCH

Inch 0 1/8 1/2 3/8 1/2 5/8 3/4 7/8
1 115 155 201 256 318 389 468 556
2 653 760 877 1004 1142 1290 1449 1619
3 1801 1995 2200 2418 2648 2891 3147 3415
4 3698 3993 4303 4626 4964 5316 5682 6064
5 6460 6871 7298 7740 8198 8672 9162 9668
6 10191 10730 11286 11858 12448 13055 13680 14322
7 14982 15660 16356 17070 17802 18553 19323 20112
8 20919 21746 22592 23458 24343 25248 26172 27117
9 28082 29067 30073 31099 32146 33214 34303 35413
10 36544 37697 38871 40067 41285 42525 43786 45070
11 46377 47706 49057 50431 51828 53248 54691 56157
12 57647 59160 60696 62257 63841 65449 67081 68737

84
 Annexure O

Design Examples of Following types of Technology

options
1. Water supply Scheme Single Village Tube well Based

2. Water supply Scheme Multi Village Tube well Based

3. Water supply Scheme Single Village Canal Based

4. Water supply Scheme Multi Village Canal Based

5. OHSR capacity Calculation using mass curve method

6. Economical size of Pumping Main

1. Worked Up Example of Design of Single Village water Supply scheme
using Tube well as Source of Drinking water Supply
( World Bank Assisted Pilot Project)
Design Calculation
Sr. Name of H.B. Population Present Present Prospective population
No. Village No. as per population population @20% @35% increase
census @1.228% based on increase over over the
2001 increase actual the present present
Total/SC per year door to (column 7) population for
upto 2006 door population 30 years
@ 6.140% survey for 15 years
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Chawa 617 2071/ 2198 3040 3648 4101

Rate of Water Supply 70ltrs.h/day

Daily water supply requirement 15 year =3648X70=255360 ltrs.

Daily water supply requirement 30 year =4101X70=287070 ltrs.

1. TUBEWELL:- ( Design period 15 years)

Daily Water Supply requirement =255360 ltr.

Pumping hours per day =6 hour.

Pumping capacity per hour=255360/6 hour=42560 ltrs.

Say:43000 Or 716LPM

Hence, One No.200mm i/d straight T/Wel with reverse rotary rig Upto 125 mtr.
depth below ground level, is proposed to be installed at site, which is expected to
discharge of 60000 ltrs. Per hour against the required discharge of 43000 ltrs. Per
hour.
2. PUMP CHAMBER:-

It is proposed to construct one No3.70X4.30mtr. size rectangular pump chamber to

house the pumping machinery required for the scheme.
3. PUMPING MACHINERY:-

I. Height of OHSR upto FSL =28.00 mtrs.

II. Spring Level =10.00mtrs.

III. Hydraulic head of required above FSL =5.00mtrs.

OHSR
 IV. Loss of head in rising main =0.50mtrs.

V. Depression head =7.00mtrs.

VI. Loss of head in pipe & specials =3.00mtrs.

VII. Fall in water table =3.00mtrs.

Total:- =56.50mtrs.

Say:57 mtrs.

A) PUMPING SET: - (Design period 15 years)

Pumping Capacity =43000 ltrs.hr.

=43000/60=716 LPM

HP of electric motor with 60% efficiency = 43000x57x 100 = 14.89 BHP

4572 x 60x 60
Say:-15.00 BHP

Hence, it is proposed to provide one No. Electrically driven submersible pumping set

capable of delivering 43000 litre of water per hour against a head of 57mtrs.

A) GENERATING SET: -

A generating set of 20 B.H.P capacity is proposed act as stand by arrangement in the

event of long power failure.

4. RISING MAIN: - (Design period 30 years)

The economical size of rising main has been calculated as per CPHEO manual and it
comes out to be 100mm. The calculation for the economical size are attached at
Annexure-H
5. SERVICE RESERVIOR:-

The capacity of OHSR has been worked out on the basis of mass curve worked out

150000 ltr having 28 mtr height upto FSL, The mass curve details are attached at

Annexure-I .

TERMINAL HEAD STATEMENT

S.No. Upper Lower Population Length Ground Cum. Peak Internal Losses Per Actual Hydraulic Hydraulic Terminal
Node Node (m) Level Population Demand Diameter 1000m Losses Level Level Head
(m) (liters) (mm) Length (m) Upper Lower (m)
(m) Node Node
(m) (m)

1 1 2 0 50 95.00 4101 1148280 150 5.212 0.261 115.500 115.239 20.240

2 2 3 20 75 95.99 4101 1148280 150 5.212 0.391 115.239 114.848 18.860
3 3 4 15 110 99.05 3806 1065680 150 4.540 0.499 114.848 114.349 15.300
4 3 5 45 45 99.02 275 77000 67 1.774 0.080 114.848 114.768 15.750
5 5 6 50 95 95.04 225 63000 67 1.224 0.116 114.768 114.652 19.610
6 6 7 20 35 95.16 175 49000 67 0.769 0.027 114.652 114.625 19.470
7 7 8 35 37 95.20 155 43400 67 0.614 0.023 114.625 114.602 19.400
8 8 9 10 37 99.88 10 2800 67 0.004 0.000 114.602 114.602 14.720
9 8 10 10 17 95.69 110 30800 67 0.326 0.006 114.602 114.596 18.910
10 10 11 20 30 95.67 20 5600 67 0.014 0.000 114.596 114.596 18.930
11 10 12 10 15 96.10 80 22400 67 0.181 0.003 114.596 114.593 18.490
12 12 13 35 33 96.30 35 9800 67 0.039 0.001 114.593 114.592 18.290
13 12 14 35 35 96.12 35 9800 67 0.039 0.001 114.593 114.592 18.470
14 4 15 70 16 99.23 3037 850360 150 2.990 0.048 114.349 114.301 15.070
15 15 16 23 185 99.89 1942 543760 150 1.308 0.242 114.301 114.059 14.170
16 16 17 16 60 99.87 166 46480 67 0.697 0.042 114.059 114.017 14.150
17 17 18 11 52 97.81 69 19320 67 0.137 0.007 114.017 114.010 16.200
18 18 19 11 45 98.08 11 3080 67 0.005 0.000 114.010 114.010 15.930
19 18 20 24 15 97.64 47 13160 67 0.068 0.001 114.010 114.009 16.370
20 20 21 23 57 97.44 23 6440 67 0.018 0.001 114.009 114.008 16.570
21 17 22 49 110 98.81 49 13720 67 0.073 0.008 114.017 114.009 15.200
22 17 23 32 105 98.59 32 8960 67 0.033 0.003 114.017 114.014 15.420
23 16 24 24 95 97.52 1753 490840 102 7.065 0.671 114.059 113.388 15.870
24 24 25 33 31 96.84 33 9240 67 0.035 0.001 113.388 113.387 16.550
25 24 26 12 45 96.84 1696 474880 102 6.646 0.299 113.388 113.089 16.250
26 26 27 14 16 96.43 14 3920 67 0.007 0.000 113.089 113.089 16.660
27 26 28 10 32 97.36 1670 467600 102 6.459 0.207 113.089 112.882 15.520
28 28 29 5 48 95.62 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 112.882 112.882 17.260
29 28 30 14 32 96.48 1655 463400 102 6.352 0.203 112.882 112.679 16.200
30 30 31 5 53 94.02 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 112.679 112.679 18.660
31 30 32 8 35 96.85 1636 458080 102 6.218 0.218 112.679 112.461 15.610
32 32 33 6 51 96.84 6 1680 67 0.001 0.000 112.461 112.461 15.620
33 32 34 13 30 96.32 1622 454160 102 6.119 0.184 112.461 112.277 15.960
34 34 35 5 20 96.63 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 112.277 112.277 15.650
35 34 36 39 65 95.84 1604 449120 102 5.994 0.390 112.277 111.887 16.050
36 36 37 12 37 95.41 74 20720 67 0.156 0.006 111.887 111.881 16.470
37 37 38 5 42 95.50 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 111.881 111.881 16.380
38 37 39 13 35 95.74 57 15960 67 0.097 0.003 111.881 111.878 16.140
39 39 40 13 36 94.61 13 3640 67 0.006 0.000 111.878 111.878 17.270
40 39 41 11 18 95.48 31 8680 67 0.031 0.001 111.878 111.877 16.400
41 41 42 15 48 94.28 15 4200 67 0.008 0.000 111.877 111.877 17.600
42 41 43 5 16 95.26 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 111.877 111.877 16.620
43 36 44 27 260 94.34 1491 417480 102 5.237 1.362 111.887 110.525 16.190
44 44 45 21 60 96.01 21 5880 67 0.015 0.001 110.525 110.524 14.510
45 44 46 13 38 94.83 1443 404040 82 14.250 0.542 110.525 109.983 15.150
46 46 47 18 55 95.46 18 5040 67 0.011 0.001 109.983 109.982 14.520
47 46 48 28 53 92.44 1412 395360 82 13.690 0.726 109.983 109.257 16.820
48 48 49 85 132 93.00 85 23800 67 0.202 0.027 109.257 109.230 16.230
49 48 50 34 75 91.91 1299 363720 82 11.730 0.880 109.257 108.377 16.470
50 50 51 38 47 92.65 92 25760 67 0.234 0.011 108.377 108.366 15.720
51 51 52 5 32 92.54 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 108.366 108.366 15.830
52 51 53 49 37 92.06 49 13720 67 0.073 0.003 108.366 108.363 16.300
53 50 54 23 80 90.07 1173 328440 67 25.970 2.077 108.377 106.300 16.230
54 54 55 123 135 91.91 123 34440 67 0.400 0.054 106.300 106.246 14.340
55 54 56 39 35 89.18 503 140840 67 5.421 0.190 106.300 106.110 16.930
56 56 57 55 110 90.85 55 15400 67 0.090 0.010 106.110 106.100 15.250
57 56 58 36 37 88.29 409 114520 67 3.697 0.137 106.110 105.973 17.680
58 58 59 138 135 88.50 138 38640 67 0.495 0.067 105.973 105.906 17.410
59 58 60 19 60 86.35 235 65800 67 1.326 0.080 105.973 105.893 19.540
60 60 61 42 80 87.21 42 11760 67 0.055 0.004 105.893 105.889 18.680
61 60 62 10 30 86.00 174 48720 67 0.761 0.023 105.893 105.870 19.870
62 62 63 34 54 86.05 34 9520 67 0.037 0.002 105.870 105.868 19.820
63 62 64 34 48 85.05 130 36400 67 0.444 0.021 105.870 105.849 20.800
64 64 65 30 73 85.68 30 8400 67 0.029 0.002 105.849 105.847 20.170
65 64 66 21 30 84.81 66 18480 67 0.127 0.004 105.849 105.845 21.040
66 66 67 45 85 84.39 45 12600 67 0.062 0.005 105.845 105.840 21.450
67 4 68 141 65 97.86 754 211120 67 11.460 0.745 114.349 113.604 15.740
68 68 69 24 124 98.98 24 6720 67 0.019 0.002 113.604 113.602 14.620
69 5 69 5 30 98.98 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 114.768 114.768 15.790
70 68 70 95 52 98.30 589 164920 67 7.260 0.377 113.604 113.227 14.930
71 70 71 44 123 98.83 47 13160 67 0.068 0.008 113.227 113.219 14.390
72 71 65 3 55 98.98 3 840 67 0.000 0.000 113.219 113.219 14.240
73 70 72 30 70 97.79 447 125160 67 4.358 0.305 113.227 112.922 15.130
74 72 73 21 82 96.76 43 12040 67 0.057 0.005 112.922 112.917 16.160
75 73 74 2 20 96.34 22 6160 67 0.017 0.000 112.917 112.917 16.580
76 74 71 2 35 95.82 2 560 67 0.000 0.000 112.917 112.917 17.100
77 74 75 18 30 96.32 18 5040 67 0.011 0.000 112.917 112.917 16.600
78 72 76 39 60 97.24 374 104720 67 3.133 0.188 112.922 112.734 15.490
79 76 77 22 50 97.11 137 38360 67 0.489 0.024 112.734 112.710 15.600
80 77 78 35 18 97.05 65 18200 67 0.123 0.002 112.710 112.708 15.660
81 78 79 11 45 97.24 11 3080 67 0.005 0.000 112.708 112.708 15.470
82 78 84 19 40 97.12 19 5320 67 0.013 0.001 112.708 112.707 15.590
83 77 80 22 35 96.82 50 14000 67 0.076 0.003 112.710 112.707 15.890
84 80 81 26 42 96.54 26 7280 67 0.023 0.001 112.707 112.706 16.170
85 80 73 2 22 96.76 2 560 67 0.000 0.000 112.707 112.707 15.950
86 76 82 13 105 96.85 198 55440 67 0.966 0.101 112.734 112.633 15.780
87 82 83 31 42 97.00 31 8680 67 0.031 0.001 112.633 112.632 15.630
88 82 84 85 38 97.12 154 43120 67 0.607 0.023 112.633 112.610 15.490
89 84 85 34 63 96.94 34 9520 67 0.037 0.002 112.707 112.705 15.770
90 84 86 35 42 97.05 35 9800 67 0.039 0.002 112.707 112.705 15.660
91 54 87 5 15 89.50 524 146720 67 5.847 0.088 106.300 106.212 16.710
92 87 88 5 60 87.09 519 145320 67 5.745 0.345 106.212 105.867 18.780
93 88 89 10 38 87.65 514 143920 67 5.643 0.214 105.867 105.653 18.000
94 89 90 13 18 86.64 93 26040 67 0.239 0.004 105.653 105.649 19.010
95 90 91 10 22 86.81 10 2800 67 0.004 0.000 105.649 105.649 18.840
96 90 92 13 42 86.26 70 19600 67 0.141 0.006 105.649 105.643 19.380
97 92 93 18 25 86.39 18 5040 67 0.011 0.000 105.643 105.643 19.250
98 92 94 39 45 85.21 39 10920 67 0.048 0.002 105.643 105.641 20.430
 99 89 95 30 75 86.83 411 115080 67 3.731 0.280 105.653 105.373 18.540
100 95 95 25 55 85.58 381 106680 67 3.243 0.178 105.373 105.195 19.620
101 95 97 10 42 85.10 356 99680 67 2.860 0.120 105.373 105.253 20.150
102 97 98 30 15 85.02 346 96880 67 2.713 0.041 105.253 105.212 20.190
103 98 99 20 46 85.46 20 5600 67 0.014 0.001 105.212 105.211 19.750
104 98 100 18 30 86.00 57 15960 67 0.097 0.003 105.212 105.209 19.210
105 100 101 17 25 85.46 17 4760 67 0.010 0.000 105.209 105.209 19.750
106 100 102 22 17 86.16 22 6160 67 0.017 0.000 105.209 105.209 19.050
107 98 103 33 35 84.49 239 66920 67 1.368 0.048 105.212 105.164 20.670
108 103 104 29 20 84.73 29 8120 67 0.028 0.001 105.164 105.163 20.430
109 103 105 17 32 84.44 177 49560 67 0.785 0.025 105.164 105.139 20.700
110 105 106 16 15 84.37 160 44800 67 0.651 0.010 105.139 105.129 20.760
111 106 107 22 33 83.83 144 40320 67 0.536 0.018 105.129 105.111 21.280
112 107 108 81 177 83.31 81 22680 67 0.185 0.033 105.111 105.078 21.770
113 107 109 7 37 83.59 41 11480 67 0.052 0.002 105.111 105.109 21.520
114 109 110 12 25 82.22 12 3360 67 0.005 0.000 105.109 105.109 22.890
115 109 111 22 30 84.48 22 6160 67 0.017 0.000 105.109 105.109 20.630
116 15 113 27 60 99.46 1025 287000 150 0.401 0.024 114.301 114.277 14.820
117 113 114 5 18 99.58 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 114.277 114.277 14.700
118 113 115 34 125 99.56 993 278040 102 2.469 0.309 114.277 113.968 14.410
119 115 116 14 20 99.67 14 3920 67 0.007 0.000 113.968 113.968 14.300
120 115 117 16 17 99.49 945 264600 82 6.514 0.111 113.968 113.857 14.370
121 117 118 35 45 99.80 35 9800 67 0.039 0.002 113.857 113.855 14.060
122 117 119 15 38 99.39 894 250320 82 5.879 0.223 113.857 113.634 14.240
123 119 120 11 42 99.92 11 3080 67 0.005 0.000 113.634 113.634 13.710
124 119 122 25 55 99.60 868 243040 82 5.566 0.306 113.634 113.328 13.730
125 122 123 16 60 99.09 89 24920 67 0.220 0.013 113.328 113.315 14.230
126 123 124 19 40 98.76 24 6720 67 0.019 0.001 113.315 113.314 14.550
127 124 125 5 32 98.46 5 1400 67 0.001 0.000 113.314 113.314 14.850
128 123 126 11 45 100.83 49 13720 67 0.073 0.003 113.315 113.312 12.480
129 126 127 12 30 100.33 12 3360 67 0.005 0.000 113.312 113.312 12.980
130 126 128 26 32 100.46 26 7280 67 0.023 0.001 113.312 113.311 12.850
131 122 129 11 30 99.70 754 211120 82 4.290 0.129 113.328 113.199 13.500
132 129 130 12 42 99.68 12 3360 67 0.005 0.000 113.199 113.199 13.520
133 129 131 9 35 99.40 731 204680 82 4.051 0.142 113.199 113.057 13.660
134 131 132 13 52 99.41 13 3640 67 0.006 0.000 113.057 113.057 13.650
135 131 133 14 135 98.97 709 198520 82 3.828 0.517 113.057 112.540 13.570
136 133 134 24 76 99.17 24 6720 67 0.019 0.001 112.540 112.539 13.370
137 133 135 22 42 98.97 671 187880 82 3.457 0.145 112.540 112.395 13.430
138 135 136 18 85 99.31 18 5040 67 0.011 0.001 112.395 112.394 13.080
139 135 137 28 110 98.73 631 176680 82 3.086 0.339 112.395 112.056 13.330
140 137 138 30 95 98.58 30 8400 67 0.029 0.003 112.056 112.053 13.470
141 137 139 29 33 98.96 573 160440 82 2.582 0.085 112.056 111.971 13.010
142 139 140 15 46 99.07 35 9800 67 0.039 0.002 111.971 111.969 12.900
143 140 141 20 40 99.25 20 5600 67 0.014 0.001 111.969 111.968 12.720
144 139 142 42 65 98.95 509 142520 82 2.074 0.135 111.971 111.836 12.890
145 142 143 22 40 99.16 22 6160 67 0.017 0.001 111.836 111.835 12.680
146 142 144 42 85 98.68 445 124600 82 1.617 0.137 111.836 111.699 13.020
147 144 145 43 85 98.87 89 24920 67 0.220 0.019 111.699 111.680 12.810
148 145 146 46 44 99.24 46 12880 67 0.065 0.003 111.680 111.677 12.440
149 144 147 15 30 98.92 314 87920 82 0.848 0.025 111.699 111.674 12.750
150 147 148 31 58 98.84 31 8680 67 0.031 0.002 111.674 111.672 12.830
151 147 149 13 34 98.91 268 75040 82 0.633 0.022 111.674 111.652 12.740
152 149 150 16 25 99.31 16 4480 67 0.009 0.000 111.652 111.652 12.340
153 149 151 27 28 98.97 239 66920 82 0.512 0.014 111.652 111.638 12.670
154 151 152 19 44 99.34 19 5320 67 0.013 0.001 111.638 111.637 12.300
155 151 153 27 60 99.14 193 54040 82 0.345 0.021 111.638 111.617 12.480
156 153 154 22 26 99.47 132 36960 67 0.456 0.012 111.617 111.605 12.140
157 154 155 65 35 99.03 90 25200 67 0.225 0.008 111.605 111.597 12.570
158 155 156 25 48 99.28 25 7000 67 0.021 0.001 111.597 111.596 12.320
159 154 157 20 46 98.12 20 5600 67 0.014 0.001 111.605 111.604 13.480
160 153 158 34 100 99.28 34 9520 67 0.037 0.004 111.617 111.613 12.330

Length of 160mm o/d (150mm i/d) PVC Pipe 496.000 m

Length of 110mm o/d (102mm i/d) PVC Pipe 719.000 m
Length of 90mm o/d (82mm i/d) PVC Pipe 963.000 m
Length of 75mm o/d (67mm i/d) PVC Pipe 6242.000 m
 Detailed Scheme Report for Augmentation of Rural W/S Scheme for

Providing Safe Drinking Water to village Chawa

Block & Distt Gurdaspur.(Pb)

( World Bank Assisted Pilot Project)

***
Sub Work No. 1 Head Works

1.1 TUBEWELL:

Prov. & Installing 1 No.200mm dia straight

tubewell by drilling 650mm bore with Reverse /Direct Rotary rig upto 125
mtr. depth BGL using electronic logging though out the depth of bore.
i) Including cost of stainless steel wire wound, cage
type strainer (of reputed make), 6.3 mm equivalent
thickness ,
ii) M.S Blind pipe (of reputed make),
iii) Developing & stabilizing of the tubewell with Air compressor
(330 cfm capacity) and stability with submersible pumping
set of suitable capacity, capable of yielding required
quantity of potable water, complete in all respects.
at Water Works site. Details in Annexure A-I
1) Const. Of Tubewell confirming to IS 2800-1979
(Part I & II) with latest amendment.
2) MS Pipe & Sockets confirming to IS 4270 of 1992 with
latest amendment
3) Stainless Steel Strainer, confirming to IS 8110 of 2000
with
latest amendment
4) Development of T/W confirming to IS 2300 of 1979 with
latest amendment
1 No. @ Rs 600000/- each Rs 600000.00
(Details in Annexure A-I)

1.2 PUMP CHAMBER

Constructing of brick masonry pump chamber of

size 3.70 4.30 mtr. complete in all respect as per
 W/S & Sanitation Deptt. standard design
(Drawing D/4/1 to D/4/5) including cost of material
such as bricks, cement, Bajri & TMT steel,
internal wiring etc. complete at Water Works site.

1 Job. @ Rs 153000.00 /- each job Rs 153000.00

(Detail as per Annexure A2)
1.3 PUMPING MACHINERY
A) Providing, installing, Testing and commissioning
Of One no electrically driven Submersible pumping
set (of Reputed make) capable of delivering 716
LPM against a head of 57mtr. alongwith Electric
panel board consisting of electric appliances such as
Automatic Star-Delta Push Button starter, Main
Switch, V.M.,A.M., ELCB, Shunt Capacitor, Single
Phase preventer, Indicating Lamps, Kit-Kat etc.
including MS column pipe of suitable size- 30 mtr.
(in 3 mtr. lengths each with flanges, screwed and
welded on both sides) rubber gaskets, nuts and bolts,
submersible cable (reputed make) complete in all
respects as per Specifications .

1 Job @ Rs 100,000/-each Rs 100,000.00

B) Providing, installing, Testing and commissioning
Of One no Gen. set 20 B.H.P (of Reputed make)
capable of running the pumping machinery along
with Electric panel board commplete in all
respects as per Specifications .

1 Job @ Rs 191500/-each Rs 191500.00

1.4 CI FITTING INSIDE PUMP CHAMBER
Providing & Installing C.I Double flanged pipe,
D/F S.V., D/F N.R.V.and specials such as CI
Bends, Tail Piece, Tees etc. inside the PC and
as per W/S & Sanitation Standard design
and Depth gauge complete in all respect.
1 job @ Rs. 30000/- each job Rs 30000.00
Detail at Annexure A-3(1) & A-3(2) and in
Drawing D/3/5
1.5 DISINFECTION UNIT
Providing & Installing, Testing & Commissioning
of One No. disinfection unit through Silver Ionization
technique of required capacity of water (583lpm)
 as per Layout Drawing D/6
1 job @ Rs 1,60,000/-each Rs 1,60,000.00

1.6 RCC OHSR

a) Construction of One No RCC, OHSR of capacity

150,000 Ltrs., with height upto FSL 28mtr., including
the cost of inlet ,outlet, scour pipe and overflow
vertical Pipes, CI Duck Foot Bends, Expansion joints,
Puddle Collars, Lightning Conductor, Earthing, MS
Steel Ladder for Tank Portion, Stair case with GI Pipe
Railing on both sides, ventilator, Scour/ over flow
S.Vs. (to be fitted in vertical pipes) and making Connection
with Rising Main and Distribution Pipeline complete in all
respects as per W/S & Sanitation Deptt. approved design
& drawing and confirming to outline sketch (Including
Bearing Capacity Testing of soil & Submission of Test
Reports And Earth quake resistant design of OHSR). As
per DWSS specifications. Drawing D / 7/1 to D/7/2
1 No @ Rs 1570000/- each Rs 1570000.00

b) Poviding & fixing Automatic Electronic Water Level

Control device 1 No. @ Rs. 20000/- each Rs. 20,000.00

Total Rs.1590000.00

1.7 CI RISING MAIN

a) Supplying, Laying, Jointing, cutting and Testing of
PVC Pipes 10 kg pressure (Class LA) and specials
including cost ofExcavation complete in all respects.
160 mm o/d PVC Pipe 40 Mtr. @ Rs.509/- Mtr =Rs.22905.00
Rs. 22905.00

1.8 DEVELOPMENT OF WATER WORKS

Providing & Stringing of G.I.

a) Providing & fixing barbed wire & 3 plug fencing around the Head
Works site in 4rows @ 8 c/c, complete in all respects
344Mtr @ Rs. 11/- per Mtr. Rs. 3784/-
(Details in Annexure A5)
b) Providing & Fixing MS Angle Iron
Pickets as per DWSS std.Drg. D/4/1
33No. @s. 305/- each Rs. 10065/-
(Details in Annexure A6)
c) Providing & Fixing D-Hooks
as per DWSS std.Drg. D/4/2
30 Nos. @ Rs. 60/- each Rs. 1800/-
(Details in Annexure A-7)
d) Construction of Brick Masonry corner
pillars as per W/S & Sanitation Deptt.
standard design including Cost of material
such as Bricks, sand, cement, Bajri, Etc.
complete respects as per W/S & Sanitation
Deptt. standard design. (Drawing D/4/3)
4 Nos @ Rs. 4000 /- each Rs 16000/-
(Details in Annexure A-8)
e) Providing and fixing in position steel gate
complete with masonary pillars as per W/S
& Sanitation Deptt. standard design.
(Drawing D/4/4)
1.83 mtr. wide 1 No @ Rs 11000/- each Rs 11000 /-
(Details in Annexure A9)
f) Construction of Foot Path with BM Toe
wall on both side, earth filling inside as per
standard drawing D/4/5
25 Mtr. @ Rs. 364/- per mtr. Rs. 9100/-
(Details in Annexure A9)
g) Prov. & fixing MS Sign Board
1 No. @ Rs. 5000/- each (LS) Rs. 5000/-
h)Plinth Protection of OHSR
1No.@ Rs.5000/-each (LS) as per Rs. 13500/-
standard drawing D/4/7
Details in Annexure A-12
Total Rs. 70249/-

Grand total (Sub Head No. 1) Rs. 2917654.00

 Detailed Scheme Report for Augmentation of Rural W/S Scheme for

Providing Safe Drinking Water to village Chawa

Block & Distt Gurdaspur.(Pb)

( World Bank Assisted Pilot Project)

***
Sub Work No. 2 Distribution System

2.1 A) Providing Laying, jointing, fixing and testing

AC/U-PVC pipes & specials including cost
of material, excavation and back filling etc.
complete in all respects including specials,
carriage to site of work and all taxes etc. complete.
A.C/U-PVC/CI Pressure Pipes

(i) 160mm o/d PVC pipe

490 mtr.@ Rs.365/-per mtr. Rs 181040.00

(ii) 110mm o/d PVC pipe

687 mtr. @ Rs.172 per mtr. Rs. 118164.00

(iii) 90mm o/d PVC Pipes

995 mtr. @ Rs 137 /-per mtr. Rs 136315.00

(iv) 75mm o/d PVC pipes

6242 mtr. @ Rs.123/-mtr Rs. 767766.00
B)
i) Provision for dismantling the brick/concrete/metalled
paving of streets and relaying the same to the original
conditions.
8350 80/100x0.65 = 4342 sqm @ Rs 20/-per sqm. Rs . 86840.00
(Details in Annexure A11)

ii) Providing & Fixing C.I.Sluice valves, CI flanged tail piece

nuts and bolts etc. complete including cost of
PVC pipe (SV spindle to ground level, 110mm o/d)
to site of work
 150 mm i/d 3Nos. @ Rs 2850/- each.= 8550/- Rs 15800.00
100 mm i/d 1Nos. @ Rs 2300/- each.= 2300/-
80mm i/d 3 Nos. @ Rs.1650/- each = 4950/-
Rs. 1305925.00

C.O. to General Abstract of Cost

Detailed Scheme Report for Augmentation of Rural W/S Scheme for

Providing Safe Drinking Water to village Chawa

Block & Distt Gurdaspur.(Pb)

( World Bank Assisted Pilot Project)

***
Sub Work No. 3 General

3.1 Topographical survey and Digitalization of maps

of village Chawa for preparing detailed estimate.
Survey Area = 98.80 Acres
1 Job (Actual) Rs. 45,000.00
3.2 Provision for New Electric Connection from PSEB
1 Job L.S. Rs. 40,000.00
Total Rs. 85,000.00

C.O. to General Abstract of Cost

Deatailed Scheme Report for Augmentation of Rural W/S Scheme for

Providing Safe Drinking Water to village Chawa

Block & Distt Gurdaspur.(Pb)

( World Bank Assisted Pilot Project)

***

GENERAL ABSTRACT OF COST

Sub Work No Description Amount

1 Head Works Rs. 2917654.00

2 Distribution System Rs.1305925.00

3 General Rs. 85000.00

Total Rs 4308579.00
Add 3% Contingencies Charges Rs 129257.00
G.Total Rs 4437836.00
Say Rs. 44.38 Lacs

Per Capita Cost

(i) On present population (2006) 44.38/ 3040 = Rs 1460/-
(ii) On prospective population (2021) 44.38/ 3648 = Rs. 1216/-

Govt./Beneficiary Share
Beneficiaries share @10% of Capital cost
43.93 10/100 = Rs 4.39 lacs
World Bank/ Punjab Govt. share @ 90% of capitol cost
43.93x90/100+ 0.45lac digital survey cost = Rs.39.99 lacs

Sub Divisional Engineer, Executive Engineer,

W/S & Sanitation (RWS)Sub Division, W/S & Sanitation (RWS) No.1,
Gurdaspur. Division, Gurdaspur.
 2. Design calculations for Multi Village Scheme Based on Tube well as source of
Water Supply

********
Design Calculation
Sr. Name H.B. Population as Present Prospective Population
No. of No. per census Population @
Village 2001 Total/ SC 1.228% @20% @35% increase
increase per increase over over the present
year up to the present population for 30
2006 @ 6.14% population for years
15 years
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Dummewal 377 628 667 800 900
(N.C.)
2 Raipur 491 499 530 636 716
(P.C.)
1127 1197 1436 1616

Rate of Water Supply 70 ltrs. h / day

Daily water supply requiirement for 15 year =1436 70 = 100520 ltrs.

Daily water supply requiirment for 30 years = 1616 70 = 113120 ltrs.

1. TUBEWELL:- (Designed period 15 years)

Daily Water Supply requirement = 100520 ltrs.

Pumping hours per day = 6 hours

Pumping capacity per hour =100520/ 6 hours =16753 ltrs. or 279 LPM

One No.200 mm i/d straight T/W up to 90 mtr. depth below ground level is
proposed to be installed at site. Which is giving discharge 26800 ltrs. /h against the
required discharge of 16753 ltrs./per hour

2 PUMP CHEMBER :-

It is proposed to construct one No. 3.70 4.30 mtrs. Size rectangular pump
chamber to house the pumping machinery required for the scheme.

3 OVER HEAD SERVICE RESERVIOR:- (Design period 15 years)

 Daily W/S requirement 100520 ltr. capacity of OHSR 50% of the daily
requirement

100520 50 / 100 = 50260 ltr. Say 50000 ltrs

Hence it is proposed to provide one No. RCC over head service reservoir of
50000ltrs capacity with 21.50 mtr. height upto FSL as per W/S & Sanitation
Department Standard Design. The height of OHSR increased 1.50 mtr. to achieve
the minimum terminal head (8 mtr.) at village Raipur.

4 RISING MAIN:- (Design Period 30 years) common

Daily water supply requirement = 113120 ltrs.
Required capacity of the rising main with 6 hour daily pumping 113120 / 6 =
18853 ltrs. Say 18900 ltrs.

Design discharge per day 18900 24 = 453600 ltrs of water per day Hence
providing 6 inches (150 mm) i/d C.I. rising main which carry a discharge of
480000 litres of water per day with a loss of head 1.50 mtrs in 1000 mtrs and
velocity 0.32 mtrs per second against the required discharge of 453600 ltrs.
Length of rising main =35 mtrs.
Loss of head in rising main = 35 1.50 / 1000 = 0.05 mtr. Say 1.00 mtr.

5 PUMPING MACHINERY:-

1 Height of OHSR up to FSL = 21.50 mtrs.

II Spring level. = 13.72 mtrs.
III Hydraulic head required above FSL = 4.57 mtrs.
To OHSR
IV Loss of head in rising main. = 1.00 mtrs
V Depression head = 4.50 mtrs.
VI Loss of head in pump & specials = 1.52 mtrs.
VII Fall in water table = 6.00 mtrs.
__________
52.81 mtrs.
__________
Say = 55.00 mtrs.

1 Electric driven pumping set up to be designed for a period of 15 years.

Pumping Capacity per hour. = 16753 ltrs.

Submersible Pumping Set capacity. = 16753 / 60 = 279 LPM

HP of electric motor with 60 % efficiency = 16753 55 100

--------------------------= 5.60 HP
4572 60 60

Say 7.50 HP
 Hence it is proposed to provide one No. submersible pumping set (s) capable
of delivering 16753 ltrs of water per hour against a head of 55 mtr.
 3. Design of Single village Water Supply Scheme based on Canal Water
as source of Water Supply

CALCULATION FOR PIPES AT HEAD WORKS

(Reference Flow diagram & layout plan of head works of the scheme)
Total Daily Requirement of Water Supply. = 320600 Litres.
Design Discharge with 6 hours pumping:
320600x24/6 =1282400 Litres.
or = 1282 Kiloliters.
a)FROM S/S TANK TO SUCTION CUM SCOUR WELL.
Av.Ground Level. = 191.50 Mtr.
Discharged. = 1282 Kiloliters.
FSL of S/S Tank. =191.05 Mtr.
BL of S/S Tank. =189.55 Mtr.
Distance =76 Mtr.
Provide 200mm i/d A.C.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kilolitres/day
with loss of head 1.42 mtr.per 1000 mtrs. of pipe line at velocity of 0.45 Mtr.per second.
Therefore fall will be = 1.42x76/1000 =0.10 Say: 0.10 Mtrs.
FSL of Suction Cum Scour Well: 189.55(-) =0.10 =189.45
BL the Suction Cum Scour Well:189.45 (-) =1.00 =188.45 Mtr.

b)FROM SUCTION WELL TO PUMP CHAMBER.

Discharge = 1282 Kiloliters.
Floor level of Pump Chamber. =191.80 Mtr
Distance =4 Mtr.
Providing 150mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kilolitres per day with
a loss of head 9.60 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs.of pipe line at a velocity of 0.85 Mtr.per second.

c)FROM PUMP CHAMBER TO HIGH LEVEL TANK.

Av.Ground Level. =191.50 Mtr.
Floor level of Pump Chamber. =191.80 Mtr.
Bed level of the HLT. =192.45Mtr.
FSL of HLT=192.45+1.80Mtr. =194.25Mtr.
Discharged. =1282 Kilolitres.
Maximum Distance. =40 Mtrs.
Providing 150mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kililitres per day with
a loss of head 9.60 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs.of pipe line at a velocity of 0.85 Mtr.per second.

d) FROM HIGH LEVEL TANK TO FILTER BED.

Bed level of High Level Tank. =192.45Mtrs.
Discharge. 320600 Litres. or = 321 Kilolitres.
Maximum distance. = 80 Mtrs.
Providing 150mm i/d A.C.pipe which can carry a discharge of 330kilolitres per day with a
loss of head 0.51 Mtrs. per 1000 Mtrs. of pipe line at a velocity of 0.22 Mtrs. per second.
Therefore fall will be :-0.51x80/1000 =0.04 Mtrs. Say:0.10 Mtrs.
FSL of F.Beds. =192.45(-)0.10Mtr. =192.35 Mtrs.
Top Level of the filter media. 101.47(-)1.00Mtr. = 191.35 mtr.

e) FROM FILTER BED TO CLEAR WATER TANK.

Discharge 320600 Liters or = 321 Kililitres.
Maximum distance. =80 Mtrs.
Providing 150mm i/d A.C.pipe which can carry a discharge of 330 Kilolitres per day with
a loss of head 0.51 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs. of pipe line at a velocity of 0.22 Mtr.per second.
Therefore fall will be 0.51x80/1000 =0.04Mtrs. Say: 0.10 Mtrs.
Top level of filter media =100.47 Mtr.
FSL of CWT. =191.35(-)0.10 =191.25.47 Mtr.
Bed level of CWT. =191.25(-)1.65 =189.60 Mtr.

f) FROM CLEAR WATER TANK TO PUMP CHAMBER.

Discharge. =1282400 Litres or 1282 Kilolitres.
Maximum Distance. =65 Mtrs.
Providing 150mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kilolitres per day with
a loss of head 9.60 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs. of pipe line at a velocity of 0.85 Mtr. per second.

g) FROM PUMP CHAMBER TO O.H.S.R.

Discharge. =1282400 Litres or 1282 Kilolitres.
Maximum Distance. =28+15 Bye Pass = 43 Mtr.
Providing 150mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 Kilolitres per day with
a loss of head 9.60 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs. of pipe line at a velocity of 0.85 Mtr.per second.

h) BYE PASS.
Provide 150mm i/d C.I. pipe = 15 Mtrs.

i) SCOUR PIPE:
Provide 100mm i/d A.C.pipe 85 Mtrs

Design for Inlet Channel & Machinery for Pump Chamber at Minor.

Pumping machinery at minor.

Daily requirement of water. = 320600 Ltrs.
Pumping Hours. = 6 Hours.
Pumping Cap.per hrs. 320600/6 = 53433 Ltrs.
Pumping capacity per minute. 53433/60 = 891 LPM
Say: = 900 LPM.
Raising Main.
Daily requirement . = 320600 Ltrs.
Total daily requirement @ 3 times
320600x24/6 =1282400 Ltrs.
or =1282 K.Ltrs.
Length of Rising Main. =2300 Mtrs.

So Provide 200mm i/d Rising Main AC pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300
K.L.per day with a loss of head 1.63 mtr.per 1000 mtrs. of pipe line at velocity of 0.45 per
second.
2300x1.63/1000 =3.75 mtr. Say. = 4.00 Mtrs.

Pumping Head for Raw Water Pumping Set.

Hydraulic Head above FSL of S/S Tank. = 5.00 Mt.
Suction lift from Sukhchain Minor. = 1.50 Mt.
Loss of Head in pipe & specials. = 4.00 Mt.
Loss of head in pumping set. = 1.50 Mt.
Total: =12.00 Mt.
BHP of Electric Motor with 65% efficiency.

900x12x100
102x0.746x60x65 =3.64 BHP Say: =5.00 BHP

So Providing & installing One No. Horizental Centrifugal Pumping set capable
dof delivering 900 LPM Raw Water of 12 Mtr. Head suitable coupled with 5.00 BHP
Electric Motor.
 4. Design of Multi Village Water Supply Scheme based on Canal as source

of Water Supply Scheme

Brief Details
(i) Name of villages covered : i) Phullawala
ii) Tamkot
iii) Chak Tamkot
(ii) If there is bifurcation mention Here : i) Tamkot
ii) Chak Tamkot
(iii) Original Scheme Commissioned in : 9/1973
(iv) Proposed service level : 70 LPCD
(v) Present spring level : 3.35 Mtr. BGL

DESIGN CLACULATION
1. Population :-
S. Name of Population as Population @ Prospective Prospective
No. Village per census 1.228% population @ population @
2001 increase per 20% increase 35% increase
year i.e. over the over the
6.14% present present
increase population for population for
(2006) 15 years next 30 years
(2021) (2036)
1. Tamkot 2392 2539 3047 3428
2. Chak 781 829 995 1119
Tamkot
Total 3173 3368 4042 4547
DAILY REQUIREMENT OF WATER
(i) Prospective Population for next 15 years = 4042 Persons
Per capita demand of water for domestic use = 70 LPCD
Daily requirement of water for scheme : 4042 x 70 = 282940 Ltr.
Say = 282950 Ltr.
(ii) Prospective Population for next 30 years = 4547 Persons
Per capita demand of water for domestic use = 70 LPCD
Daily requirement of water for scheme : 4547 x 70 = 318290 Ltr.
Say = 318300 Ltr.

1. INLET CHANNEL( Designed for 30 Years )

 The raw water for this scheme to be taken from Lakker Wala Minor which
is running at a distance about 3380 Mtrs. away from proposed water works.
Total daily requirement of water = 318300 Ltrs.
Daily Pumping Hours = 6 Hours
Designed discharge of inlet channel 318300 x 24/6 = 1273200 Ltrs.
Discharge 1273200 x 1/1000 x 1/24 x 1/60 x 1/60= 0.015 cumecs
F.S.L of Minor = 199.68 Mtrs.
B.L. of Minor = 198.88 Mtrs.
Length of Piped Inlet Channel = 3380 Mtrs.
So provide 200mm i/d AC piped inlet channel which can carry a discharge
of 1300 Kls/day with a loss of head 1.63Mtrs./1000 Mtrs. with velocity of
0.45Mtrs./second.
Hence this inlet channel is safe which can carry the discharge of 1300
Kls/day against the required discharge of 1273 Kls/day.
Therefore total losses of the piped inlet channel = 3380 x 1.63/1000 = 5.51
Say 6.00 Mtrs.
Cost provision for construction of 200mm i/d piped inlet channel with
pumping station has been made in this estimate.
Water Works components are to be designed for 15 Years
2. STORAGE AND SEDIMENTATION TANK (S&S TANK)
Daily requirement of water : 282950 Liter
Canal being maximum closed rotational 15 days capacity proposed
Requirement for 15 days = 282950 x 15 : 4244250 Liter
Add 25% losses due to percolation and evaporation : 1061063 Liter
Total Required capacity : 5305313 Liter
Proposed depth : 2.50 Mtr
Area of required New S/S tank : 5305313 x 1/2.50 x 1/1000 : 2122.13 Sqm.
Av. size of S/S Tank = 2122.13 : 46.07 Mtr. Say: 46.10 Mtr.
Proposed Av. size : 46.10 x 46.10 Mtr
Top size : 48.60 x 48.60 Mtr.
Bed size : 43.60 x 43.60 Mtr.
Cost provision for construction of S/S tank of Av. size 46.10 x 46.10 mtr.
with 2.50 Mtrs. working depth has been made in this estimate.

3. SUCTION CUM SCOUR WELL (S&S WELL)

 1.50 mtr dia Suction-Cum-Scour Well is required to pump raw water from
storage tank to high level tank(HLT). Cost provision for construction of R.C.C. S/S
well has been made in this estimate.
4. HIGH LEVEL TANK (HLT)
Capacity required @ 50% of the daily requirement : 282950 x50=141475 Ltr.
100
No. of proposed HLT : 1 No.
Working depth : 1.80 mtr.
Proposed size = 141475 x 1/1.80 x 1/1000 x 7/22 x 4/1: 10.00 Mtr.i/d
It is proposed to provided one No. HLT of 10.00 m dia to cater the need.
Cost provision for construction of HLT has been made in this estimate.
5. FILTER BEDS (F.BEDS)
Daily requirement of water : 282950 Liter
Filtration rate : 2500 Liter/Sqm/Day
Area required 282950 x 1 : 113.18 sqm.
2500
No. of proposed F.beds : 2 No.
Dia of proposed F.Bed 113.18 x 7/22 x 4 x : 8.49 Say 8.50 mtr.
It is proposed to provide _Three_ No. F/Beds of _8.50_ mtr. dia each. One
No. F/Bed of_8.50_ M dia will be provided to act as stand bye.
Cost provision for provide 3 No. F/Beds of 8.50M dia has been made in the
estimate.
6. CLEAR WATER TANK (CWT)
Capacity required @ 50% of the daily requirement : 282950 x50=141475 Ltr.
100
No. of proposed CWT : 1 No.
Working depth : 1.65 mtr.
Proposed size = 141475 x 1/1.65 x 1/1000 x 7/22 x 4/1: 10.44 Say 10.50 Mtr.
It is proposed to provided one No. CWT of 10.50 m dia to cater the need.
Cost provision for construction of CWT has been made in this estimate.
7. PUMP CHAMBER (PC)
A pump chamber of 6.10m x 4.88m to house of machinery, Silver
Ionization Plant is required.
Cost provision for construction of Pump Chamber has been made in this estimate.
8. SITE LAYING AT HEAD WORKS
 To protect the government property it is essential to provide toe wall with
angle iron pickets and barbed wire fencing. Provision for the same has been
made in the estimate.
Length of toe wall around water works
: 2 (122 +134) = 512 mtr
Cost provision for construction of site laying at head works has been made
in this estimate.
9. OVER HEAD SERVICE RESERVOIR (OHSR)
Total daily requirement = 282950 Ltr.
Required capacity @ 50% of daily requirement
282950 x 50/100 : 141415 liter. Say150000 Ltr.
It is proposed to construct one OHSR of 150000 Ltr. Capacity with sill
level 23.50 m above natural ground level(NGL) and FSL 28.00 m above NGL.
It is proposed to covered the space from GL to first brace with brick work
& RCC slab will be provided at first brace and it will be used as stone etc.
Cost provision includes OHSR C.I. pipes and specials, electronic water level
indicators, plinth protection, outlet and scour Haudies etc has been made in this
estimate.
10. MACHINERY (Pump Sets)
(A) Requirement
Raw Water Set at Minor :- Raw water pumping set at Lakker Wala Minor for
pipe inlet channel. The raw water from Lakker Wala Minor through 1.50Mtr. i/d
haudi will be pumped in S/S tank trough piped inlet channel 3380 Mtr. long.
Daily design discharge : 1273200 liter
Pumping Hours : 6 hours.
Pumping capacity per hour : 1273200/6=212200 liter/hour
Pumping capacity per minute : 212200x1/60= 3537 liter/min
Pumping capacity per second : 3537x1/60= 58.94 Liter/second
(i) Pumping head for Raw Water pumping set
Suction lift from S&S well : 1.50 mtr.
Hydraulic head above FSL of S/S Tank : 3.00 mtr.
Loss of head in pipes & pumping set : 6.00 mtr.
Loss of head in specials @ 10% : 0.60 mtr.
Total 11.10 mtr. Say 12.00 mtr.
BHP of raw water electric motor with 65% efficiency
58.94 X 12 x 100
102 x 0.746 x 65 = 15.49 BHP Say = 17.50 BHP
(B) Requirement
 Daily requirement of water : 282950 liter
Pumping Hours : 6 hours.
Pumping capacity per hour : 282950/6 = 47158 liter/hour
Pumping capacity per minute : 47158x 1/60= 786 liter/min
Pumping capacity per second : 786 x1/60= 13.10 Liter/second

(i) Pumping head for Raw Water pumping set

Suction lift from S&S well to HLT : 7.50 mtr.
Hydraulic head above FSL of HLT : 2.50 mtr.
Loss of head in pipes & pumping set : 1.50 mtr.
Loss of head in specials @ 10% : 0.15 mtr.
Total 11.65 mtr. Say 12.00 mtr.
BHP of raw water electric motor with 65% efficiency
13.10 X 12 x 100
102 x 0.746 x 65 = 3.18 BHP Say = 5.00 BHP

(i) Pumping head for clear water pumping set

Height of OHSR upto FSL : 28.00 mtr.
Suction lift from CWT : 5.00 mtr.
Hydraulic head above FSL of OHSR : 5.00 mtr.
Loss of head in pipes and pumping set : 1.50 mtr.
Loss of head in specials @ 10% : 0.15 mtr.
Total 39.65 mtr. Say 40.00 mtr.
BHP of clear water electric motor with 65% efficiency
13.10 X 40 x 100
102 x 0.746 x 65 = 10.59 BHP Say = 12.50 BHP
So provide one No. Raw Water electrical driven pumping set at Lakker
Wala Minor for piped inlet channel of 17.50 BHP having discharge of 3537 LPM
with 12.00 Mtr. head and One No. Raw water set at water works of 5.00 BHP
having discharge of 786 LPM with 12.00 Mtr. head. One No. clear water electrical
driven pumping sets of 12.50 BHP and 40.00 Mtr. head.
Three phase electricity in the villages is electric and mostly available for 4
to 6 hrs daily. Due to this situation, raw water can not be pumped in to High level
Tank to keep the filters in operation for all twenty four hours. So it is proposed to
provide One No. generating set for raw water pumping set and one No.
generating set for clear water pumping set.

11. Capacity of Generating Set

 (a) BHP of Raw Water electric motor = 5 BHP
Capacity of generating set :- 5.00 x 0.746 x 1.25 = 4.66 KVA
Add 10% extra for over loading = 0.47 KVA
Total = 5.13 KVA
Say = 7.50 KVA
So provide One No. generating sets of 7.50 KVA for raw water which will
be act as stand bye arrangement at that time of failure of electricity.
11. Electric accessories
Provision for panel board consisting of switch, starter, MCB, earth leaking,
fuses etc. has been made in the estimate.
12. DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
To make available drinking water to every house in the village, pipe line
has been designed and proposed to be laid in the left out street and abadis of the
village. With the increased demand of water some of the old lines do not cater for
the requirement and require replacement. Following provision have been made in
the estimate.
1. New Lines
(i) Common Facility
200mm AC = 570 mtr.
(ii) Village Tamkot
100mm AC = 285 mtr.
80mm AC = 5491 mtr.
(ii) Village Chak Tamkot
150mm AC = 1500 mtr.
100mm AC = 977 mtr.
80mm AC = 3370 mtr
Necessary provision for sluice valve, for the Haudies and other specials has
also been made in the estimate.
DETAILED SCHEME REPORT FOR PROVIDING SAFE DRINKING WATER TO VILLAGE
TAMKOT & CHAK TAMKOT (2 NOS.) BIFURCATED FROM EXISTING WATER SUPPLY
SCHEME PHULLEWALA BLOCK MALOUT DISTT. MUKTSAR (UNDER WORLD BANK
PILOT PROJECT)
CALCULATION FOR PIPES AT HEAD WORKS
(Reference Flow diagram & layout plan of head works of the scheme)
Total Daily Requirement of Water Supply. = 318300 Litres.
Design Discharge with 6 hours pumping:
318300x24/6 = 1273200 Litres.
or = 1273 Kiloliters.
a)FROM S/S TANK TO SUCTION CUM SCOUR WELL.
Av. Ground Level. = 199.28 Mtr.
Discharged. = 1273 Kiloliters.
FSL of S/S Tank. = 199.28 Mtr.
BL of S/S Tank. = 196.78 Mtr.
Distance = 45 Mtr.
Provide 200mm i/d A.C.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kilolitres/day
with loss of head 1.63 mtr.per 1000 mtrs. of pipe line at velocity of 0.45 Mtr./second.
Therefore fall will be = 1.63x45/1000 =0.07 Say: 0.10 Mtrs.
FSL of Suction Cum Scour Well: 196.78 (-) 0.10 = 196.68 Mtr.
BL the Suction Cum Scour Well: 196.68 (-) 1.00 = 195.68 Mtr.

b)FROM SUCTION WELL TO PUMP CHAMBER.

Discharge = 1273 Kiloliters.
Floor level of Pump Chamber. = 199.58 Mtr
Distance = 5 Mtr.
Providing 200mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kilolitres/day
with a loss of head 2.30 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs.of pipe line at a velocity of 0.45 Mtr/second.

c)FROM PUMP CHAMBER TO HIGH LEVEL TANK.

Av.Ground Level. = 199.28 Mtr.
Floor level of Pump Chamber. = 199.58 Mtr.
Bed level of the HLT. = 200.28 Mtr.
FSL of HLT= 200.28+1.80Mtr. = 202.08 Mtr.
Discharged. = 1273 Kilolitres.
 Maximum Distance. =40 Mtrs.
Providing 200mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kilolitres/day
with a loss of head 2.30 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs.of pipe line at a velocity of 0.45Mtr./second.

d) FROM HIGH LEVEL TANK TO FILTER BED.

Bed level of High Level Tank. = 200.28 Mtrs.
Discharge. 318300 Litres. or = 318 Kilolitres.
Maximum distance. = 60 Mtrs.
Providing 150mm i/d A.C.pipe which can carry a discharge of 330kilolitres/day
with a loss of head 0.51 Mtrs.per1000 Mtrs.of pipe line at a velocity of0.22Mtrs/second.
Therefore fall will be :-0.51x60/1000 = 0.03 Mtrs. Say:0.10 Mtrs.
FSL of F.Beds. = 200.28 (-)0.10 Mtr. = 200.18 Mtrs.
Top Level of the filter media. = 200.18 (-) 1.00 Mtr. = 199.18 mtr.

e) FROM FILTER BED TO CLEAR WATER TANK.

Discharge 318300 Liters or = 318 Kililitres.
Maximum distance. =40 Mtrs.
Providing 150mm i/d A.C.pipe which can carry a discharge of 330 Kilolitres/day
with a loss of head 0.51 Mtr per 1000 Mtrs. of pipe line at a velocity of 0.22Mtr/second.
Therefore fall will be 0.51x40/1000 =0.02Mtrs. Say: 0.10 Mtrs.
Top level of filter media = 199.18 mtr.
FSL of CWT. = 199.18 (-) 0.10 = 199.08 Mtr.
Bed level of CWT. = 199.08 (-) 1.65 = 197.43 Mtr.
f) FROM CLEAR WATER TANK TO PUMP CHAMBER.
Discharge. = 1273200 Litres or 1273 Kilolitres.
Maximum Distance. = 25 Mtrs.
Providing 200mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 kilolitres per day
with a loss of head 2.30 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs. of pipe line at a velocity of 0.45 Mtr. per
second.

g) FROM PUMP CHAMBER TO O.H.S.R.

Discharge. = 1273200 Litres or 1273 Kilolitres.
Maximum Distance. = 40 Mtr.
Providing 200mm i/d C.I.pipe which can carry a discharge of 1300 Kilolitres per day
with a loss of head 2.30 Mtr.per 1000 Mtrs. of pipe line at a velocity of 0.45 Mtr.per
second.
h) BYE PASS.
Provide 200mm i/d C.I. pipe = 20 Mtrs.
i) SCOUR PIPE:
Provide 150mm i/d A.C.pipe = 90 Mtrs
 5 Capacity Calculation of OHSR for a Typical Rural Water Supply Scheme

Electricity availbilty in a Village =5-7 Hours

Average Pumping Time = 6 Hours

Water Supply Time 6-9 AM 3 hours

Noon 12-1 1 hours
5-7 PM 2 hours
Time duration 6 hours
average supply 0.166667
Average demand during morning hours 1.25 times the avrage supply
Average Demand during morinig 0.208333 per hour
Toatl supply in morning 0.625
Balance supply 0.375
Balance supply rate in evening and noon 0.125 1.666667
Case I
Pumping Time Night Shift 6-12 PM

Duration 6 Hours
Averge Hourly Pumping 0.166667

Hours Hourly Pumping Cummulative Average Cummulat Surplus/ Max Max

rate Pumping Demand ive Deficit Surplus deficit
Demand

1 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 -0.75
7 0 0 0.208333 0.208333 -0.20833
8 0 0 0.208333 0.416667 -0.41667
9 0 0 0.208333 0.625 -0.625
10 0 0 0.625 -0.625
11 0 0 0.625 -0.625
12 0 0 0.125 0.75 -0.75
13 0 0 0.75 -0.75
14 0 0 0.75 -0.75
15 0 0 0.75 -0.75
16 0 0 0.75 -0.75
 17 0 0 0.75 -0.75
18 0.166666667 0.16666667 0.125 0.875 -0.70833
19 0.166666667 0.33333333 0.125 1 -0.66667
20 0.166666667 0.5 1 -0.5
21 0.166666667 0.66666667 1 -0.33333
22 0.166666667 0.83333333 1 -0.16667
23 0.166666667 1 1 0 0
24

Capacity of OHSR 0.75 of total daily requirement

Demand Supply Curve

Suuply Curve Demand Curve

1.2

0.8
Flow

0.6

0.4

0.2

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
Time
 Capacity Calculation of OHSR for a Typical Rural Water Supply Scheme
Case II- Morning shift electrcicity=6-1 PM
Electricity availbilty in a Village =5-7 Hours

Average Pumping Time = 6 Hours

Water Supply Time 6-9 AM 3 hours

Noon 12-1 1 hours
5-7 PM 2 hours
Time duration 6 hours
average supply 0.166667
Average demand during morning hours 1.25 times the avrage supply
Average Demand during morinig 0.208333 per hour
Toatl supply in morning 0.625
Balance supply 0.375
Balance supply rate in evening and noon 0.125

Pumping Time Morning shift6-12 AM

Duration 6 Hours
Averge Hourly Pumping 0.166667

Hours Hourly Pumping Cummulative Average Cummulat Surplus/ Max Max

rate Pumping Demand ive Deficit Surplus deficit
Demand

1 0 0 0 0 0
2 0 0 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0 0
4 0 0 0 0 0
5 0 0 0 0 0
6 0.166666667 0.16666667 0.208333 0.208333 -0.04167 0.375 -0.125
7 0.166666667 0.33333333 0.208333 0.416667 -0.08333
8 0.166666667 0.5 0.208333 0.625 -0.125
9 0.166666667 0.66666667 0.625 0.041667
10 0.166666667 0.83333333 0.625 0.208333
11 0.166666667 1 0.625 0.375
12 1 0.125 0.75 0.25
13 0 1 0.75 0.25
14 0 1 0.75 0.25
15 0 1 0.75 0.25
16 0 1 0.75 0.25
17 0 1 0.75 0.25
 18 0 1 0.125 0.875 0.125
19 0 1 0.125 1 0
20 0 1 1 0
21 0 1 1 0
22 0 1 1 0
23 0 1 1 0 0
24

Capacity of OHSR 0.5 of total daily requirement

Demand Supply Curve

Suuply Curve Demand Curve

1.1

0.9

0.8

0.7
Flow

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

Time